JP7468886B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that draws a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole, and displays a moving image on a display device, which then freezes and freezes the image in a manner according to the result of the lottery. If the lottery results in a jackpot, the display device freezes and the jackpot image is displayed, creating a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, as such a winning game, many gaming machines have been proposed that include a plurality of winning games with different expected numbers of gaming media to be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-220861 A

However, there is room for further improvement in the presentation of each of the multiple winning games . Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that is capable of suppressing a decline in interest in the game by implementing improvements in the presentation of each of the multiple winning games .

Means 1: A lottery means for conducting a lottery to determine whether a prize is awarded or not based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition;
a bonus awarding means for awarding one of a plurality of bonuses including at least a first bonus and a second bonus based on a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the lottery;
a performance display means for displaying the performance executed by the performance execution means;
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The expected number of gaming profits that can be awarded to the player when the second privilege is awarded is configured to be smaller than that when the first privilege is awarded,
When the first special benefit is awarded, a congratulatory image is not displayed on the effect display means, and when the second special benefit is awarded, the congratulatory image can be displayed on the effect display means,
A sense of expectation effect can be executed as a precursor effect for the congratulatory image to be displayed, and the congratulatory image is always displayed when the sense of expectation effect is executed and a specific effect is achieved instead of a predetermined effect,
After the congratulatory image is displayed, a congratulatory continuation image different from the congratulatory image can be displayed, and when the second benefit is again granted, both the expectation production and the congratulatory image are not displayed at the same time;
In a situation where the congratulations continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the congratulations continuation image can be hidden during the progress of the performance based on the result of the lottery,
When a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the continuation blessing image may be displayed again even if the continuation blessing image is once hidden ,
In a situation where the congratulations continuation image is displayed, a prompting image for prompting an operation on the operation unit and a predetermined performance display that can be hidden based on an operation on the operation unit can be displayed,
In a situation where the congratulation continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first privilege is performed, the predetermined performance display is made non-displayed together with the prompt image during the progress of the performance based on the result of the lottery even if no operation is performed on the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above configuration, a congratulatory image that is always displayed when a specific performance result is achieved in the anticipation performance is not displayed when the first bonus is awarded, but can be displayed on the performance display means when the second bonus, which has a smaller expected number of game media than when the first bonus is awarded, is awarded.

Although there is a risk that the player's sense of excitement may decrease when a second bonus involving a smaller expected number of gaming media is awarded, by displaying a congratulatory image when the second bonus is awarded, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's sense of excitement, and ultimately to suppress a decrease in interest in the game (see, for example, paragraphs [2499] to [2590] and Figures 239 to 244).

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left and right outer frame assemblies of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34 (a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. 1A is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41 (a). 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the location of the lower tray ball supply port, (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a), and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of this embodiment and the conventional product. This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit area in the tray unit of the door frame. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 1A seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and at the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the upper end of its movement position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative board of the performance operation unit, the outer decorative board of the buttons, and the inner decorative board of the buttons in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of multiple contact detection bodies connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate unit's left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit, etc. can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). FIG. 1A is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact in FIG. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame foul cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of a main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of a second embodiment. 106 in an assembled state together with a spherical tank, (b) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the rear. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., taken along the kerk line. An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the right rear. FIG. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 1A is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 1B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the tank rail and its vicinity in FIG. 114(b). 10A is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 10B is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 10C is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the rear. 1A is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front right, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front left. 119(a) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119(b) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. 119(a) is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119(a) seen from behind. 119(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K-I in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. (a) is an oblique view of the base unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the base unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 127 from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 from the lower right rear. 127A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, FIG. 127B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 127A, and FIG. 127C is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 129(a). 128 is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 127 seen from the rear. 128A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the front, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of linear illegal tools into the board unit of FIG. 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 127. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, in which the center device and other parts are made opaque. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmicks and other parts made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 . 146 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145 . 1A is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a front view of a side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit as seen from behind. 1A is a front view of the center part of the front unit, FIG. 1B is an enlarged view of the part A in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view of FIG. This is an oblique view of the center part from the bottom rear left. 1A is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the interference nails, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 152 , (a) is an exploded oblique view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate in Figure 152, seen from the rear and seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rear unit of the game board. FIG. 4 is a front view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit. 1A is a perspective view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit as viewed from the rear. 157. FIG. 157(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box shown in FIG. 157 broken down into its main components as seen from the front, and FIG. 158. FIG. 158(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 158 as seen from the rear. 1A is a side view showing the rear unit placed face down using the functional surface portion, and FIG. 1B is a side view showing the rear unit placed face up using the functional surface portion. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-lower front decoration of the back-lower front performance unit and the back-lower rear decoration of the back-lower rear performance unit in the back unit have each moved to their raised positions. This is a front view of the game board showing that the back-lower front decorative body of the back-lower front performance unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved above the back-lower front decorative body, and the back-lower rear decorative body of the back-lower rear performance unit has moved below the back-lower front decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left and front right decorative bodies in the back-lower-front decorative body of the back-lower-front performance unit have moved to the open position, revealing the central decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position, and the back-lower rear decorative body of the back-lower rear performance unit has risen and is abutting the back-upper rear decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body of the back-lower-front decorative body of the back-lower-front performance unit have moved to the open position, revealing the central decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-upper front decorative body of the back-upper front performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position while the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved rear of the back-upper front decorative body, the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit has risen and moved below the back-upper front decorative body while the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and abutted against the back-upper rear decorative body behind the back-down front decorative body. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a front view of a game board of a second embodiment, showing the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area through which game balls circulate. 13A is a perspective view of a center device on a game board of a second embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the center device on a game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. 169, (a) is an exploded oblique view of the right half of the center role in Figure 169, showing the center front right plate and ball guiding unit disassembled from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of (a) from the rear. (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center role of Figure 169, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the C line in FIG. 171, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the S--S line in FIG. 171, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the T--T line in FIG. 171. 171 , (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball guiding unit in FIG. 171 , viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball guiding unit in FIG. 171 , viewed from the front left. FIG. 13 is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. 174 的前部件、ゲーム表、面板、面板飾り板板底底板上构成的图(a)是图174的前部件、ゲーム表、面板、面板构造板底板上构成的图(b)是图174 的前部件、ゲーム表、面板构造板下构造板上构成的图(b)是图174 的後端、面板构造板下构造板上构成的图(a)是图174的前部件、ゲーム表、面板构造板下构造板上构成的图(b)是图174的後端、面板构造板下构造板上构成的图(b)。 FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the game board of Figure 174 when This is an exploded oblique view of the game board in Figure 174, showing the front components, game panel, and panel decorative base plate disassembled. This is an exploded oblique view from the rear of the game board in Figure 174 with the front components, game panel, and panel decorative base disassembled. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the panel decorative board, where (a) (a1) is an explanatory diagram viewed from the front with the LED of the panel decorative board turned off, (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) in cross section, and (b) (b1) is an explanatory diagram viewed from the front with the LED of the panel decorative board turned on, and (b2) is an explanatory diagram showing (b1) in cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a portion of a gaming panel on which a specific part having a different shape than the specific part in Figure 178 is provided, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a portion of a gaming panel on which a specific part having an even different shape is provided, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a gaming panel on which a specific part having an even different shape is provided. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having special portions of different thicknesses together with a panel decorative substrate; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a conical rear surface together with a panel decorative substrate; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a light-blocking coating provided on the side of a blind hole-shaped recess together with a panel decorative substrate; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a light-blocking sleeve provided in a blind hole-shaped recess together with a panel decorative substrate. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel having a special portion formed by a groove-shaped recess, together with a panel decorative substrate; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel having a substrate accommodating recess for accommodating a panel decorative substrate, together with a panel decorative substrate; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel having a special portion filled with a transparent material in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel, together with a panel decorative substrate; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel having a special portion filled with a transparent material in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front surface of the game panel, together with a panel decorative substrate. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a game panel having a varying thickness and a panel decorative substrate, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship different from that of FIG. 13 is an exploded oblique view of a fourth embodiment of a game board, showing the panel plate, rear sheet, and panel decorative substrate disassembled from the front. FIG. 1A is a plan view showing the configuration of the winning slots in the game board, and FIG. 1B is a side cross-sectional view of FIG. 1A is a side cross-sectional view showing the outline of the configuration of the winning opening of this embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a side cross-sectional view showing the outline of the configuration of a conventional winning opening. 13A and 13B are perspective views showing a winning hole in which the ball entry direction is inclined and in which different embodiments of guide piece portions are provided. 13A and 13B are perspective views showing a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of yet another embodiment. 13A and 13B are perspective views showing a winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of yet another embodiment. This is an oblique view showing a conventional winning opening in which the ball entry direction is inclined. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the starting hole unit and the center device in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged cross section of the relationship between the positioning pin and mounting hole in (a) and the game panel. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a positioning pin portion in a front unit according to still another embodiment. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the positioning pin portion of a front unit of yet another embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the portion of (b) abutted against a game panel. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing one embodiment of a flow passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a flow passage of an embodiment different from that of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is an explanatory diagram showing a flow passage having a conventional detection sensor. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention part for game balls on a rolling surface, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention part of an embodiment different from that of (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention part of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface that does not have a stop prevention part. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 195. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 198. Following Figure 199, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S280). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit pattern determination table (B), and a small hit pattern determination table (C). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S283). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing (step S235A). 1 is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a pachinko machine and the distribution of winning patterns of special chart 1 and special chart 2. 1 is an example of a table showing the winning probability of a pachinko machine and the distribution of winning patterns of special chart 1 and special chart 2. A transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of a pachinko machine. 13 is an example of a time-saving count table for a low-probability non-time-saving game state. 13 is an example of a time-saving count table for a high-probability time-saving game state. 13 is an example of a time-saving count table for a low-probability time-saving game state. 13 is an example of a time-saving count table for a high-probability non-time-saving game state. 13 is an example of a fluctuation pattern auxiliary table. 13 is an example of a fluctuation pattern auxiliary table. 13 is an example of a hit time table. This is an example of a large prize opening time table. 13 is an example of a large prize opening pattern table. 13 is an example of a large prize opening pattern table. 13 is an example of a large prize opening pattern table. 13 is an example of a simultaneous change rule table. 13 is an example of a simultaneous change rule table. 11 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 4. 11 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 5; 11 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 6. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation in which a low-probability non-time-saving game state transitions from a high-probability non-time-saving game state via a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) to a high-probability non-time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation in which a low-probability non-time-saving game state transitions from a high-probability non-time-saving game state via a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) to a high-probability non-time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation in which a low-probability non-time-saving game state transitions from a high-probability non-time-saving game state via a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) to a high-probability non-time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the presentation of a high-probability non-time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation that is performed when transitioning from a high-probability non-time-saving game state to a low-probability time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a comment selection presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection presentation.

The present embodiment includes the means described below.
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front where the game is played,
A gaming machine comprising a rear unit having a decorative body visible through the gaming panel and a holder for holding the decorative body and attached to a rear side of the gaming panel,
The holder is
A specific surface portion is formed behind the front surface of the ornament,
The specific surface portion is
It is characterized in that it is "provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front."

Here, examples of "game areas" include "areas that have an acceptance port (e.g., a start port, a variable start port, etc.) where a special lottery is held to generate a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage upon acceptance of a game medium" and "areas that have an acceptance port (e.g., a general prize port, a start port, a big prize port, a special prize port, a V prize port, etc.) where benefits including the payout of game media are granted upon acceptance of a game medium" etc.

Examples of "game panel" include "one made of a single member" and "one composed of a flat panel board and a frame-shaped panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board."

The "game panel" may be transparent, opaque and translucent, or non-translucent. Examples of materials that may be used to make the "game panel" include polystyrene, acrylic resin, polycarbonate, acetal resin, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene, polypropylene, and plywood.

Examples of configurations that are "visible" through the game panel include "a game panel that is transparent and can be seen through the transparent parts of the game panel" and "a game panel that has an opening that penetrates from the front to the back and can be seen through the opening of the game panel."

Furthermore, the "decorative body" may be immovable, or may be movable as the game progresses. The "decorative body" may be capable of illuminating or may not be capable of illuminating. The "decoration" of the decorative body may be a three-dimensional decoration with unevenness such as a 3D model or a relief, or a two-dimensional decoration with printing or display (liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device, light guide plate, etc.).

In addition, examples of the "decoration" of the decorative body include "decoration imitating a specific character in line with the concept of the gaming machine," "decoration imitating a specific item in line with the concept of the gaming machine," "decoration imitating a specific background or scene in line with the concept of the gaming machine," "decoration with a specific logo, dialogue, etc. in line with the concept of the gaming machine," "decoration with a geometric pattern," etc.

Examples of "holding body" include "a box-shaped object that holds a decorative object at its front end or inside and is open at the front", "a frame-shaped object that holds a decorative object at its front end or inside", "a box-frame-shaped object that holds a decorative object at its front end or inside and holds a performance display device capable of displaying a performance image at the rear", etc. The "holding body" may be something that holds the decorative object so that the front of the decorative object protrudes forward beyond the front end of the holding body, or it may be something that holds the decorative object so that the front of the decorative object does not protrude forward beyond the front end of the holding body.

Furthermore, examples of "specific surface portions" include "flat surfaces parallel to the front surface of the game panel", "curved surfaces concave backward in a conical or frustum shape", "multi-sided surfaces concave backward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", "curved surfaces protruding forward in a conical or frustum shape", "multi-sided surfaces protruding forward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", etc.

The "specific surface portion" may be provided at the front end of the holder, or may be provided behind the front end of the holder. The "specific surface portion" may be composed of a number of island-shaped surfaces that are separated from each other, a number of band-shaped surfaces along each edge of the holder, or a single band-frame-shaped or frame-shaped surface along the periphery of the holder.

Examples of "prescribed parts" include "support tables such as workbenches used during assembly, transportation, storage, etc.," "tools used in assembly work," "other parts before assembly," etc.

By holding the decorative body on the holder as far forward as possible, it is possible to bring the decorative body closer to the game area and make the decorative body easier to see. However, if the decorative body is held as far forward as possible on the holder, the front of the decorative body is more likely to come into contact with work tables, tools, other members (components), etc. during the assembly work of the gaming machine, making the decorative body more likely to be damaged. If the decorative body is damaged, it will need to be replaced with a new one, which increases the cost of the gaming machine. Furthermore, if the decorative body is assembled into the gaming machine without noticing that it has a scratch, the presence of the scratch will make the gaming machine look worse, which will reduce the interest of the player.

According to the configuration of Means 1, a gaming machine is provided with a flat gaming panel with a gaming area in front of which is provided a gaming area where games are played, a decorative body visible through the gaming panel, and a rear unit having a holder that holds the decorative body and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel. The holder has a specific surface portion formed behind the front surface of the decorative body, and the specific surface portion is arranged to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front (see the description of Chapter 5-9a. Rear Box Relations, Figures 156 to 160, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, since the specific surface portion is located behind the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be made to stand out more than the specific surface portion, and since the decorative body can be located relatively further forward, the distance from the player to the decorative body can be shorter than before, making the decoration of the decorative body easier to see. In addition, since the decorative body can be located further forward, the front surface of the decorative body can be brought closer to a position in the front-to-rear direction of the play area, so that when the play area is focused on, the decorative body is also focused on, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while viewing the play area. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the holder that holds the decorative body is provided with a specific surface portion, for example, when the decorative body is held by the holder and the game machine is placed face down on a specific member consisting of a mounting table such as a workbench with the front end side facing downward, contact of the specific member with the front of the decorative body can be avoided by interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member that is higher than the distance from the front of the decorative body to the specific surface portion between the specific member and the specific surface portion. In this case, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder does not tilt or swing, and the holder can be placed face down in a stable state. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the front of the decorative body due to contact with the specific member, maintain the decorative body in good condition, and prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the specific member.

In addition, as mentioned above, the specific surface portion can prevent contact between the decorative body and a specific component, so that the holder holding the decorative body can be placed face down and other components can be attached or wired to the rear side of the holder.

Furthermore, because the holder has a special surface, it can be placed face down even when it is not holding an ornament, as opposed to when a special surface is provided on the ornament. Therefore, the holder can be placed face down even during assembly, making it possible to accommodate a variety of work conditions.

In addition, when the specific surface portion arranged to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit is composed of multiple surfaces that are separated from each other, it is desirable to arrange each specific surface portion at the same position in the front-rear direction. This allows the length (height) of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holder and the specified member when laying it down on the specified member to be the same, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved while reducing the labor of assembly work, etc. In more detail, when the positions of each specific surface portion in the front-rear direction are made different, the length (height) of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holder and the specified member when laying the holder or the rear unit down will be different. As a result, when laying the holder or the rear unit down, there is a risk that an intermediate member with a length that does not correspond to the specific surface portion will be used, and if an intermediate member that does not correspond is used, the holder or the rear unit will tilt and the front surface of the decorative body may come into contact with the specified member. In response to this, as described above, by making the front-to-back positions of each specific surface part the same, the length (height) of all the intermediate parts can be made the same, so that when placing the holder or back unit face down, it is sufficient to prepare intermediate parts of the same length, and it is possible to prevent the use of intermediate parts of different lengths that do not correspond to the specific surface parts. This avoids the occurrence of problems caused by certain parts coming into contact with the front surface of the decorative body, reduces the effort required for assembly work, etc., and suppresses increases in the costs of the gaming machine.

The functional surface portion may also be formed in a shape other than flat, such as a shape recessed toward the rear or a shape protruding toward the front. This allows the intermediate member that abuts against the functional surface portion when the holder or rear unit is laid face down to be shaped to fit (engage) with the shape of the functional surface portion, thereby restricting movement in a direction along the surface of the specified member when the holder or rear unit is laid face down. This prevents the functional surface portion from falling off the intermediate member and causing the holder or rear unit to tilt or fall, thereby preventing the front surface of the decorative body from abutting against the specified member due to tilting or falling, and ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

The specific surface portion may also be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (so as to be visible when viewed from the rear). This allows for easy assembly work, such as having the holder hold a decorative object from the front, by interposing a column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit between the specific surface portion and the specified member with the front end of the holder facing upward (turned up), thereby preventing the specified member from coming into contact with the rear surface of the rear unit. This allows for the holder or rear unit to be stabilized in a turned-up position, making assembly work from the front end of the holder easier.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the special surface portion behind the front surface of the holder. This ensures that when the holder is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel, the special surface portion does not come into contact with the gaming panel, and the holder (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the gaming panel without any problems.

The holder may further have a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member abutting the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and a specified member). In this way, when the holder or rear unit is placed face down with the intermediate member interposed between a specified member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion during assembly work, the intermediate member abuts against the restricting portion, thereby restricting the movement of the holder (rear unit) in a direction along the surface of the specified member. Therefore, the restricting portion of the holder can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off the intermediate member and the holder or rear unit from tilting or falling, and therefore the front surface of the decorative body can be prevented from abutting against the specified member due to tilting or falling, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, when the holder is provided with a restricting portion as described above, the restricting portion can restrict the movement of the holder or the rear unit in a direction along a specified member, making it difficult for the holder or the rear unit to move when placed face down. This makes it easier to assemble the holder or the rear unit when placed face down, and helps prevent an increase in the costs of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, it is desirable to have the front of the decorative body protrude further forward than the holder. As a result, since the front of the decorative body protrudes further forward than the front of the holder, the distance from the player to the decorative body can be shorter than in the past, the decoration of the decorative body can be more easily seen, and the decorative body can be made to stand out, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of the player. Furthermore, when the front of the decorative body protrudes further forward than the front of the holder, the front-to-rear position of the front (decoration) of the decorative body can be brought as close as possible to the front-to-rear position of the play area, so that when the play area is focused, the decorative body is also focused, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while viewing the play area, and the decoration of the decorative body can be reliably seen by the player. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

The decorative body may also be made capable of executing a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. In this way, when the decorative body executes a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game, the effect can make the decorative body stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention, allowing the player to enjoy the effect of the decorative body and making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The specific surface portion is
The present invention is characterized in that the holder is "located rearward of the front surface of the holder."

According to the configuration of means 2, the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holder (see the description of the functional surface portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, when attaching the holder to the rear of the gaming panel, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the gaming panel, and the holder (rear unit) can be attached to the rear of the gaming panel without any problems.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The holder is
The present invention is characterized in that it further comprises a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion.

Here, examples of the restricting portion include "a flat plate extending forward from the periphery of the specific surface portion," "a hole-shaped portion," "a groove-shaped portion," and the like.

According to the configuration of means 3, the holder further has a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member abutting the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and a specified member) (see the description of the rear box 3010 and the functional surface portion 3011 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, during assembly work, etc., when the holder or rear unit is placed face down with the intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion, the intermediate member abuts against the regulating portion, thereby regulating the movement of the holder (rear unit) in a direction along the surface of the specific member. Therefore, the regulating portion of the holder can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off the intermediate member and causing the holder or rear unit to tilt or fall, which prevents the front surface of the decorative body from abutting against the specific member due to tilting or falling, and ensures the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the restricting portion can restrict the movement of the holder or rear unit in a direction along a specific member, the holder or rear unit can be made difficult to move when placed face down, making it easier to assemble in the face down position and preventing an increase in the costs of the gaming machine.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The decorative body is
The front surface of the holder protrudes forward beyond the holder.

Here, examples of a "decorative body" whose front surface protrudes forward beyond the holder include "a decorative body whose front end is inserted into a recessed portion at the rear surface of at least the portion of the gaming panel where the gaming area is located in the front," and "a decorative body whose front end is inserted into an opening that penetrates the gaming panel in the front-to-rear direction."

According to the configuration of means 4, the front surface of the decorative body is made to protrude forward from the holder (see the description of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, the front of the decorative body protrudes further forward than the front of the holder, making it possible to shorten the distance from the player to the decorative body compared to conventional methods, making the decoration of the decorative body easier to see and making the decorative body stand out, and providing a gaming machine that is capable of strongly attracting the player's interest. In addition, because the front of the decorative body protrudes further forward than the front of the holder, the front-to-back position of the front (decoration) of the decorative body can be brought as close as possible to the front-to-back position of the play area, so that when the play area is focused on, the decorative body is also focused on, making the decoration of the decorative body clearly visible while viewing the play area, and ensuring that the decoration of the decorative body is reliably visible to the player. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The decorative body is
It is characterized by being "capable of executing predetermined effects according to the progress of the game."

Here, "according to the progress of the game" means "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area is accepted by an acceptance port provided in the game area (e.g., a general winning port, a start port, a big winning port, a special winning port, a V winning port, etc.)," "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area (e.g., a gate, a warp passage, a stage, etc.)," or ... is accepted by an acceptance port provided in the game area (e.g., a special winning port, a V winning port, etc.)," or "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area (e.g., a gate, a warp passage, a stage, etc.)," or "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area (e.g., a special winning port, a V winning port, etc.)," or "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area (e.g., a special winning port, a V winning port, etc.)," or "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area (e.g., a special winning port, a V winning port, etc.)," or "as the game medium inserted by the player into the game area passes through a specific area provided in the game area." "according to the special lottery result drawn when the gaming medium inserted into the play area by the player is received into a receiving port (e.g., a starting port) provided in the play area," "according to the type of presentation (e.g., reach presentation, big win presentation, miss presentation, etc.) that suggests the special lottery result drawn when the gaming medium inserted into the play area by the player is received into a receiving port (e.g., a starting port) provided in the play area," "according to the amount of gaming medium inserted into the play area," "according to the length of the insertion blank of the gaming medium inserted into the play area," etc.

In addition, examples of specified "effects" include "light-emitting effects," "movement effects," "display effects of effect images," etc.

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is made capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game (see the description of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, when the decorative body performs a predetermined effect as the game progresses, the effect makes the decorative body stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention and allowing the player to enjoy the effect of the decorative body, while making the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A flat-shaped game panel with a game area in front where the game is played,
A gaming machine comprising a rear unit having a decorative body visible through the gaming panel and a holder for holding the decorative body and attached to a rear side of the gaming panel,
The decorative body is
The front surface of the device protrudes forward from the holder, and a predetermined effect can be executed according to the progress of the game.
The holder is
A specific surface portion is provided rearward of a front surface of the holder so as to surround a center of gravity of the rear unit in a front view;
and a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion.

According to the configuration of means 6, the gaming machine is equipped with a flat gaming panel with a gaming area in front where the game is played, a decorative body visible through the gaming panel, and a rear unit having a holder that holds the decorative body and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel, the front side of the decorative body protruding forward from the holder and capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, the holder having a specific surface portion that is provided behind the front surface of the holder so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit in a front view, and a restricting portion that can restrict the relative movement of a member abutting the specific surface portion.

As a result, the decorative body visible through the game panel with the game area in front is held by the holder attached to the rear side of the game panel, and the front of the decorative body protrudes forward from the holder, so the distance from the player to the decorative body can be shorter than before, making the decoration of the decorative body easier to see. In this case, since the specific surface part is provided behind the front surface of the holder, the specific surface part does not abut against the game panel, the holder (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problems, and the decorative body can be made more noticeable than the specific surface part. In addition, since the front surface of the decorative body protrudes forward from the front surface of the holder, the front-to-rear position of the front surface (decoration) of the decorative body can be brought as close as possible to the front-to-rear position of the game area, so that when the game area is focused on, the decorative body is also focused on, and the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly seen while viewing the game area, and the decoration of the decorative body can be reliably shown to the player. This allows the decorations to stand out and strongly attract the player's attention, while also ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorations is fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the decorative body is capable of executing a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game, when the decorative body executes a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game, the effect can make the decorative body stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention, allowing the player to enjoy the effect of the decorative body and making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the holder that holds the decorative body is provided with a specific surface portion, for example, when the decorative body is held by the holder and the game machine is placed face down on a specific member consisting of a mounting table such as a workbench with the front end side facing downward, contact of the specific member with the front of the decorative body can be avoided by interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member that is higher than the distance from the front of the decorative body to the specific surface portion between the specific member and the specific surface portion. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder does not tilt or swing, and the holder can be placed face down in a stable state. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the front of the decorative body due to contact with the specific member, maintain the decorative body in good condition, and prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the specific member.

In addition, as mentioned above, the specific surface portion can prevent contact between the decorative body and a specific component, so that the holder holding the decorative body can be placed face down and other components can be attached or wired to the rear side of the holder.

Furthermore, because the holder has a special surface, it can be placed face down even during assembly when it is not holding the decorative body, making it possible to accommodate a variety of work conditions, compared to when a special surface is provided on the decorative body.

In addition, the holder has a restricting portion that can restrict the relative movement of a member that abuts against the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and a specified member), so that when the holder or rear unit is placed face down with the intermediate member interposed between a specified member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion during assembly work, the intermediate member abuts against the restricting portion, thereby restricting the movement of the holder (rear unit) in a direction along the surface of the specified member. Therefore, the restricting portion of the holder can prevent the specific surface portion from falling off the intermediate member and causing the holder or rear unit to tilt or fall, so that the front surface of the decorative body can be prevented from abutting against the specified member due to tilting or falling, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, as described above, the restricting portion of the holder can restrict the movement of the holder or the rear unit in a direction along a specific member, making it difficult for the holder or the rear unit to move when placed face down. This makes it easier to assemble the device when placed face down, and helps prevent an increase in the costs of the gaming machine.

The specific surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface, such as a shape recessed toward the rear or a shape protruding toward the front. This allows the intermediate member that abuts against the specific surface portion when the holder or rear unit is laid face down to have a shape that fits (engages) with the shape of the specific surface portion, thereby restricting movement in a direction along the surface of the specific member when the holder or rear unit is laid face down. This prevents the holder or rear unit from tilting or falling due to the specific surface portion falling off the intermediate member, and prevents the front surface of the decorative body from abutting against the specific member due to tilting or falling, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

The specific surface portion may also be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (so as to be visible when viewed from the rear). This allows for easy assembly work, such as having the holder hold a decorative object from the front, by interposing a column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit between the specific surface portion and the specified member with the front end of the holder facing upward (turned up), thereby preventing the specified member from coming into contact with the rear surface of the rear unit. This allows for the holder or rear unit to be stabilized in a turned-up position, making assembly work from the front end of the holder easier.

Means 7: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 6,
The gaming machine includes:
A plurality of receiving openings are provided within the game area so as to be capable of receiving game media;
and a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the game media received through the receiving opening.

Here, the term "acceptance opening" refers to "a general winning opening that is always open within the game area", "a start winning opening (starting opening) that is always open within the game area and where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium will create a favorable game state for the player", "a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, gadget winning opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted within the game area by accepting the game medium at a specific acceptance opening (chucker) within the game area", and "a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, gadget winning opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted within the game area depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area". "A special opening (variable opening) that allows the game medium to be accepted depending on the result of a lottery for a normal pattern drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (e.g., a gate, a chucker, etc.) in the game area, and a special lottery is held to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium will create an advantageous game state in which the player is at an advantage," "A V opening that creates an advantageous game state in which the player is at an advantage when the game medium accepted by the game medium opening is allocated and accepted by an allocation means," "A large opening or a special opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to allow the acceptance of the game medium, creating an advantageous game state in which the player is at an advantage," etc.

In addition, the "pachinko machine" is one that includes "a lottery means for conducting a special lottery to generate a favorable gaming state in which the player is advantageous by receiving gaming media into the starting port, a special lottery result display means for variably displaying special symbols according to the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the lottery means and then displaying them as still symbols, and displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols, and an advantageous gaming state generating means for opening and closing a large prize port in a predetermined pattern when the lottery result of the special symbols that generate an advantageous gaming state is displayed by the special lottery result display means (so-called digital pachinko machines)," and "a device for allocating gaming media received into the role-playing prize port." "Equipped with a distribution means and an advantageous game state generating means that opens and closes the special prize opening in a predetermined pattern when the game medium distributed by the distribution means is received in the V prize opening, thereby generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (so-called "Hanemono" machine)," "Equipped with an advantageous game state generating means that has a large prize opening and a special prize opening, opens and closes the large prize opening or the special prize opening in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the lottery for a special pattern drawn by receiving the game medium in the start opening, and opens and closes the special prize opening or the large prize opening in a predetermined pattern when the game medium received in the special prize opening is distributed to the V prize opening, thereby generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (so-called "combined machine")," and so on.

According to the configuration of means 7, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine equipped with a plurality of receiving openings that are provided within the gaming area so that gaming media can be received, and a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media in response to the reception of the gaming media at the receiving openings. This allows the pachinko machine to achieve the action and effect of any of the above-mentioned means.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, seen from the right front. Also, Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that has a game area 5a that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3 and into which the player hits a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 has the lower outer frame assembly 40 which cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 also has a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is being executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only by playing with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a game ball supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is equipped with a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The game board 5 is made up of a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The game panel 1100 includes a display unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from a main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 includes various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 includes a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting hole 2005, and a first large winning hole 2006 that provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is accepted or passed through. The obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting hole 2005, and the first large winning hole 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

The player can shoot game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B so that it is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006, etc., in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by providing light-emitting and moving performances using the lower right unit 2400 and the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, rear upper front performance unit 3300, rear lower front performance unit 3400, rear upper rear performance unit 3500, rear lower rear performance unit 3600, etc. of the rear unit 3000.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 13 to 18. Fig. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Fig. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Fig. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Fig. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Fig. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and can invert the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the upper hinge assembly 50 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so that they can rotate on the same axis, and attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 that is attached to the lower end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface, which is one of three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the part on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

The left outer frame member 11 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20 described below.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 12c into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and further abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the underside of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch part 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending short to the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11 with the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a coinciding with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of three equal portions of the right side surface divided in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 21b that bulges to the left from the portion of the left side surface opposite the recess 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 22c into the hollow part 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing part 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21 with the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 22c abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 22a against the lower surface of the right end side of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 22b into the notch part 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear surface of the abutment part 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge part 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a coinciding with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c with the horizontal fixing part 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are hooked by the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 described below. The upper hook member 24 has a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece part 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting part 24a and hooks the upper outer frame hook 653.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a flat hook piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole 25c that penetrates the hook piece portion 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 described below.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing part 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at the left end, the top and front surfaces of which are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower Outer Frame Assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame when viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and is used to close off the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and extends left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right along the lower outer frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and is attached to the top surface of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is formed from wood. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end side. This recess 41b makes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43 as large as possible.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The front panel member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear panel member 43, thereby forming the front panel internal space 40a that becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the rear panel member 43. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front side near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear panel member 43 has the front panel member 42 attached to its front surface, and cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the interior space 40a of the panel, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right center of the upper surface, which extends left-right and protrudes upward and communicates with the interior space 40a of the panel. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is located higher from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a left-right length of approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire back panel member 43, and a front-rear depth slightly shorter than the depth of the entire back panel member 43. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front and rear ends are provided inside the connecting tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and is in communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a, forming an enclosure 624.

The ball trapping prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later can be attached, a first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protruding portion 44e protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slanting so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the front panel internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the front panel rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the front panel rear member 43.

If an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described below, the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the illegal tool from entering by using the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion portion 44e that protrudes forward at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a vertical wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the vertical wall portion 44d will prevent the game ball B from moving rearward relative to the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will be pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, causing a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or onto the placement portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge opening 44b, or through the second discharge opening 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43, a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear, a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward that is attached inside the front panel member 42 to close the opening 42a by sandwiching the grill member 46, and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is placed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material that has low friction resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 easier to slide on, facilitating opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like plate extending in the left-right direction, and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that the front end is higher than the rear end (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the front panel member 42 (the front panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and can resonate and amplify the low-pitched sounds emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 using the principle of Helmholtz resonance, radiating rich low-pitched sounds to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep low-pitched sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, and prevents sound from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking out from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the fascia board can be directed by the inclined vane portions 46b through the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 can be vibrated to send air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, because the port member 47 is open toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward, so that the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4 can be increased, allowing for a deeper bass sound to be output, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when disassembled and viewed from above the front, and Fig. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) when viewed from below the front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged and rotatable. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes an upper fixing portion 51a that is a flat plate extending horizontally and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a flat forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, and a flat edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge of the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b around the front edge to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens and is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described later) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a band-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension part 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c by means of mounting screws 53.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a portion forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b to rotate the locking body 52a in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, the locking body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 includes a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and large enough for only one game ball B to pass through. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to contact the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is placed on the mounting section 44a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The rising section 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, forward of the bulging section 11b, with screws (not shown). By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls to the rear side where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. In this case, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d, and game balls B are less likely to become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, vertically extending outer shape when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed into a vertically extending square (rectangle) in front view and penetrates from front to back, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as seen from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide it with rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to be used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and for locking and opening the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding the game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launching device 540 and have not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 is used to play a game in which the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540 by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, closing the front of the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, while allowing the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further comprises a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) with an outer shape extending vertically in front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape extending vertically in front view. The upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front and allows the entrance 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates from front to back adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. This through hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be well guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section, which holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has an outer shape that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape with a top part of a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right side of the top part when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending part is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is for relaying the connection between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude toward the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 that extend up and down are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the fall cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has an external shape formed in a rectangle extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e at the rear of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 is used to relay the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered by the handle rear relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (parts extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right sides, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and hook hook members 116 which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 at a distance from each other on the left and right sides and to which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a rectangular cutout 114a cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear pieces arranged at a distance from the left and right and formed as rectangular flat plates extending up and down when viewed from the front, a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces, and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the locations of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to rear. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by punching and bending metal plates using press molding. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled so that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the top reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, and the middle reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a number of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door-frame reinforcement unit 110, an upper door-frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the up-down direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper door-frame hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the portion that extends horizontally abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 in the upper body frame hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends upward and downward between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below, and remove it downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically and is positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described below. This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge parts]
The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 cooperates with the door-frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable thereabout.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the bottom edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatable relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 that is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it by inserting a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches.

In more detail, the cylinder lock 130 is provided with a first cam member 134 that is provided at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a position below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a band-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; and a band-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be able to rotate integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side forward of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. In addition, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with a screw (not shown), with the shaft 138a, which protrudes outward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of both the left and right sides, engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, and both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. With the use of a regular key, the cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the normal state.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise, whereas since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 becomes larger.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see Figure 36 (b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from the normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to the normal state, the action is reversed.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, the upper end of which is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, the upper end of which is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction, whereas since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the part where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, whereas the force of the second arm 137 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the clockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

When using the key to rotate the lock 90 degrees clockwise from its normal state to return it to its normal state by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the action is reversed.

In this way, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached at a 90 degree angle from each other to transmit rotation, so that no matter what rotation position the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in, rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), allowing for good locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

In addition, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be set at a different position relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131 by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be located in a position that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

In addition, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, so that a fraudster who knows this configuration may insert a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131 and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, opening the door frame 3 and committing a fraudulent act. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted at the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at that position, and fraudulent acts by opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a rotational angle of 90 degrees relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if the rotation from the first cam member 134 cannot be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by positioning one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137. This means that there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock, and also preventing the key inserted in the keyhole from being forcibly rotated, which prevents damage to the key.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If the rotation were transmitted by a gear, there would be a risk that the gear would rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 by catching the tip of a tool on the teeth of the gear. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 into a rod-shaped arm with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of a tool from getting caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked by unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this, and other mechanisms may be used, such as a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, or a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back with the rear case and the anti-tampering member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 having an entrance 141a penetrating in the front-to-rear direction through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b opening below the entrance 141a, and a rear cover 142 that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is box-shaped with an open front and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying the game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 141 and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b at the rear of the front covers 141; a ball delivery member 144 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front covers 141 and the rear covers 142 and delivers the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball delivery solenoid 145 that rotates the ball delivery member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed to the right of the entrance 141a, a ball extracting member 143 disposed to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 disposed to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 to the left of the ball extracting opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 described later extends forward from this slit 141c. In addition, the upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, the rear side closes the rear-open portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and the upstream end of the ball extracting guide path 241c of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball extracting unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a which is located below the entrance 141a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, a pivoting rod section 143b which extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and is bent in an L-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with its lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c which protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b, and a weight section 143d which protrudes from the side of the rotating rod section 143b below the operating rod 143c in the opposite direction to the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 has a cutoff portion 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis, which extends vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143, a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cutoff portion 144a toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The cutoff portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b in the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically to the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is adapted to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 rotates upward around the right end. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, rotating the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 downward around the right end, returning to the original state. As a result, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is caused to swing up and down at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball delivery crank 147 is equipped with an engagement portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and can engage with the tip of the ball delivery operating rod 146 that moves up and down, an axle portion 147b that is located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a that engages with the ball delivery operating rod 146 and is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a transmission portion 147c that extends upward from the axle portion 147b and engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball delivery member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The drive of the ball delivery solenoid 145 in this ball delivery unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the delivery solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 167) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also configured to apply a moment of rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball removal member 143, which is rotatably supported by a pivot, or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted by the actuation rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 coming into contact with the upper end of the actuation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to separate them, and the game ball B does not enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, and the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively as the actuation transmission part 242b moves downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to release the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball removal opening 141b side, and is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b against which the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 abuts, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 etc., and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached within the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached removably from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has an outer shape in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and is provided with an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center in the vertical direction a certain distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c that is formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that the right end when viewed from the front protrudes backward with respect to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right when viewed from the top.

When the tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is shot from the upper tray into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B into or out of the first starting hole 2004, etc., the momentum of the fraudulent game ball B shot (shot) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and the string can be cut by the narrow V-shaped area formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent activities using a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Also, Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game ball B that has been paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat cover member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 to the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through ball passage 150a and can connect to the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c that opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the play area 5a, and a ball discharge port 150d that opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward and is connected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e that is formed by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and has a lower end that is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, any further payout of game balls B is stopped and the fact is notified to the player or the attendant of the game hall, and the player can be prompted to clear the full tank of the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151 below the through ball passage 150a, and is provided with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as the rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and removably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glass unit attachment members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 161b protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the two upper corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and then abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit attachment part 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and abut the protrusion 163b against the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the body portion 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the shooting of game ball B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projection 172 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, with the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later, a disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 that is attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 that has the handle 195 attached to its front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that has a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

The handle unit 180 further includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer circumferential surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects the pressing operation of the single button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base 181a and extending axially, and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 is equipped with a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this example) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 195d and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), the three spoke parts 195b of the handle 195 extend horizontally to the left from the central hub part 195a, and two spoke parts 195b extend from the center in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spoke parts 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c into which the player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped radius side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be entirely translucent, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect the touch of the handle 195 even when only the outer circumferential ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer circumferential ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a come into contact with the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) in a triple concentric arrangement: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the circumference, two at the top right of the circumference, and two at the bottom of the circumference (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 184a divided into five groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, since this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the light emission of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the configuration related to the electrical wiring.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a lens member is provided that is three-dimensionally formed from a transparent material. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to that internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 195 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 195 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the same hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, a ring-shaped handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front side, a ring-shaped board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 is provided with a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a middle wall portion 291b that extends from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that the inner diameter decreases as it extends forward, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d that protrude inward from the inner circumference of the rear tube portion 291c and extend forward and backward, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e that extends outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h that penetrates the lower portion of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tube 291a to the center of the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a cross section that bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tube 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tube 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the flange 291e. The outer tube 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange 291e in the radial direction. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction that connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position close to the front tube portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends in the circumferential direction over a length in the range of approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearward of the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a with a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e and a size in the circumferential direction within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange 291e, a leg 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a, and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top and bottom and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right from the center (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 18 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 6 groups of 10 LEDs 293a can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer peripheral edge of the front plate 294a extending rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner shape the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a spindle-shaped (snow-hollow or bowl-shaped, etc.) cylinder that bulges toward the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b cut from the rear end toward the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the multiple notched openings 295b are formed to match the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front tube part 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195 and the handle front lens 185 are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 with the part closing the rear end of the rear tube part 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 sandwiched between them.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The handle 195 is also rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and by illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching notched openings 295b and notched portions 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and on the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This can ease the player's mental anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right plate decorative unit 275 and the right door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is connected to the lower cutout portion 292c and cutout opening 295b of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

As shown in Fig. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the inclination direction of the blades 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. This allows the wind (wind pressure) discharged diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blades 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tube portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates to send air into the front cylinder portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked with a finger and pulled, and can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, because the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be shot even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

In addition, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force even without continuously twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, so a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a shooting operation that is suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and allows the player to rotate the handle without any discomfort.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is arranged to be able to be opened and closed with the left side as the axis and which closes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 so that it can be seen from the front, and a cylindrical handle cover unit extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 of a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where the handle is provided in conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's interest, while also increasing the player's motivation to play with this pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different sensation when operating the handle 195 than the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be entertained by the new sensation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes a sound effect to be output from the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the fascia internal space 40a and port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 which is connected to the enclosure 624. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status in the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, which not only entertains the player but also prevents them from becoming bored and reduces a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and making the environment around the player's fingers operating the handle 195 more comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided, is guided by the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with his/her fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided in the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided in the handle 195, and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to damage to the handle unit 180, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile, and therefore, even though the appearance is significantly different from that of the handles of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without confusion, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h are provided on the downward facing portion of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover unit 290, where the player can insert his/her fingers between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower portion of the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This gives the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting his/her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has a through-hole cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h on the outer peripheral surface facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened toward the front. Therefore, even if liquid such as a drink or game balls B enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, and liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h is less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and multiple cutout openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, whose front end has the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. This allows the handle to be grasped and operated by hand using the central hub portion 195a in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, operated using only the spoke portions 195b, operated like a steering wheel of a car using the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, operated by placing fingers on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or operated by pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers across the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows a variety of operations to be performed to shoot game balls B (handle operations). Therefore, depending on the game status and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by gripping the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by straddling the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing the player with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore the player.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, giving the appearance that the handle cover unit 290 is integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is capable of attracting the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and by preventing the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the play area 5a from becoming narrower, allowing the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when a player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c stand out, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, the handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite the hinge side, and the cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. Therefore, the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and damage to the handle 195 can be prevented.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195. This prevents the handle from being operated using tools, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201 for storing game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower dish 202 arranged below the upper dish 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper dish 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 and protruding forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish body 251 which is attached to the lower front part of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 which is attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 which is attached to the underside of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 which are attached to the upper front part of the dish unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer periphery board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear side of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the left-right center so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward, with the upper tray 201 positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower tray 202 positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212, and is formed in a container shape that is open upward and bulges forward more on the left side than the center when viewed from the front. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most at about 1/3 of the left end to the right side relative to the left-right width of the door frame 3. The upper tray 201 has a guide passage portion 201a (see Figure 73) whose front end retreats backward as it moves from the most bulging portion to the right when viewed from the front, and whose depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward from a position lower than the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port (not shown). This allows the game ball B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be supplied from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a through the upper tray ball feed port to the ball feed unit 140 side.

The induction passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls), the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Bottom plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) shows the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view showing the bottom plate of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 11 is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200 and the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and has a bottom wall that penetrates vertically and receives game balls B. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a through which B can be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed and openable by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

The lower tray 202 is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The lower tray 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Also, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, so that the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is used to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If the game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still room in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left, as will be described in detail later. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left at the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, so that the distance between the left side wall and the front of the tray unit base 211 is a distance that allows at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball release port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game ball B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, allowing more game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The dish base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 is provided with an upper dish ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and has a punched metal attached to the front, a lower dish ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back at the lower part toward the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower dish ball supply port 211c to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and an upper dish ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with the upper part located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guide section 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower dish 202 to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The ball guide section 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper dish 201 by the ball removal guide path 241c to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (the left part of the lower dish 202). As shown in FIG. 50 (a), this ball guide section 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. In detail, the ball guide section 213 forms a left inner wall that faces the right inner wall where the ball removal guide path 241c opens in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower dish ball supply port 211c, and is inclined so as to move leftward as it moves from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guide section 213), a distance (gap) is formed between the front surface of the dish unit base 211 (rear end of the lower dish 202) of the dish unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower dish ball removal hole 202a, allowing at least one game ball B to pass through. As a result, when the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide path 241c from the upper dish 201 abuts against the ball guide section 213 from the right, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B can be guided to the left end side of the lower dish 202, away from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a in the lower dish 202. In other words, the ball guide section 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion of the lower dish 202 (lower dish ball removal hole 202a).

However, as shown in Figure 50 (b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j in a conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-to-rear direction, so when the game ball B guided by the ball removal guide path 241c abuts against the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it bounces to the right and rolls forward, and is not sent to a position far from the lower tray ball removal hole 202b in the lower tray 202, but is instead stored in the right-hand area of the lower tray 202 where the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is located. Therefore, in conventional products, game balls B (shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 50 (b)) tend to accumulate in the area to the right of the center in the lower tray 202. If game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the fall cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and result in the lower tray 202 being determined to be full even though there is still room in the area to the left of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, since it has the ball guide section 213, it is possible to guide the game ball B that has circulated through the ball removal guide path 241c to the left area in the lower tray 202. Also, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the area of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the game ball B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 through the space between the left side wall (ball guide section 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the rear end of the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be stored throughout the entire lower tray 202. Therefore, even if there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, it is possible to avoid the full tank detection sensor 154 being activated and reporting that the tank is full, and more game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

And, to support the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application counted the number of game balls B stored in each lower tray 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 was activated for the product of this embodiment and the conventional product. The game balls B were counted 10 times for each. The results, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), showed that in every count, the lower tray 202 of this embodiment (product of this embodiment) stored a significantly larger number of game balls B than the conventional product, and it was confirmed that, on average, it was possible to store approximately 40% more game balls B than the conventional product.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 retreats backward from the most forward bulging part toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-rear direction is formed to a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball lending operation unit 220. In addition, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment section 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and a part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, and operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 is for discharging game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, lending a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displaying the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, returning the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base section 221 attached to the upper front part of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base section 221, a translucent disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base section 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display section 226 located on the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when the player presses it. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, with the character "ball" (ball) printed on the top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display portion 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. In addition, when cash or a prepaid card with a remaining balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is for adjusting the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has a design that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and there is an image of a light bulb between the two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to prevent players from confusing them.

When adjusting the volume or light intensity using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance that requires the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the performance operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume or light intensity on the performance display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which takes time and effort to adjust the volume or light intensity. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to directly adjust the volume or light intensity, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that simplifies the effort required for adjusting the volume or light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball delivery unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide vertically, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, through which the game ball B can pass, a ball feed guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball supply guide path 241b.

The left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end as viewed from the rear is lower, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and is formed so that the right end as viewed from the rear of the portion extending left and right is connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

The upper plate ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it moves rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. In addition, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against the upper surface.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, and biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, can move downward, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143, and the partition part 143a retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. As a result, the game ball B that entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball delivery guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the spring force, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, so that the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to the original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and the performance operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211 and working together with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, a plate unit body 252 attached to the front part of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower plate body 251, and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower dish body 251 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower dish body 251 cooperates with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 to form the lower dish 202. The lower dish body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. This lower dish body 251 is attached to the left side of the center in the left and right direction at the bottom of the front of the dish unit base 211 so that the open rear is closed.

The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a generally rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower dish main body 251 when viewed from above. The bottom surface of the lower dish main body 251 is inclined so that it is lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

When the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the bottom surface are covered by the dish unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower dish body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. This allows the game balls B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the lower side. The dish unit main body 252 is also curved such that the top surface is lowest at the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 has upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative part 252b that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left plate decorative unit 270 and a right plate decorative unit 275 attached to their respective front faces.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper left side bulge 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower dish opening 252d is large enough for the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it moves to the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower dish main body 251 and the underside of the upper left side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the left-right center and is equipped with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202 and discharging game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, and game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a opens, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open position, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure, and the lower tray ball removal cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. This allows the game ball B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 in the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are disposed on the upper part of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, a left dish decorative lens 272 that is translucent and passes through the left dish decorative body 271, and a left dish decorative board 273 that is provided behind the left dish decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative body 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder, with a semicircular arc that bulges forward and whose central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end and from left to right at the right end. This left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The left dish decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction, coinciding with the front surface of the left dish decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left dish decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand plate decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand plate decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right, a translucent right-hand plate decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand plate decorative body 276, and a right-hand plate decorative board 278 that is provided behind the right-hand plate decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right plate decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right plate decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This right plate decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right-hand decorative body 276, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the plate right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the plate right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the plate right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper side bulge 252a and the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275. This allows the player to hook his/her fingers using the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and can be used as a finger rest when leveling the game balls B in the upper dish 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a can prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from leaking forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 52 to 56. Fig. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front below. Fig. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the upper end of the movement, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the upper position. Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the lower end of the movement.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation unit 300 to participate in the performance. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing, and can accept operations by the player and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of shooting the game ball B, but also in the presentation during the game. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 provided above the pressing operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 that is provided on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction, an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, a performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 that is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312), an outer peripheral board cover 325 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and an operation unit relay board unit 330 that is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can advance and retreat upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it moves upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the unit top cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of multiple LEDs on the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 described below.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit bottom cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a good appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered at the front and bottom by the unit lower cover 311, and is covered at the top by the unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is a roughly cubic box-shaped body with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The main body 315a also has a pair of guide shafts 362 and the lower end of a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to its bottom wall. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of an adjustment screw 384 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of its bottom wall. Furthermore, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. In addition, a circular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face the outside from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a bottomed, cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a circular outer button decorative board 355 located above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a sphere having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape that is formed with a diameter of about 1/2 the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (tubular portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width inside bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detector 352 is formed below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging obliquely upward and with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat downward extension piece 352a that extends downward from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to the entire area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the punching metal, preventing erroneous detection. In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, light from the LED 364a on the button interior decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in good condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be transparent throughout. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the bottom end of the button body 351 so as to close the open bottom end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by a pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The button base 354 has the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 locked to its outer circumferential surface. The button base 354 is guided so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 being inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a. The button base 354 is also moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the bottom surface of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. In more detail, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the portion on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be transmitted well to the performance operation unit 301. The vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 can also reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 has a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode inside. In addition, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output a signal in multiple stages depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, which is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358, and can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 through the contact detector 352. In addition, the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, so that it can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 with the performance operation unit 350 protruding upward. For this reason, the performance operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as a contact operation unit 302 with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 look like a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In more detail, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the state where it has been moved to the lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and it is in a state where pressing operations cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 leaves the pressing detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. Then, when the upper surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the performance operation unit 350 covers the upper side of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, so that when operating the contact operation unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal with the unevenness caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, because the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to give the contact operation unit 302 any tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or multiple streaks on the surface (top surface) of the button body 351, which increases the design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can lift and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 further comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the central shaft 366 is inserted through which the lifting cam member 371 is rotatably attached, and which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to detect the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the lifting spring 365 can pass together with the pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315. The base body 361a has a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressing detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to its upper surface. The base body 361a also has an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to its lower surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a forward and backward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button middle decorative board 364 has multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the top surface that are full-color LEDs. The button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the center of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a.

The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and each has a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lift springs 365 abut against the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting/lowering cam member 371, and a lifting/lowering detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374. The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372, and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer periphery and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near the bottom end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending upward in a spiral shape from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, and can raise and lower the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350) that is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lift spring 365 and the lift cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lift mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lift cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated, and this pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detecting. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of its travel against the force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected part 371f, which is connected to the connecting part 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button middle decorative board 364.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 in the performance operation unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, so that the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, so that the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force according to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Also, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes upward beyond the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the force of the lifting spring 365, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure on the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. In FIG. 55(b), the third cam 371e that abuts against the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the third cam 371e presses the guide pin 354c downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381 of the thrust force adjustment mechanism 380, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 is reduced (see FIG. 56). This weakens the force of the lift spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened, reducing the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and reducing damage (breakage) of the operation button lift drive motor 367. In addition, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lift drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c halfway along the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the operation button lift drive motor 367 is stopped, and the performance operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In the above, an example was described in which the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go. However, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may rotate the lifting cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the third cam 371e due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Then, when the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in a position halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lift spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (operation button lift drive motor 367) and also makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same protrusion amount, preventing variation in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. By changing the amount of compression of the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303), the force (projecting force) with which the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward can be changed. It is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, an adjustment screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 abut.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the motor and the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft that protrudes into the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed to a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates the center of the main body portion 385a vertically and screws into the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lift spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 that penetrates each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c at the center. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

When the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 increases. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be decreased. This allows the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350 to be adjusted by the lift force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring 365 is in the state where the amount of compression is greatest. As a result, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lift spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lift spring 365 and preventing damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

As described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350, so that when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position and the contact detector 352 detects contact or approach of a detected object (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 is used to protrude the performance operation unit 350 to abut against the detected object, the vertical position of the lift spring lower holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force exerted on the player's finger, etc. when the button body 351 protrudes upward, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can make the protruding force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005), thereby indicating to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the spring's biasing force, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the biasing force is changed by applying a twist to the compression coil spring, an excessive stress different from that in the original use acts on the compression coil spring, which may cause the internal structure to deteriorate early and be damaged. In contrast, in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment, the protruding force (bias) of the performance operation unit 350 is adjusted by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, so that excessive stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and the early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded stably for a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance operation unit unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the pressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) that can protrude upward tilted so that the upper part is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance operation part 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 to see the performance operation part 301.

In the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 has the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. In addition, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350), and a circular button outer decorative board 355 arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and a button middle decorative board 364 arranged further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button middle decorative board 364 in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. The button middle decorative board 364 and the LED 355a inside the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detector 352, but since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, the light from them can be transmitted upward (to the player side) well.

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320. In addition, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer peripheral surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative board 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative board 364 of the button are each arranged in a row on a circumference, so that by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged in a concentric circle, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) flush with its upper surface against the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can allow contact operations depending on the player participation type presentation being executed.

In the normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (operation operation unit 350) is not protruding, the performance (player participation type performance) may be, for example, to display a performance image on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or to output voice or sound effects. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the performance proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, so that the player can recognize that the touch operation has been accepted, and a feeling of operation of the touch operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the light color, light emission brightness, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or proximity) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be caused to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm, to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In more detail, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously protrude upward and reach the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located significantly above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. And, by the button body 351 protruding upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Then, the presentation transitions to one in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, and the player enjoys pressing the pressing operation unit 303. In more detail, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) moves downward, and the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the presentation is changed in response to the pressing operation, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation.

During the above-mentioned performance, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased by using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force may suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356.

In a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc. have approached within the movement range (protruding range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers, etc., and gives an impact, surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., may suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes forcefully and generates a sound (protruding sound), so that the protruding sound can surprise the player. Also, if the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without his realizing it.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a general press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

In addition, after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, a performance may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. At this time, it is also preferable to increase the biasing force of the lift spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move and the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302) can be easily touched.

In the above, an example of the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is shown in which the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limiting.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even if the third cam 371e of the lift-down cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed and can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation type presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lift-down cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the protruding performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is protruding, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. As a result, the force of the lift spring 365 is in the weakest state, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation enjoyable. Also, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lift spring lower holding member 385 may be placed at an appropriate position in the vertical direction to set the force of the lift spring 365 to any strength between the strongest and the weakest depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern drawn. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a wider variety of performances can be presented, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

In addition, as a presentation using the presentation operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the presentation may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of the capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and to use it in the presentation. Specifically, for example, by dividing the stage into a stage where the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, a stage where the player's fingers are not touching the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage where the player's fingers are touching the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown in FIG. 55(a) with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved upward. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved downward as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed, so that early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. In addition, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lift spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs combined) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 on the top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. In addition, a button middle decorative board 364, which is fixed in position, is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, which may cause the contact detection sensor body 358 to make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button middle decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364 changes by moving the performance operation unit unit 350 up and down, the shield connected to ground (GND) does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364, and can reduce the effect of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 or the button middle decorative board 364, and can prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 59 to 61. Fig. 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Fig. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit are made movable in the forward and backward directions and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Fig. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detection body having decorative properties, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figs. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are given the same reference numerals.

59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detector 391L and the right contact detector 390R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a player moves his/her finger from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes and the left contact detector 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change and the right contact detector 391R remains undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R changes, causing both the left contact detector body 391L and the right contact detector body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detector body 391L to become undetectable, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R changes, causing the right contact detector body 391R to remain detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, and to present the player with a player-participation presentation that allows a wider variety of contact operations to be performed on the contact operation unit 302, while also making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detectors 393 are connected to one contact detector sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detectors 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detector sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detectors 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, when the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player (for example, areas where the player may be injured, areas where other players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or alert may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, which connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352, making it possible to detect contact with a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "one that switches using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "one that switches using other electronic circuits," and "one that switches in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decoration unit 270, right plate decoration unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in FIG. 60(c))."

For example, in the presentation operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), multiple contact detectors 393 may be distributed and when a player participation type presentation is performed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detector 393 in order, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the touch order by the switching unit 394 to detect whether or not the player's fingers or the like have made contact with the contact detector 393. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type presentation using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), if the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, a first contact detector 393a can be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detector 393b can be provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300. When the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be protruded forward, the first contact detector 393a can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be retreated, the switching unit 394 can be switched to connect the second contact detector 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach of the player and stops the forward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. This makes it possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing on the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and if the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved back to the initial position with the player's fingers etc. inserted in the gap, the player's fingers etc. may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers etc., the performance operation unit 300 etc. is stopped moving backward, and the player is notified of the instruction to remove the fingers etc. from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is returned to the initial state. This prevents players from being injured due to gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and therefore the pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is preferable that the contact detector is provided on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it is not directly touched by the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a button-inside decorative board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 61(b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided, and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative body 398 below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative body 398 is illuminated by an LED provided below the contact detector 397, so that the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include "those formed from transparent materials" and "those formed so as to be seen as one with the decoration of the surface member of the button body, etc." As a result, the performance operation unit 301 in which the contact detector 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detector 352, and the player is given the illusion that the contact of fingers, etc. is not detected or touched. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and the player's fingers, etc., contact or approach the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, and the player is first aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (touch operation unit 302), which greatly surprises the player and entertains the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 attached to the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and the lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 422a. In addition, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs, including four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two sets of four first LEDs 422a and the three sets of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per set, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, with an uneven right side. A number of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 423a. The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 also has a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Fig. 72, in the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: the first to third three from the top, the fourth to sixth three from the top, the seventh to ninth three from the top, and the tenth to twelfth three from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of twelve second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c of this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 described later in a straight line in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b, light from the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame that is exposed from the through holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides to the light guide shaft 427a, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The upper left side reflector 424 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 is inserted with the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, to hold the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, the light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 facing through the through holes 425a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semitubular shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The multiple openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted from the rear into these openings 426a. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative part 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining tube 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side door frame decoration 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decoration 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward using the light guide shaft 427a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left side center light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the three upper retaining tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tube 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side center light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light guide shaft 428a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left-side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light-guiding shaft 429a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has the circular or radial patterned parts of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts of the handle cover 295, and the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making it look like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded in it.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 toward the rear, can be guided (guided) forward by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, so that the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated in a spot-like manner more brightly than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428 and the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429 are arranged in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an even amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative part 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 426b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 includes a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433, and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 is equipped with an upper right side light guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is provided with a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 439a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, and a right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 441a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a generally constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over its entire height, and the front end extends downward from the top end in a generally straight line to near the center in the vertical direction, where it curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, then curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a number of reflector parts 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end at the height where the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) are provided. These reflector parts 431a have their rear ends inclined toward the side surfaces, which are inside the decorative parts 439a and 441a, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

The door frame right side base 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative hole 438a and decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the front portion excluding the portion inside the decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

These reflector parts 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect the light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, described below, in the left and right directions, causing the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 to emit light and be decorated (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 432a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, the top two, the three from the third to fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two.

The door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so that each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it controls a total of 24 systems, including the upper set of three third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, which will be described later.

Although not shown in the figure, a wiring cable consisting of four wires is connected to this decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame. The wiring cable consists of two power lines (one of which is an earth line) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two groups on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 433a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: the first to third LEDs from the top, three from the fourth to sixth LEDs from the top, three from the seventh to ninth LEDs from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, so that each of the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems, so in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the upper set of three systems of the third LED 433c, which is divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the lower two of the rear third LED 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 433d of this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups emit light with appropriate colors and intensities for each group in response to the command.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts against the front of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them. This holding tube 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, the light from the second LED 432b on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that are exposed through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted from the rear into these openings 435a. This door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b that is recessed in a circular arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided at regular intervals from the top of the right-side reflector 434 to correspond to the four retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tube 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 can guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward through the light-guiding shaft 436a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 to correspond to the six retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward through the light-guiding shaft 437a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape whose front end side follows the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns that appear on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, and has a decorative part 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative part 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a exposed through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern part molded in two colors in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a specific shape (radial pattern shape). The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical part having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a shape that follows the rear end of the right side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame, from the top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative part 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right lens 441 on the right side is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side of the door frame is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a exposed through the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the right door frame unit 430 above the vertical center protrudes further forward than the portion of the left door frame unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This right door frame unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top to its bottom. The upper portion of the right door frame unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to about half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (play area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire play area 5a, and by making it difficult for players to feel like they are being watched by other players, other players can play without feeling embarrassed.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame right side unit 430 also guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 toward the rear, by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and can illuminate and decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 through the reflector part 431a of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, since it is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a), it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 stand out to other players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 at the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated, so that the presence of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame can prevent the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side, and from illuminating the right side decoration 435 on the front side of the door frame. This allows the right side decoration 435 of the door frame and the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side to be illuminated and decorated completely independently, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can present a more effective illumination performance to the player.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 has the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b on both sides, so that even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected from behind onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a uniform, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative part 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 435b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be improved.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length that is approximately the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top decorative body 453 is also formed with a semicircular arc shape on the front side so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are spaced apart on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of a punched metal plate with numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is intended to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in (a) in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer as it is. As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has its outer periphery surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the upper left door frame decorative board 422 and the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, the right dish decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the left door frame decorative body 426, the right door frame decorative body 435, and the top door frame decorative body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illuminated performance as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300 being located in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, in the normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the performance operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a giant sphere makes it possible for the player to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's interest and increasing the appeal to the player, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. In addition, the player can be made to strongly desire to operate the giant spherical presentation operation unit 301, which can heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the presentation operation unit 301, and when a player-participation type presentation is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the presentation operation unit 301, which can allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation by operating the presentation operation unit 301, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In Figure 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

In more detail, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71 (a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular pattern areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns become relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, the decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is a part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, so even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed without changing the shape.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b can be changed for each production lot, and different lots of pachinko machines 1 can be shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in the island equipment, giving them a colorful feel and increasing their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, a two-color molded right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is combined with a right lens 441 on the right side to form the exterior, but three-color molding may be used in which the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame and the right lens 441 on the right side are integrally formed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, circular and radial patterns are shown, but this is not limited to this and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a through which the play area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, are two-color molded (multi-color molded) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied by this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so there is no need to form the decorative body into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as with the decorative bodies of conventional pachinko machines, and this eliminates the effort required for decoration and suppresses increases in costs.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outer appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. In detail, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are formed with the same color but with different light transmittance, the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, and the appearance looks as if the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the polka dot circle becomes clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the appearance looks like a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

As described above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row in an island facility, the island facility can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the game hall, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract players can be provided.

Furthermore, the handle cover 295, which has decorations molded in two colors from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, the left side base 421 of the door frame, the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided on the outer side of the door window 101a, which faces forward into the play area 5a of the door frame 3, so that the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorations to improve its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In comparison, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a become clearly visible, making the decoration clearly visible.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through, which can greatly change the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

As described above, the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so a pattern (a pattern based on shape, or a pattern based on painting, printing, sticker attachment, etc.) is applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and when a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin is used for the outer layer 3b, so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and helps to prevent increases in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that can emit light are provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the play area 5a, it is possible to improve the appearance and allow the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

As described above, the decorations of the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, so that the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not lit can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are lit, depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, and the change in decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. In more detail, for example, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the part of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the part exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a can be seen when the LEDs are not lit. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the hole in the inner layer 3a is visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole are visible, and the decoration is different from when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are illuminated, so that the portion of the decorative body that is illuminated and decorated can be changed depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the illumination of the LED, which strongly attracts the interest of the player and entertains the player. Furthermore, by making the LEDs light up depending on the game status, the changes in the decoration of the ornamental body can suggest to the player the arrival of an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hit to the right"), etc., providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, so that the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front left and the front right can be made to differ. Therefore, even if a player wanders around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when he approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the other side, the appearance will be different from when he last wandered around, which will attract the interest of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 72 and Fig. 73. Fig. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Fig. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the performance operation unit of the door frame. As shown in Fig. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by the handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. In addition, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right of the outer periphery, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit full color light of the appropriate color.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two on the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see light-emitting effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light-emitting effects concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light-emitting effects spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a surrounded all around by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the left decorative board 273 behind the left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the right decorative board 278 behind the right decorative body 276, the upper left decorative board 422 and the lower left decorative board 423 behind the left side decorative body 426, the upper right decorative board 432 and the lower right decorative board 433 behind the right side decorative body 435, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456 and the top right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453 are arranged facing forward.

In more detail, the left dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right dish decorative board 278 described below. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The right plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver of the left plate decorative board 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The eight second LEDs 422b are also divided into three sets of the top two, the three from the third to the fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for emitting light from a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two in each group from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups, three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, three from the seventh to ninth from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in a row between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for emitting light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, the top two, the third to fifth three, and the sixth to eighth three, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically aligned between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in Figure 72. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into 4 groups, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72, consisting of 3 LEDs from the top, 1st to 3rd, 3 LEDs from the top, 4th to 6th, 3 LEDs from the top, 7th to 9th, and 3 LEDs from the top, 10th to 12th. Furthermore, the 4 rear third LEDs 433c are divided into 2 groups, consisting of the top 2 LEDs and the remaining 2 LEDs, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The 3 groups of 6 first LEDs 433a, the 4 groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of 2 third LEDs 433c are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c of each group can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

In this embodiment, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in an asymmetric shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. In addition, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b mounted on their respective front surfaces, and are arranged symmetrically (the systems connected by dashed lines and double-dashed lines in Figure 72). This makes it easy to create data for the lighting patterns of the LEDs to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front with spaces between them in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 has four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 has four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, dot-like light emission effect on the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the player can be taken aback by the dot-like, sparkling light emission effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a of the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a of the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a of the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown a light-emitting effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect that emits spot light on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, the light guiding shaft portion 429a, the light guiding shaft portion 436a, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated forward from there, so that the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be brightly spot-lit with high luminance compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this case, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a as seen through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are protruded forward from the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-intensity spot light are provided at the ridges (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that protrude forward, so the spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the inside of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and the high-intensity spot light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portion is provided on the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3, so that the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player will not block the spot light because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 are made to emit spot light, the high-brightness spot light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, which can strongly attract the interest of players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine to play.

It is preferable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-illuminating the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 belong to the same system. As a result, the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs are in the same lighting state, so that the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making it even more difficult to see the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 in the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are provided on a circumference close to the inner circumference with twos spaced apart near both ends of the arc, three are provided on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences with threes spaced apart, and the remaining six are provided on a circumference close to the outer circumference with threes spaced apart near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into a total of nine groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: six on the inner circumference are divided into three groups of two in the circumferential direction, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction. The 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into a total of seven groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Fig. 73: four on the inner circumference are divided into two groups of two near both ends, three on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three near both ends. In other words, in the performance operation unit outer circumference decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

With this decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit, the 31 LEDs 320a (48 systems) can be appropriately illuminated to show the player light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated in the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, which extend up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction differs from each other. Behind each of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a number of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a number of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted are provided. In addition, a light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft portion 436 of a right side upper light guide member 436 are provided, which guide the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. Since the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433 are provided, the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a planar manner (surface illumination) by illuminating the first LED 422a, the first LED 422b, and the second LED 422c of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433. 3a, when the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces), allowing the areas corresponding to the tips of the light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a dot-like manner (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame which are provided outside the play area 5a (door window 101a) can be illuminated. The entire right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light, parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like light, or the entire left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light while parts of them can be decorated with point-like light, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are in different systems, so that the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are in different systems. When creating data for the lighting patterns of D432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b, for example, it is possible to reuse data for the left door frame decoration 426 side as data for the right door frame decoration 435 side, or to make the data flow similar for the left door frame decoration 426 side and the right door frame decoration 435 side. This makes it possible to simplify the work required to create lighting pattern data, and makes it easier to build more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This allows players to see a variety of lighting patterns and a variety of lighting effects with high performance effects, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects in the left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a are in the same system, so that the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, and therefore the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a, light guide shaft portion 436 ... By irradiating light from both sides of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a caused by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become lighter and less visible, making it possible to make the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in a uniform, planar manner.

The left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a surface by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, can illuminate and decorate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in a point-like manner by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination and partial point illumination, and can strongly attract the interest of players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical in shape, so that the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, lower left side decorative board 423, upper right side decorative board 432, and lower right side decorative board 433 can be distinguished at a glance, making it possible to avoid making mistakes when assembling the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, lower left side decorative board 423, upper right side decorative board 432, and lower right side decorative board 433 during the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, improving the ease of assembly and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 74, using the door frame 3 as an example. Fig. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following boards provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are described in detail, taking as examples the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player side).

The white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with shading of different shades).

In more detail, the character identification section 7a has the characters "lower left" on the left side decorative board 273, "lower right" on the right side decorative board 278, "upper left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, "upper middle" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "upper left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "upper right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied partially, not across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silkscreen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), so decorative boards of similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving the workability of assembly.

In addition, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board can be reflected forward by the front surface of the decorative board, allowing the decorative objects in front to be more brightly illuminated and decorated, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a part of the decorative board. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards are overlapping during assembly, etc., the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board, so that when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there is a decorative board with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that the same decorative board has been prepared in duplicate. Or, if there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is easy to recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize that an excess decorative board has been prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient, so that it is possible to reliably prepare only the necessary amount of decorative boards, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress an increase in costs.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 for distinguishing it from other boards, so that an operator can easily tell which part the decorative board belongs to by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the rear, so that even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, the decorative board is less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front of the decorative board makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, allowing the decorative body to emit light more brightly, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and are not visible from the front (player side), which makes it possible to avoid the poor appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative body, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, since the functional components are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) so that they are not noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, which eliminates the effort of coloring the functional components and suppresses increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Function and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a contact detection body 393 provided at a desired location where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of a player and the contact detection sensor main body 392, for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different locations in the pachinko machine 1. When a player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the approach or contact of the player to the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection body 393 at the desired location to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the connection between the contact detection body 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is cut off. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at other locations changes when the player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected because the contact detection body 393 has been cut off by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for multiple contact detectors 393 installed at different positions, so that it is possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, luminous decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player by increasing the number of performance means, making it less likely for the player to get bored and allowing the player to fully enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by providing contact detectors 393 at multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired locations to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching unit 394 depending on the game status, it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the desired locations and to cause the control means, such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512, to issue a specified warning or alarm. This makes it possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performance, and to achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are located apart, so the sensor body containing electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, which simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses any increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393. This increases the freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detector 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. For example, when a player-participation type presentation is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are distributed and the multiple distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order, so that it is possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation type presentation with a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players can be provided.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's fingers approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the presentation operation unit 350 that can be operated by the player by pressing it, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of a punched metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detector 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) via the contact detector 352.

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined performance is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button main body 351 by the performance means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations can be performed with the presentation operation unit 350, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact sensor main body 358. Since the capacitance differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when the player makes contact in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing a player-participation type presentation that allows the player to operate the presentation, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation, which can prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact sensor main body 358, is a punched metal made of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein, the multiple holes can reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351, thereby preventing erroneous detection by the contact sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, and therefore the range in which the contact detector 352 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be widened. This allows the contact detector 352 to be enlarged to widen the detection range, so if the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged as in the above embodiment, and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when the player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation type performance, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance for the player's fingers to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 is shortened, and the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, making it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player-participation type performance and allowing the player to reliably participate in the player-participation type performance, and the performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the light emission effects from the LEDs 364a of the button decorative board 364, which acts as an effect means and is provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player side through multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light emission effects and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the touch detector 352 is provided on the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing, the presentation operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the touch detector 352 made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, and the presentation operation unit 350 is less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, since the touch detector 352 makes it difficult to damage the presentation operation unit 350, the player can press the presentation operation unit 350 without any worries, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation in which the presentation operation unit 350 is operated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, and compared to a case in which the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be made thinner. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, makes it easier to install the contact detector 352, and increases the degree of freedom in design, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is consistent compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to make the contact detector 352 into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and ensures the realization of the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, so the button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed therein. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed therein, and allows the button body 351 to be operated without feeling strange in player participation performances that use the button body 351 as the operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punched metal is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning much easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, making it possible to output a specified presentation to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351.When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), a specified presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the presentation operation unit 350, and the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350 can be enjoyed reliably, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, the presentation means are covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly arranged. This makes it easier to arrange the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means that achieve the above-mentioned effects in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be movable up and down, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 changes, so that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 can be detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350, the performance operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the performance operation unit 350, a performance by a physical force such as pushing the player can be presented to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player with a performance that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the performance operation unit 350, and reliably making the player aware of the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350.

When the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, if the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased, and if it is moved in the direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes weaker and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protruding forces, the variety of performances by physical forces can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can enjoy the performance by the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the presentation operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, so that when a player approaches or touches the presentation operation unit 350 with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player, making the player feel strongly that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player-participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance operation unit 350, thereby making it possible for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance, and thus making the player enjoy pressing the performance operation unit 350 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, for a player who places his/her fingers on the performance operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that he/she can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without being notified of the start of the player-participation performance by performance images, sounds, etc., and this increases the player's desire to press the performance operation unit 350, making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is protruded by the force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and forcefully compared to a case in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

The contact sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with a different protruding force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the performance operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protruding force according to each stage, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is arranged to be movable forward and backward by popping up the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by executing a player participation type performance, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches on the performance operation unit 350 changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided away from the contact detector 352 on the performance operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, and can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 due to the approach or contact of the player, so that it can detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the movement of the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (pressing) by the player, a predetermined performance is executed by the performance means such as the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and the performance display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined performance is executed when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be made to function like a performance operation unit (pressing operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player-participation type performance that allows the player to operate the performance, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, so it is possible to provide multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect and execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the effect operation unit 350 to contact in multiple stages, so that by presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, so that the effect can impart a sense of operation to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operation even more.

Furthermore, since the device is equipped with a performance operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to request the player to perform a variety of operations in a player-participation type performance, such as an operation to advance and retreat the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation) or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger (non-contact operation, contact operation). The various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type performance, making it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance. And, when the player participates in the player-participation type performance, the various operations using the performance operation unit 350, the contact detector 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored, and can enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward by engaging the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, by keeping the performance operation unit 350 unable to move forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until a performance is performed that moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 350 from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or uneasy due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and to make the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is arranged at a position away from the contact detector 352, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be arranged in a location that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 are separate, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected appropriately regardless of the contact sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and ensures the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 with his/her fingers, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is irradiated toward the player by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, so that the light irradiated toward the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, and the executed performance can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to conform to the decorative portion provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized by the player, even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 blocks part of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is placed in front of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 can be shown to the player in good condition, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player from the button outer decorative substrate 355, button inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This makes it possible to make the button body 351 or surface member 396 function like the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and gives the player the feeling of operating through light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, a performance is executed by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type performance and to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so that the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decoration 398 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 changes, so that the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. to the button body 351 or surface member 396 can be easily detected, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made thin to make it transparent, and if the vapor deposition film is made thick to give it a metallic luster, it can be made to look like part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a design shape such as a star or heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. In this way, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable to the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detector 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined performance by the performance presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600, are formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design, so that the contact detector 395 itself can decorate the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and has a high appeal to players. In addition, the front side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means through the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact detector 395, so that the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And, since the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 has design, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have a strong impact on the player as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Also, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, which can make the player take a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351) and heighten the player's anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301). In addition, when a player-participation performance in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, the player can enjoy operating the button body 351, and the player's interest can be prevented from declining.

In addition, the contact detector 395, etc., which detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., to the button body 351, is formed into an outer circumferential shape with a design, so that at first glance, some players may not notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting a performance by the performance presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, and it is possible to make the player realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 by the contact detector 395, etc., which gives the player an element of surprise and makes the player-participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation type presentation is being executed by operating the presentation operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without realizing that it is the presentation operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc. will change and a presentation will be presented by the presentation presentation means, surprising the player and entertaining the player with the presented presentation, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and it is easy to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the effects are presented in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player's fingers, etc., approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages, so by presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395, etc., prevent the contact detector 395, etc. from deteriorating the appearance, and make the contact detector 395, etc. stand out, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design that has a unique design without forming the contact detector 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing costs of the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., and the effort required for cleaning can be reduced. In more detail, since the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and cleaning the dirt is time-consuming. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 can prevent dirt from adhering, and the easy cleaning reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal deposition film or foil stamping, is used as the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to prevent early wear due to the player's touch, and the durability of the contact detector 395, etc. can be increased.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395 etc., making it possible to use contact detectors 395 etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395 etc., and allows the contact detector 395 etc. to be formed from materials suited to needs.

In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc., and the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought the finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed when the player's fingers, etc. approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., so that the button body 351 can function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with his/her fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the fingers, etc. into the detection area, a light emission effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player through the button body 351 by the emission of the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, an effect in which the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an effect in which the player is given an impact, a push-up, wind pressure, etc. through (via) the button body 351 is given, etc., so that the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing the player's motivation to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, the player can appropriately move the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, so that the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can allow the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detector 352 is provided near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detector 352 can detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., on the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is configured with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detector 352) of the button main body 351, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be positioned in an inconspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which makes it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the right front, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the left front, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main members of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main members of the main body frame as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The main body frame 4 is provided with a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, a box-shaped tank that extends left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 and guides the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis that extends forward and backward and that detachably holds the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a base main body 501a that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b that penetrates the base main body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of about 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board placement section 501c that forms the bottom edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board restriction section 501d that protrudes upward from the left-right center of the game board placement section 501c and restricts the left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher attachment section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placement section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the launcher attachment section 501e from front to back on the right side of the game board placement section 501e when viewed from front, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates the game board placement section 501c from front to back on the lower left side of the game board placement section 501c when viewed from front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable attachment recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and in which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i, which penetrates the cable attachment recess 501h from front to front at the upper right end when viewed from front.

The main body frame base 501 further includes a plate-like extension extending rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a rear extension portion 501j to the rear end of which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached, and an upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left end when viewed from the front on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached to the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch is released and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed to a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a number of through holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis that extends vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d at the same left-right position out of the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting against the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed against the main frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this case, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (e.g., approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. As a result, the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, and the connection cable 503 can be prevented from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to prevent malfunction of the connection cable 503.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be given a fold. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180 degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the fold acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the fold prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between the tangent to a circle passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126, and the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 from the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, so that the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction via the connection cable 503, and therefore the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. In addition, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so that when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effect as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent downward into an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 which protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is journaled by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and which journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 by bending the upper hinge body 511 downward and extending vertically. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and journaled. The upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame allows the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 to be rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame cooperates with the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame to allow the main body frame 4 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the outer frame 2, and also allows the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to a lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and has the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached thereto.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is disposed above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 disposed at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The second lower hinge body 522 is provided with a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to mount the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged rotatable, and also mount the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed on the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in a plan view, which prevents an illegal tool from being inserted inside from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for shooting the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is equipped with a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front and whose rotation axis extends forward through the launching base 541, a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543 and along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is being supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking mallet 543. The game ball B hit by the striking mallet 543 is guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is hit into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the hitting strength of the game ball B, it will fall between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payment base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-rear direction, a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a. The base 551 is provided with a left back plate 551e extending from a position forward of the rear edge of the left back plate 551b to the right at a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the bottom end, an inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back plate 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate 551b, a bottom plate 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate 551b to the same position as the right edge of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate 551g and the lower edge of the inner plate 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552 which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, is box-shaped and opens upward, and is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the payout base 551 which extends left and right, and is a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part which extends left and right, and is a groove-like shape which is open upward and extends to the left.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 at a distance to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. The tank rail 553 also has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, with the end on the first rail cover 554 side rotatable around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see FIG. 91). This straightening piece 556a slows down the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing balls from clogging even if the height inside the tank rail 553 becomes low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main frame base 501. An earth wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back panel left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b to the base unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and serves to receive the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guide the game ball B to the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 is equipped with a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in front view of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a serpentine manner while repeatedly folding back between the left and right width of the guidance unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back and right directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B in the direction in which the game balls B flow, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward at the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a to a state where it no longer protrudes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Since the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B extends in a serpentine shape, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guide passage 570a. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, and can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 is equipped with a payout device main body 581 that is box-shaped and open to the rear, has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a second transmission gear 588. The device is equipped with a dispensing gear member 588 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the delivery gear 587 and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, which is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

The payout device 580 further includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the location where it branches off from the payout passage 580a so as to be capable of opening and closing the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be capable of being held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b and is slidable in the vertical direction.

The payout device 580 is shaped like a rectangle extending vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is shaped so that its left-right width is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the left-right width of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in Fig. 88, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear, and the downstream end opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about 1/3 of the total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, and then bends at about 1/3 of the left-right width and extends downward approximately vertically toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is located below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear to the bottom end, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are provided with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a, which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view, and which face each other and protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b branch off, and which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed at a position on the left side of the part in the rear view that branches off from the ball removal path 580b in the payout path 580a and extends to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side walls of the ball removal path 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 when viewed from the rear, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at angular intervals of 120 degrees.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a extend from the top of the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extend to the right when viewed from the rear, and protrude into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade pieces 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball storage section 589b between the three blade pieces 589a, which is recessed toward the center in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage section 589b is capable of storing only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, to detect the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that the concave side faces inside the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down on the left side when viewed from the rear near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward through the payout device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the lower end, the lower part can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outside the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B that were strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a will flow straight down the ball removal passage 580b, and since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to suppress the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B will flow down faster than the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B hits the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b with great force. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outside the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of the hit. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 is not pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from applying a strong force to the ball removal movable piece 592, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the collision of the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, which reduces the time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves to the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged, and the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the rear lower part of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, a box-shaped upper full tank cover 602 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and has a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 600 is made up of an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right to the right when viewed from the front, about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height, and a lower ball storage passage 600b that extends downward from the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends toward the upper side and opens downward at the bottom surface, an upper full tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c, extends downward from the right side as viewed from the front from the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b, and opens downward at the bottom surface, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end as viewed from the front on the top surface, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the bottom surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the base unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 having a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full payout path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extending in the front-to-rear direction and opening upward, a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a payout path opening/closing door 613 attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction to the front end of the lower full base 611 and capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b, and a closing spring 614 that biases the payout path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up from the left when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extend forward lined up side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to abut against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4), the lower full ball path unit 610 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 as the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are connected to the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main body frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a is closed at the branching portion. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening and closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball exhaustion by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and is then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flows through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game ball B that flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and is released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and as more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game ball B that flows down to the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball release port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game ball B to be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will be retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the player is informed by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the lower end position to the upper end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b branching off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down hits the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 92 to 96. Fig. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Fig. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Fig. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a main frame speaker 622 attached facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 and open forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed of multiple slits that penetrate from front to back near the left end when viewed from the front and extend up and down, a front recessed portion for space 621b that is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front recessed portion for space 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward toward the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached from the rear side to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearwards the most, and is formed so that the protrusion rearwards becomes smaller in a stepped manner as it moves to the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. to be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting part 621a in the front view of the speaker cover 621, so even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of protrusion rearward decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection tube portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the space behind the main frame speaker 622 is connected to the inner space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame 2. Therefore, a large enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, curtain board front member 42, and curtain board rear member 43, and sound outputted to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be outputted (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain board front member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection part 621c and the connection tube part 43a. Therefore, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuating the low-frequency range in particular, and the transmitted low-frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and a loud sound with deep bass can be output even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and includes a ball removal guide section 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front downstream of the ball removal guide section 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball removal guide section 627 faces so that the opening of the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide it to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The discharged ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving section 628 is connected to the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right as viewed from the front using the ball removal guide section 627 and discharged ball receiving section 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629, making it easier to ensure a wider space to the left of the center as viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a wider, allowing the player to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96) housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like, by pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or the like. The payout control board box 632 is formed so that it leaves a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any illegal modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear of the speaker box 623 at the part that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is attached to the rear end extending vertically of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment part 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed therein that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 is equipped with a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, and a transfer cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hooking member 24 and lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above in a state in which the ball tank is assembled with the tank rail, etc., and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of Figure 100(a). Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; and a tank 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which is groove-shaped and opens upward, and extends leftward. The tank rail 553 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to a portion of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is shaped like a rectangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the top, with the left side slanted lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer periphery upper edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

The right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the inside of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream area to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the main guide section 553a is formed in a crank shape that extends from the right end side to a position that is about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view, parallel to the axis extending from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction, and then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it moves to the left, and then extends from there to the left end in a parallel manner to the axis extending in the left-right direction. In the main guide section 553a, the tank rail 553 has a section that extends parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction, and extends to the upper end with the same width, and the upper end of this section is closed by attaching the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to the upper end. In addition, in the section where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The bulge 553b has a curved center located above the main guide 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide 553a and the bulge 553b. The bulge 553b is also curved with a larger curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b has a reaction force acting in various directions depending on the position of the abutting bulge 553b, which suppresses the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball jamming occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location of the ball jam can be quickly identified. Therefore, ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so that the interruption of play due to ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553, so when a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belts can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side when viewed from the front). It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m whose rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and inclined so that the front end side is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g that extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open on the tank rail 553, inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower, and guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a low position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a left-right length of about 1/3 of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end of about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o with their upper ends higher than the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its left-right length is shorter than its front-rear length. The left step portion 501n is also inclined so that its rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed so that its left-right length is longer than its front-rear length. The right step portion 501o is also inclined so that its rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape, with the front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the left-right inclination of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming inside the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and the straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are formed higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion extending straight left and right to the left of that portion are located (protruding) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 as viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, so that the discharge section 551j lowers in a stepped manner from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, and then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface in a state where they are lined up in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grip the tip of an electric wiring. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left step 501n, the right step 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. In addition, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer circumferential upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from returning to the ball tank 552 side from the bypass passage 552g, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552 by pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge section 553b in which multiple game balls B can be lined up in the open upper portion, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line aligned in a line to the downstream side (payout device 580 side).

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing malfunctions caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 106 to 110. Fig. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when a pachinko machine equipped with the tank rail of the second embodiment is viewed from the rear. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Fig. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. Fig. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail of Fig. 107(a) cut along the kerk line. Fig. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Fig. 107 in cross section. A second embodiment of a tank rail 553A, which is different from the above, has, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A, which differ from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations are described using the same symbols.

The tank rail 553A in this embodiment straightens the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. A first rail cover 554A is attached to the tank rail 553A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A is provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A is provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball stopper member 557 capable of preventing the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (toward the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the serpentine portion 553c at the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends upstream of the left-right center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape following the serpentine portion 553c at the portion where the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided between a pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against the game balls B stacked in multiple layers in the tank rail 553A, making it easier to break up the layers of game balls B and align them in a row, and also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving quickly downstream, preventing ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the part where the ball straightening member 556A is attached in the tank rail 553A from contacting the ball straightening member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball straightening member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556A from rotating upward even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and the ball straightening member 556A may not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, so that when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting the straightening effect and preventing ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553A.

In addition, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c. However, in the tank rail 553A, where the height narrows toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B among the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball biting is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c, so that the upper game balls B can be prevented from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

As described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or allows the terminal board or control board to be positioned near the tank rail 553A to which many electric wires are connected, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the positioning of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 111 to 118. Fig. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the right rear. Fig. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the left rear. Fig. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the external terminal board portion, and Fig. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. Fig. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Fig. 113(b), and Fig. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Fig. 113(a). Fig. 115 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in Fig. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the front, and Fig. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the rear.

The tank rail etc. of the third embodiment is the same as the tank rail etc. of the first embodiment described above (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and ball stopping member 557), with the addition of a protective cover 559 that covers the ball straightening member 556 from above. Components similar to those described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails etc. of this embodiment include a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open upward, and a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends left and right, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion that extends straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a.

In the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, a portion extending straight to the left (a portion in which the height decreases toward the downstream side) is formed with a plurality of openings 553d through which garbage, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. These openings 553d are provided in the portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 described later. The openings 553d open toward the bottom and rear of the tank rail 553, extend to the left and right, and are formed to a size that does not allow the game ball B to pass through. When the game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly seen from the rear through the openings 553d. In addition, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched through the openings 553d with the fingers or a thin stick of the operator. This allows the ball clogging that occurs in the portion to be eliminated through the openings 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted via the game ball B in that area, allowing the operation of the ball straightening member 556 to be confirmed.

The tank rail, etc. is provided with a first rail cover 554 that is to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range of the upper part of the tank rail 553 from the right end to the left of the part that extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-to-rear direction on the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 553 from a part spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left end, a ball straightening member 556 provided in a part between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the underside of the tank rail 553, and a protective cover 559 that covers the upper part from midway in the left-right direction of the first rail cover 554 to midway in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555, straddling the ball straightening member 556.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The spherical straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 so that the end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The spherical straightening member 556 has a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a) etc.).

In the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are aligned in one layer, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two layers to one layer, if the game balls B in the upper layer try to overtake the game balls B in the lower layer, the game balls B may become interlocked with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming). In contrast, in the ball straightening member 556 of this embodiment, when the game balls B flow in two layers, upper and lower, inside the tank rail 553, the game balls B on the upper layer abut against the straightening piece 556a, slowing down the flow of the game balls B and preventing them from overtaking the game balls B on the lower layer. As a result, the game balls B on the lower layer move downstream first, and the game balls B on the upper layer move behind them, allowing the game balls B to be aligned in one layer. At this time, the game ball B on the upper level presses against the straightening piece 556a from below, causing the ball straightening member 556 to move so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight presses the game ball B on the upper level downward. The vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) encourages the game ball B on the upper level to move downward, and prevents ball clogging in that area of the tank rail 553 (the area that becomes lower in height the further downstream).

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The protective cover 559 has a band-shaped top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear edge of the top plate portion 559a, a flat front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front and left edges of the top plate portion 559a, and a flat guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-to-rear direction.

When this protective cover 559 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the top plate portion 559a is positioned to cover the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction, forming a space between it and the ball straightening member 556, allowing the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position lower than the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556.

The right end of the front plate portion 559c extends further to the right than the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. The guide plate portion 559d protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c at a length greater than the diameter of the game ball B at the portion forward of the top plate portion 559a, and is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball B to the left. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a small gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the guide plate portion 559d, into which the game ball B cannot enter.

When the protective cover 559 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, it can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to make contact from below, or by pushing the game ball B in the tank rail 553 upwards through the opening 553d with an operator's finger or the like, thereby lifting it up via the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 has a guide plate portion 559d that can guide a game ball B that, for some reason, has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 to the left and eject it outside from the left side of the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and protective cover 559 are made of transparent materials, so that the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside.

In addition, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, which prevents dirt, dust, and the like from entering the tank rail 553 from above.

In addition, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the top of the tank rail 553, it is not possible to touch the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B from above. Therefore, if dirt or dust is attached to the game ball B, etc., it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, it is meaningful to provide multiple openings 553d at the bottom of the tank rail 553. In more detail, if dirt or dust is attached to the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, it is possible to touch the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and shake the ball straightening member 556 through the game ball B, so that the dirt or dust attached to the game ball B, etc. can be dropped. Then, the dirt or dust dropped from the game ball B, etc. can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

However, in the main frame 4, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the fore-and-aft direction is provided behind the external terminal board 558. Therefore, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556 from rotating upwards even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, and there is a risk that the ball straightening member 556 will not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to an electric wire with the coating stripped from the tip, if a game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, there is a risk that a short circuit will occur due to the remaining game ball B if the electric wire is not connected (inserted) properly into the wire connection terminal 558a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protective cover 559 covers the top of the ball straightening member 556, so that the protective cover 559 can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556. As a result, when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, the ball straightening member 556 can rotate upward, allowing the straightening effect to be fully exerted, and preventing the occurrence of ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553.

However, if the electric wire comes off the external terminal board 558 for some reason and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B behind the external terminal board 558, a short circuit occurs and the game hall computer cannot receive the necessary information, which causes an error in the counting at the game hall. In contrast, according to this embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason can be guided to the left and discharged outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, and therefore it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit caused by the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by preventing a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to reliably allow the game hall computer (hall computer) to receive the necessary information, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress the occurrence of counting errors at the game hall.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be discharged to the left side of the main body frame 4, which prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the various electric wires and wiring provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4, causing problems such as disconnection or short circuit.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 119 to 124. Fig. 119(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Fig. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the front, and Fig. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ki-Ki line in Fig. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cou-K line in Fig. 119(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ke-Ke line in Fig. 119(a). Figure 124 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface, an out-ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, an out sensor 664 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663 one by one, a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662, through which game balls B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 flow, and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction, with an out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear on the side rear of the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for ball blockages, etc.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving section 663a that opens upward at approximately the center of the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left-right, an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a line while causing them to snake widely left-right, a downward guide section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downward, and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end is lower. In addition, the depth of the out ball straightening section 663b in the front-to-back direction narrows as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, the depth is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the part of the out ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in height as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the height is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball straightening section 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is curved in a small crank shape backward in the middle of the vertical direction so that the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall portion). As a result, the downstream end of the lower guide portion 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of this lower guide portion 663c. This lower guide portion 663c is curved so that the cranked portion does not have a portion extending horizontally, so that even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, since the game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 123 (a) etc.).

The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state where it is open to the rear, and its rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection passage 665 is located about one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball removal and discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and guide section 627, and has a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge port 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 124).

The ball ejection passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection passage 665 allows the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in its flow speed, and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so that when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 1008 without being received by any of the winning openings, and is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of shot balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within a specified period ÷ Number of balls out within a specified period = Payout rate within a specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by an out sensor 664. Since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide an out ball detection unit on the game board 5 that detects "out balls," and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and this reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. This makes it possible to weaken the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the flow of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game ball B discharged to the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game ball B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made that provides more entertainment for players.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, the speed at which the game balls B flow through the vertical guide section 665b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, a meandering out-ball straightening section 663b is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d is provided in the ball removal and discharge passage 665, which can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, which are located nearby, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction less due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are open downward, the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, so that the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and damage to the other pachinko machines or walls can be avoided. In addition, because the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, the ejected game balls B are less likely to scatter, and it is possible to easily collect the game balls B ejected from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. This means that the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting it downward. This allows the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 to be simple (easy) and reduces the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out-ball ejection opening 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the game balls B flowing with force through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which would damage the outer frame 2, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) that collects the game balls B on the island equipment side to a position overlapping with the outer frame 2, which reduces the effort required to install the pachinko machine 1 and the effort required to move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 125 and Fig. 126. Fig. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Fig. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and Fig. 126(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 125 has a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a junction 663e that joins with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end serves as the out ball outlet 663d (ball removal and discharge outlet 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally downward and rearward. As a result, when the present pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, the game ball B can be easily released toward the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B that is located behind the front of the island equipment (within the island equipment), and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the induction piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward toward the rear, even if the out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located close to the position directly below the play area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (close to the front side of the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be made wider, and since the out-ball passage 663 is farther away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the influence of electrical noise due to static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663 on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 can be reduced, and a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the flow of game balls B can be obtained.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 is detachably attached from below to the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, there is a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, which is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also formed from a transparent material, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has its base end rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and a resiliently deformable locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the out ball straightening section 663b. The locking claw section 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking section 663g provided on the outer side of the out ball straightening section 663b side relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c is locked with the locking portion 663g to close the sensor cover 668. The main body portion 668a abuts against the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, and the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain amount of gap is created between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (e.g., the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as many game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with the outer frame 2 or the like, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a, and the occurrence of an abnormality will be reported by the main control board 1310, etc. When this abnormality is reported, the game hall staff will open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality, but because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance, and the jam of the game ball B can be quickly resolved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and it is easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check inside the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660, etc.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that a game that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, which reduces the player's frustration caused by the interruption of the game and prevents a decrease in interest. It also prevents a decrease in the operating rate of this pachinko machine 1, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Therefore, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

In addition, the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow in the base unit 660. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the flow of the game balls B is large on the side (one end side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and relatively small on the side (other end side) of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of it can be received on the one end side that is rotatably attached, so that the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is less likely to be released, and the sensor cover 668 can be reduced from opening and causing the out sensor 664 to fall off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 127 to 136. Figure 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, the dispensing control unit, and the interface unit omitted, as seen from the right front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the left front. Figure 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Figure 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C-C in (a), (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line S-S-C in (a), and Figure 130 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-S-C in Figure 129(a).

Figure 131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 133 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the rear. Figure 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball jams in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 135 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of the intrusion of linear illegal tools in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 136 is an explanatory diagram showing the removal of debris in the board unit of Figure 127.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same components as those of the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This board unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a second ball path 702 that is provided behind the first ball path 701 and through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one and then discharge them downward.

In this embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first large winning port 2006, and the second large winning port 2007 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the out balls are configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the safe balls are configured to circulate through the second ball path 702, so that the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703, and the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a winning hole (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first large winning hole 2006, and the second large winning hole 2007 on the game board 5, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a winning hole.

In further detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705, a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702, a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in an openable and closable manner to eliminate clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall portion, and a resolution opening 711b that opens at a position from the left-right center to the right of the lower peripheral wall portion. When the front base 711 houses the ball path member 713 inside, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. In addition, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 on the front end side of the resolution opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides it downward and discharges it. The ball removal path 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end side of the ball removal path 705 is closed by the path wall member 715. The part of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 that is located above the speaker box 623 (the part on the left end side when viewed from the front) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711 and the rear side is closed by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward, while the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are provided at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b is open backward from the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, the first discharge guide section 712a, and the second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b (see FIG. 128(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is larger (wider) in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted from the rear into the box-shaped front base 711 and housed therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that rises to the right from a position separated to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of the groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a eaves portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of blocking ribs 713o that extend downward from the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the straightening wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the upper lower wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

The ball path member 713 also has a number of notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each of the notches 713q toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each of the notches 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and dirt and dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

The ball path member 713 is provided in a region between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has multiple guide protrusions 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor accommodating section 713s that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in front of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the first ball sensor 703, and a rear sensor accommodating section 713t that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in back of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the second ball sensor 704.

The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed in the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t so that the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the area between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, that is, with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown in the figure, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend leftward from the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t beyond the middle wall portion 713k.

The ball path member 713 has a first ball guide section 713u that is provided on the underside of the lower wall section 713n at a position forward of the partition wall section 713p, and that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When the first ball guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the inlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide section 713u can guide the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f in front of the partition wall section 713p to the right and then to the rear, and deliver it to the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712. This allows the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f behind the partition wall section 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper part directly above the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved line, and is curved so that the left end side faces vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end is at a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. The flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten multiple game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the gap between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension narrows as it moves to the left (the downstream direction of the flow of the game balls B). Therefore, depending on the amount of game balls B in circulation, there is a risk that multiple game balls B may get caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball jamming (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release port 711b, if ball jamming occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b, and a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball jamming can be resolved by poking the game balls B that have gotten caught with the tool.

The lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing ball jams and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, so there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), allowing a fraudulent act to be committed against the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and upper right shelf 713d, where the notch 713q is provided.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and can prevent the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, in the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k in the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, the lower and left and right sides are closed off by the flow straightening wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be performed through the notch 713q in those areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q on the upper left shelf 713b, upper right shelf 713d, and lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust can be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see FIG. 136). Dirt and dust discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing 713s and rear sensor housing 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is contained in the space surrounded by the straightening wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k. This prevents dirt and dust from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 contained in the front sensor housing 713s and rear sensor housing 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and the connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and the connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface, so that dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l and is prevented from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which protrude leftward beyond the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712, and forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state in which the front end side can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking part 714a at the rear end side that is locked to the rear base 712. As shown in FIG. 130, when the security cover 714 is locked to the rear base 712 with the elastic locking part 714a locked horizontally, the resolution opening 711b is closed, and when the security cover 714 is unlocked and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and is locked vertically, the resolution opening 711b is opened. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the resolution opening 711b.

The security cover 714 can close the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by closing it, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702) through the elimination opening 711b. In addition, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can open the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by opening it, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination opening 711b and the cutout portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to eliminate the jammed game ball B. This ball jam elimination work is performed with the main frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height shown by the dashed line in FIG. 130) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43 in the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release the ball jam of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 and then the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 with the security cover 714 open, the open security cover 714 abuts against the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43), and the main frame 4 cannot be closed. This makes it possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and ensures that the security cover 714 is closed, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in this state will cause an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, since the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction, when an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the security cover 714 comes into contact with the security cover 714 from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on an object that may be in danger of coming into contact, thereby preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may be in danger of coming into contact.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is set to lock tightly so that the security cover is difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear at the outlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, and can discharge the game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716, and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has the upper left shelf 713b and a part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711, and can receive all game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game balls B that fall to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. The game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f roll to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they are lined up as they move to the left.

The game ball B that rolls to the left on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and if it is forward of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if it is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the first ball path 701 being the side in front of the partition wall portion 713p and the second ball path 702 being the side behind the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that falls forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the first ball sensor 703. On the other hand, the game ball B that falls backward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the second ball path 702 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the second ball sensor 704.

The base unit 710 can also discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are delivered to a section (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) on the island equipment side that collects game balls B.

According to the base unit 710 in the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, thereby preventing dirt and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (substrate unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). In addition, in the area where the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713 align the game balls B in a row, a notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main body frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch portion 713q, and the ball jam can be released using the tool.

Furthermore, a downwardly opening release port 711b is provided below the flow straightening wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, the ball jam can be released through the release port 711b as described above. In addition, by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities can be provided.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may be in danger of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it possible to make the user aware that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and allows the security cover 714 to be closed reliably, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

Furthermore, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and the tip movement is prevented, and further insertion of the illegal tool can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex distribution path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713, so that even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a or the second discharge guide portion 712b, the intrusion can be prevented by the complex path, and the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be prevented.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game balls B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Also, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count the game balls B that have been removed. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B that have been released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to the above. Safe balls may flow through the first ball path 701 and out balls may flow through the second ball path 702, or game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B released downward from the game board 5, so that it is discharged through one of two ball paths separated at the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have three or more ball paths separated at the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and to discharge the game ball B released from the game board 5 downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 137 to 147. Fig. 137 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center gadgets and the like made opaque. Fig. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the right front, Fig. 139 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the left front, and Fig. 140 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Fig. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. Fig. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and the like made transparent. Fig. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and Fig. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the back. Fig. 145 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second large winning opening 2007, which provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing a game ball B. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 195 is operated to strike the ball and the ball B is circulated within the game area 5a so that the ball B is received by or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007, etc., within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a number of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect magnetic fields that act illegally within the game area 5a. A number of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 145 to FIG. 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board (not shown) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear side of the performance display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which detects the passage of game ball B, a variable winning opening 2003 which is capable of receiving game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern which is drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002, a first starting opening 2004 and a second starting opening 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which are always open and capable of receiving game ball B, and a variable winning opening 2006 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which is always open and capable of receiving game ball B, and a first large prize winning opening 2006 that can receive game ball B depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B into opening 2005; a second large prize winning opening 2007 that is provided at a position different from the first large prize winning opening 2006 and can receive game ball B depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2004 or second starting opening 2005; and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the play area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-outlet 2021 and a second sub-outlet 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is made up of a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2004, a side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front and has four general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front, and a second start port 2003 which is provided to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front. 05 and second sub-outlet 2022; a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is located above the starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, and lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and that has a variable winning port 2003, a first large winning port 2006, a second large winning port 2007, and a first sub-outlet 2021; and a gate member 2600 that is located to the left of the center device 2500 near the center of the play area 5a in the vertical direction, and that has a gate 2002.

The front unit 2000 is located on the right side of the play area 5a and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of multiple obstacle nails N.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a rear box rear unit 3030 which is detachably attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020, and a rear board unit 3040 which is located behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided in the lower part near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 that is provided in the lower part near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper front performance unit 3300 that is provided in the upper part of the rear box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a rear lower front performance unit 3400 that is provided in the lower part behind the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear box 3010, a rear upper rear performance unit 3500 (see Figure 162, etc.) that is provided behind the rear upper front performance unit 3300 in the rear box 3010, and a rear lower rear performance unit 3600 that is provided behind the rear lower front performance unit 3400 in the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 143 and 144. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end in each of the following locations: outside the portions near the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically; below the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004; and outside the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1009 receive rear protrusions 172 protruding rearward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 that are inserted therein. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

Also, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 and rear unit 3000 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see Figure 145, etc.).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front side and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and the position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. The panel plate 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of positioning holes 1113 formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps 1114 formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges (see FIG. 152). The positioning holes 1113 are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps 1114 are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with an engagement claw (not shown) or engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left, right, and lower sides, excluding the area above the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel plate 1110, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel plate 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes 1113 in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement steps 1114 at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps 1114 at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This game panel 1100, together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, is formed transparent, so when assembled to the game board 5, the boundaries of the game area 5a are less clearly visible, giving the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a appears larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is made transparent, the light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear as if it is emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the game board 5.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 141, 143, 144, etc. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 167) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2601, the second start opening sensor 2401, the first large prize opening sensor 2525, the second large prize opening sensor 2561, the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, the first large prize opening solenoid 2524, the second large prize opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and check the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting change button 1311b that can select and change the setting value, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates the state in which changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting change button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the setting change board 1311 is shorter than the horizontal distance dimension of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the main control board 1310 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, a setting change button 1311b having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (below the left of the setting change button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single seven-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six seven-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side, and a RAM clear switch 1310f with a push button is located near the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket runs vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and can be removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that even if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall will not interfere with each other and will not be damaged.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be realized by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key ring is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together by the setting key switch 1311a alone.

Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings to tamper with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and base body and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310 The wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting change button 1311b, and setting display 1310g are briefly described below. First, the case where the setting value is changed is briefly described, followed by the case where the current setting value is displayed for confirmation. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, thereby turning on the power for the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. When the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied, the setting value can be changed.

A person who changes the setting of a setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a (see Figure 7) is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from an off state to an on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, he or she rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotates it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON by performing a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value decided by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), the decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and then the setting value can be decided and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a, improving operability.

The person who changes the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was turned on to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a state in which it is lit to a state in which it is turned off.

The person who wishes to change the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of changing the setting value.

When checking and displaying the currently set setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be met. In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first ON operation) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value does not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g does not change either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of confirming and displaying the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "when power is restored," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power is restored."

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of small jackpot determination values indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or it may be eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power-off processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a. Of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 167, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the decision key, and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of the buttons printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused (the names of the buttons may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switch button 1311b (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). Also, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine that the decision key is ON when the shooting of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described later is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be shot per minute toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas when the firing reference pulse is not input, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movement of a player by transmitting light emitted by a light emitting unit through a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflecting on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension, and the reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by a light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is motion based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is motion, it can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas if it determines that there is no motion, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (5)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this serial output circuit is provided was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information outputted from this serial output circuit is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the decision key OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "variant (6) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This can improve security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms if the information conveys the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms if the information conveys the decision key ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms if the information conveys the OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant (7) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, The voltage level of the ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal may be set to an intermediate potential (e.g., a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit may be provided in the main control board 1310. The comparison results of the comparator circuit may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a may determine the ON/OFF state of the setting key ON signal, the ON/OFF state of the decision key ON signal, and the ON/OFF state of the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting key switch that uses an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is placed on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the decision key button or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation unit) may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation unit of the decision key button and the error release switch may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input via the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power is restored (the power-on processing of the various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch. This can improve security with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key being ON (the form of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The error reset switch is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error reset switch having a push operation part on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the created command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error reset switch is for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power recovery (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is set In the past, the operation signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a push operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of these stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover covering the push operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to operate the push operation unit by pushing it) may be used, a push operation unit with a different color may be used, a RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch with a different external shape or a push operation unit with a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 10, the signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security depending on whether the Enter key is ON or not (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the second ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the main control MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the configuration of the dispensing unit (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open against the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value must close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must open the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame opening switch (which may include the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant (17) of the decision key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the determination key (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) to turn it OFF, and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch mode 1311a') may be described as "decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to tamper with the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). Also, in order to prevent the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed so that they do not approach each other (are separated from each other) on the main control board 1310 in order to prevent unauthorized tampering. In addition, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key button mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as described later, so if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need an error release switch.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the gate sensor 2601 of the gate 2002, various sensors of various winning ports (for example, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning port sensor 2526, the first large winning port sensor 2525, the second large winning port sensor 2561), and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4 are input may be input and determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "various determination key modifications (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate 2002, to the various winning holes, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is then transmitted to the setting change board 1311. to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, when the main control MPU 1310a controls the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, a solenoid, etc. to control the operation of the movable body (gimmick), and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of the decision key ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gadget sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and move the movable body (part) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable body (part).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives an input of a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the magnetic sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to set the determination key to ON.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead of this, if a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent behavior by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to enter various winning holes or gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the mode of the vibration sensor (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variation example of the determination key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 Instead, when a radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring game balls B by irradiating radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to cause malfunctions of various sensors of various winning slots provided on the game board 5 or various sensors provided on the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent acts based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the aspect of the radio wave sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Instead, a detection signal from the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (27)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in multiple parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a wire intrusion prevention part is molded in the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to modify the setting change board 1311. Note that, as the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the cover body is configured to be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include a case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on a detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as a "variant of the decision key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are provided. and , are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the determination key OFF of the setting key switch 1311a, and , The wiring pattern through which the signal of the ON key of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF key of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), but either of the wiring pattern through which the signal of the ON key of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the determination key of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the manner of wiring the wiring pattern may be described as "variation example (29) of the determination key").

Also, the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified enter key configuration (30)").

In addition, the above-mentioned setting values can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery when transitioning from a probability change to a normal time, the allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can obtain can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. Incidentally, although there are multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are also other pachinko machines that have a single setting value in which a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. That is, there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as multiple preset values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and settings need to be changed, and there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a single preset value, and settings do not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will depend on the game specifications, and the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset to a single set value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use the set value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, so this can be addressed by changing the design of the software to assign set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM) after clearing a specified area (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area) contained within the main control MPU 1310a itself. In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick object) that is the subject of control by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick object), lighting of light-emitting objects)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movement of movable body (gimmick object)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement over other structures and other movable objects)" is assigned as setting value 4. A real machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking interference with moving objects (reel objects), operation order with other moving objects (reel objects)" as a setting value 5, a real machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting object 1 port unit (lighting of light-emitting object by a predetermined output port unit (i.e., one output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as a setting value 5, and a real machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as a setting value 6 (the change setting of the real machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "variation example (1) based on a common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the real machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby operating the moving object (reel object) and lighting the light-emitting object such as a lamp or LED. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can operate the moving object (reel object) which is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and lighting the light-emitting object with the contents (real machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the settings for the actual machine verification operation after the RAM is cleared, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting up the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple times from the end of the pattern change to the start of a demonstration (a demonstration performance performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 2, a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "20 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 3, a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 5, and a time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the manner of changing the time from the end of the pattern change to the start of a player waiting state may be described as "variation example (2) based on a common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start a demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the time setting between when the pattern changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the pattern changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple contents of the demonstration (demo performance performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the pattern change. In this case, demo performance setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical performance" is assigned as setting value 1, demo performance setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 2, demo performance setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious performance" is assigned as setting value 3, demo performance setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 4, demo performance setting pattern 5 that specifies "period drama-style performance" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo performance setting pattern 6 that specifies "period drama-style performance, movable body (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the mode of changing the contents of the demo performance may be described as "variation example (3) due to common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo performance (demo performance setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on how you change the settings for the content of this demo performance, you can add variety to the content of the demo performance that takes place after the pattern changes have finished.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume adjustment switch can be rotated to increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the default volume may be described as "variant (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increase the volume) and is adjusted to the minimum volume by completing the movement to the minimum volume end, or may be a volume that can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine. The default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decrease the volume) and is adjusted to the maximum volume by completing the movement to the maximum volume end, or may be a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This aspect of changing the default volume setting allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the volume of error notification sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error notifications. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice the pachinko machine that is emitting the error notification sound, it may be unpleasant to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error notification sounds to be adjusted. In this case, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification sound volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification sound volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification sound volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification sound volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the error notification sound volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification sound volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "variation example (5) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume of the error notification sound is set to increase from the setting value 1 (a volume that is not muted and allows the error notification sound to be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (a maximum volume that allows the error notification sound to be fully recognized even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the emission of an error alert sound at a volume (error alert volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the volume of the error alert sound is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error alert sound when an error is notified.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default luminances for light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance of the light-emitting body that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "luminance 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "luminance 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "luminance 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "luminance 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default luminance may be described as "variation example (6) based on a common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light-emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn on, blink, or set a gradation point for the light-emitting element. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple luminances of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications of various malfunctions, stumbles, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification luminance 1" is assigned as a setting value 1, an error notification luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as a setting value 2, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification luminance 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, an error notification luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "error notification luminance 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as a setting value 5, and an error notification luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the luminance of the light-emitting element in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) based on a common hardware configuration"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but does not go out, and an error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point for the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point for the light-emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification, it is possible to provide variation in the brightness of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification.

The various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met in the setting value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), but they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (the manner of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variations (1) to (8) may be appropriately selected and adopted for the above-mentioned determination key variation (30).

The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Also, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined setting value change permission condition").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage) is restored, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value that is set on the setting display 1310g in the setting value confirmation display process that is performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. In addition, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the pressing operation part is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (sometimes referred to as "a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but performs it before the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting and the like to proceed with the game. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing after a predetermined modified setting value display permission condition is met, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and stores these in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., whereas when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in a ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later, and outputs the counted number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in a port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and displays the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until when game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted in the variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the lottery results for normal symbols, the lottery results for special symbols, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that display the lottery results of the normal pattern drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2002, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2002.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 is repeated when the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, movable performance, and the like, and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 167).

The peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650, which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The performance display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 is attached via the rear box 3010 and the set plate 1650. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010, which will be described in detail later. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front of the set plate 1650 that is attached to the game board 5 (see Figs. 157 to 159). It can be seen from the front (player's side) through the frame of 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color LCD display device with white LEDs as a backlight, and is installed in a portrait orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display specified still images and videos.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a variable winning opening 2003 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, and a first starting opening 2004 and a second starting opening 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and are always open and can receive the game ball B. It is equipped with a starting opening 2005, a first large prize opening 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, and a second large prize opening 2007 that is provided at a position different from the first large prize opening 2006 and can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-outlet 2021 and a second sub-outlet 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B.

The multiple (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are located on the left side of the horizontal center in the lower part of the play area 5a. The gate 2002 is located near the left end of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, at a height slightly lower than the vertical center. The variable winning opening 2003 is located to the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting opening 2004 is located directly above the outlet 1008, which is at the bottom end in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The second starting opening 2005 is located to the right of the first starting opening 2004 in the lower part of the play area 5a and above the first starting opening 2004. The first large winning opening 2006 is located directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at about 3/4 height from the bottom in the play area 5a. The second large winning opening 2007 is located slightly higher than 3/4 height from the bottom in the play area 5a, close to the right end of the play area 5a.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is located between the second large prize opening 2007 and the left end of the play area 5a. The second sub-outlet 2022 is located to the right of the second starting opening 2005.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2004, a side unit 2200 which is arranged along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has four general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 which is arranged slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a lower right unit 2400 which is arranged to the right of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022.

The front unit 2000 is located above the starting hole unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400, and is located slightly above the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. It is equipped with a frame-shaped center device 2500 having a variable winning hole 2003, a first large winning hole 2006, a second large winning hole 2007, and a first sub-out hole 2021, a gate member 2600 having a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 located on the right side of the play area 5a and consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The lower right unit 2400, details of which will be described later, is capable of receiving game balls B received in the second large prize opening 2007, and is equipped with a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that has a larger opening than the second large prize opening 2007, and a pseudo outlet 2404 that ejects game balls B that are not received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 145 and Fig. 148. Fig. 148(a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the front, and Fig. 148(b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit seen from the back. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 has a flat front panel 2101, a gutter 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front panel 2101 except for the upper edge, flat flanges 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction parallel to the front panel 2101 from the middle of the front-rear direction of the gutter 2102, and whose rear surfaces abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a guide piece 2104 standing upright from the bottom surface of the gutter 2102. The starting port unit 2100 is formed of a transparent material except for the decorative sticker 2110.

The starting port unit 2100 also has a peeling hole 2105 penetrating the front plate portion 2101, mounting holes 2106 penetrating the front and rear in each of the left and right flange portions 2103, and positioning pins 2107 that protrude cylindrically rearward from the rear surfaces of each of the left and right flange portions 2103. The starting port unit 2100 also has a decorative sticker 2110 affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101.

The front plate 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, with a semicircular bottom edge forming a U-shape. The inside of the front plate 2101 is recessed rearward, leaving a roughly constant width from the outer periphery, and a decorative sticker 2110 is affixed to the recessed area. A peel-off hole 2105 is provided in the recessed area of the front plate 2101, and the peel-off hole 2105 is blocked from the front by the decorative sticker 2110.

The gutter section 2102 extends rearward from the front plate section 2101, with its upper end open upward and its rear end open rearward. The section of the gutter section 2102 forward of the flange section 2103 and the front plate section 2101 form a first starting hole 2004 that is open upward. Therefore, the ball entry direction of the first starting hole 2004 faces vertically downward. The pair of flange sections 2103 are formed symmetrically with each other, and the vertical width narrows as it moves outward in the left-right direction.

The guide piece portion 2104 is located in the left-right center of the front plate portion 2101 and the gutter portion 2102, has a constant left-right width, and is erected vertically in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction into the first starting hole 2004. The guide piece portion 2104 is formed so that its upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is capable of guiding the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004 rearward. The height of the rear end of the guide piece portion 2104 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the guide piece portion 2104 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102.

The guide piece portion 2104 has a steeply inclined abrupt piece portion 2104a and a loose piece portion 2104b that continues from the rear end of the abrupt piece portion 2104a and is more gently inclined toward the rear than the abrupt piece portion 2104a. In more detail, the abrupt piece portion 2104a of the guide piece portion 2104 is linearly inclined from a portion near the upper end of the rear surface of the front plate portion 2101 so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal, and the shape of the side surface is formed into a triangle (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2104b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the abrupt piece portion 2104a so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal. Therefore, when game ball B enters first starting hole 2004 from above, it first comes into contact with steep piece portion 2104a of guide piece portion 2104, and the inclination of steep piece portion 2104a causes game ball B to be reflected, changing its flow direction from below to the rear, and then it is guided rearward by loose piece portion 2104b. This allows game ball B to be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of first starting hole 2004 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100.

When the decorative seal 2110 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, a rod-shaped member such as a wire can be inserted from the rear side into the peeling hole 2105, and the rod-shaped member can be used to press the decorative seal 2110 forward from behind, causing a part of the decorative seal 2110 to be rolled up forward from the front plate portion 2101. Then, by an operator pulling the rolled-up part of the decorative seal 2110, the decorative seal 2110 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2101. This improves the ease of work when re-attaching the decorative seal 2110 during manufacturing and when separating the decorative seal 2110 for disposal.

In addition, the peel-off hole 2105 is hidden from the front by attaching the decorative sticker 2110 to the front surface of the front panel portion 2101, which prevents the peel-off hole 2105 from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the peel-off hole 2105, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the peel-off hole 2105.

The mounting hole 2106 is a countersunk hole through which a mounting screw (countersunk head screw) is inserted from the front to mount the starting port unit 2100 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The positioning pin 2107 is provided at a location closer to the periphery of the flange portion 2103 than the mounting hole 2106, and is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150(c)) from the adjacent mounting hole 2106. The positioning pin 2107 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fit tolerance.

In the starting port unit 2100, two sets, each consisting of one mounting hole 2106 and one positioning pin 2107, are provided at positions symmetrical to the left and right with respect to a vertical line passing through the center of the left and right direction of the front plate portion 2101 (gutter portion 2102). By inserting a pair of positioning pins 2107 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the game area 5a (a position directly below the central release portion 2513a in the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 described later). This allows the probability of receiving the game ball B from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 to the first starting port 2004 to be within a desired range.

In addition, the starting port unit 2100 has positioning pins 2107 and mounting holes 2106 at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2004 in between. This makes it possible to prevent the center position of the first starting port 2004 from shifting to either the left or right side, even if a shrinkage difference occurs between the starting port unit 2100 and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. This makes it possible to maintain the center position of the first starting port 2004.

In addition, since the starting hole unit 2100 has a pair of positioning pins 2107, when the starting hole unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the starting hole unit 2100 can be positioned by inserting the positioning pins 2107 into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Therefore, even if a mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 (see FIG. 190(b)) of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2106 and tightened, the starting hole unit 2100 does not move slightly, and the starting hole unit 2100 can be reliably attached to a specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

When the starting hole unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first starting hole 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and opens upward, and is located directly below the center in the left-right direction of the center device 2500. In more detail, the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100 is located directly below the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center device 2500 when assembled to the game board 5. This ensures that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is received by the first starting hole 2004 with a high probability.

When attached to the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

In the above starting port unit 2100, the rear edge of the upper surface of the induction piece portion 2104 is shown as being a sharp angle, but this is not limited to this, and the rear edge of the upper surface may be provided with a chamfer such as a C-chamfer or R-chamfer.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 145 and Fig. 149. Fig. 149(a) is a front view of the side unit in the front unit, and Fig. 149(b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit seen from behind. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has four general winning holes 2001 that are open so as to be able to always receive the game ball B. The four general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning holes 2001 opens upward.

The side unit 2200 has a flat front plate 2201, a rear extension 2202 extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate 2201, and flanges 2203 extending outward from the rear ends of both the left and right ends of the rear extension 2202 in parallel to the front plate 2201. The front plate 2201 has a portion of its front surface that is lower than a certain width from the upper edge and recessed rearward. A side unit seal 2220 is affixed to the recessed portion of the front surface of the front plate 2201. In addition, the front plate 2201 has a portion of its rear surface that is a certain width from the upper edge and is inclined so that it becomes thinner toward the top (it is inclined so that it moves rearward as it moves downward).

The rear extension 2202 has, from the left, a first gutter 2202a, a second gutter 2202b, a third gutter 2202c, and a fourth gutter 2202d, each of which is open upward and backward and has a curved semicircular bottom. The first gutter 2202a, the second gutter 2202b, the third gutter 2202c, and the fourth gutter 2202d each cooperate with the front plate 2201 to form the general winning opening 2001. In addition, the first gutter 2202a, the second gutter 2202b, the third gutter 2202c, and the fourth gutter 2202d extend rearward from the rear ends of both the left and right ends of the rear extension 2202 (flange 2203) to a certain height.

The first gutter section 2202a is slightly larger than the diameter of game ball B from its bottom end to its top end, and its top end opens diagonally to the upper right when viewed from the front. The second gutter section 2202b is approximately twice the diameter of game ball B from its bottom end to its top end, and its top end opens upward when viewed from the front. The third gutter section 2202c is approximately twice the diameter of game ball B from its bottom end to its top end, and its top end opens diagonally to the upper right when viewed from the front. The fourth gutter section 2202d is approximately twice the diameter of game ball B from its bottom end to its top end, and its top end opens diagonally to the upper right when viewed from the front.

When the four general winning openings 2001 provided on the side unit 2200 are assembled to the game board 5, the ball entry direction is as shown by the arrow in FIG. 149(a) due to the positional relationship with the multiple obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a. In detail, the ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the leftmost general winning opening 2001) formed by the first groove portion 2202a faces diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and the upper end surface of the steep piece portion 2210a of the first guide piece portion 2211 described later is located on the axis of the ball entry direction. The ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the second general winning opening 2001 from the left) formed by the second groove portion 2202b faces diagonally downward to the right as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entry direction passes above the second guide piece portion 2212 described later. The ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the third general winning opening 2001 from the left) formed by the third gutter section 2202c faces diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entry direction passes above the third guide piece section 2213 described below. The ball entry direction of the general winning opening 2001 (the fourth general winning opening 2001 from the left (the rightmost)) formed by the fourth gutter section 2202d faces diagonally downward to the left as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entry direction passes above the fourth guide piece section 2214 described below.

In addition, the rear extension 2202 is provided to the right of the fourth trough 2202d and has a shelf 2202e that is gently sloping downward toward the right.

The rear surface of the flange portion 2203 abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2203 is provided in two locations: to the left of the left end of the first trough portion 2202a, and at the lower right corner of the shelf portion 2202e.

The side unit 2200 also has a guide piece portion 2210 for guiding the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The guide piece portion 2210 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2202. The guide piece portion 2210 has a steeply sloping steep piece portion 2210a and a gentle piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and slopes more gently rearward than the steep piece portion 2210a.

The induction piece portion 2210 of the side unit 2200 is composed of a first induction piece portion 2211 provided in the first groove portion 2202a, a second induction piece portion 2212 provided in the second groove portion 2202b, a third induction piece portion 2213 provided in the third groove portion 2202c, and a fourth induction piece portion 2214 provided in the fourth groove portion 2202d.

The first guide piece portion 2211 of the side unit 2200 has a different configuration from the second guide piece portion 2212, the third guide piece portion 2213, and the fourth guide piece portion 2214, and in addition to the configuration of the sharp piece portion 2210a and the loose piece portion 2210b described above, has the following configuration. The first guide piece portion 2211 is composed of a change piece portion 2211a that is erected in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the general winning port 2001 and changes the flow direction of the game ball B to the rear, and a rear piece portion 2211b that is erected in a direction different from the ball entry direction (including the opposite direction) and guides the game ball B to the rear. The change piece portion 2211a and the rear piece portion 2211b of the first guide piece portion 2211 each have a sharp piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b.

In this embodiment, the changeable piece 2211a is erected diagonally to the upper right from the upper left of the lowest part of the bottom surface of the first gutter 2202a, and the rear piece 2211b is erected vertically upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the first gutter 2202a, which is curved in an arc. Therefore, the part of the changeable piece 2211a that is rearward of the part where the rear piece 2211b branches off is located to the left and above the rear piece 2211b in a front view.

To go into more detail about the first guide piece 2211, the change piece 2211a is formed so that its upper end surface (tip surface) is perpendicular to the ball entry direction, and is formed so that the front and left sides are higher than the horizontal plane. The upper end surface of the change piece 2211a is linearly inclined so as to become lower at a steep angle (45 degrees from the base of the change piece 2211a) as it moves rearward from a portion near the upper end of the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201, and then bends and linearly inclined at a gentle angle (5 degrees from the base of the change piece 2211a) so as to become lower as it moves rearward. The portion of the change piece 2211a with the steep angle is the steep piece portion 2210a, and the portion with the gentle angle is the loose piece portion 2210b. The steep piece portion 2210a of the change piece portion 2211a has a triangular side (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle).

The rear piece 2211b branches off from the sharp piece 2210a of the change piece 2211a, then bends at a gentle angle (5 degrees from the horizontal) and linearly slopes downward as it approaches the rear. The steep angled part of the rear piece 2211b is the sharp piece 2210a, and the gentle angled part is the loose piece 2210b. In this embodiment, the rear piece 2211b is formed so that the upper surface of the sharp piece 2210a is formed on the same plane as the upper surface of the sharp piece 2210a of the change piece 2211a so that the front and left sides are higher, and the upper surface of the loose piece 2210b is formed so that only the front is higher than the horizontal plane. Therefore, the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b is twisted between the sharp piece 2210a and the loose piece 2210b.

When a game ball B enters from the diagonally upper right along the diagonally lower left ball entry direction in the general winning opening 2001 in which the first guide piece 2211 is provided, it abuts against the upper end surface of the abrupt piece 2210a of the change piece 2211a, and its flow direction is changed from the diagonally lower left direction along the front of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction, and the game ball rolls rearward on the upper end surface that is lower toward the rear of the rear piece 2211b that branches off from the middle of the change piece 2211a. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the general winning opening 2001 to be smoothly and quickly guided rearward.

According to the first guide piece 2211 of the side unit 2200, the general winning opening 2001, whose ball entry direction is inclined relative to the vertical direction, has a changeable piece 2211a extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction, so that the game ball B entering the general winning opening 2001 can abut against the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2211a. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the first guide piece 2211, the side surface of the first guide piece 2211, etc., and it is possible to prevent the first guide piece 2211 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged early due to the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball jamming does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken first guide piece 2211, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

However, if only the change piece 2211a is provided, which stands in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the game ball B, as described above, the change piece 2211a is provided at a position to the upper left of the lowest part of the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a, so the game ball B will abut against the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a. Since the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a extends horizontally and is not inclined, there is a risk that if the game ball B abuts against the bottom surface of the first gutter section 2202a, the circulation of the game ball B will be stopped. In contrast, in this embodiment, the rear piece 2211b protrudes upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the first gutter 2202a, and the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear. This means that the game ball B does not come into contact with the horizontal bottom surface of the first gutter 2202a, and can be reliably guided (distributed) rearward by the inclined upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b.

The speed at which the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 varies, and when the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 at a high speed, the ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 at a diagonal downward left direction, so that the game ball B is subjected to a strong (large) force that moves it to the left, and the game ball B tries to move to the left from the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b due to that force. At this time, as described above, a part of the sharp piece 2210a and the loose piece 2210b in the change piece 2211a are located at the upper left of the rear piece 2211b, so that the change piece 2211a can prevent the game ball B from moving excessively to the left in the first gutter 2202a, and the game ball B can be guided backwards in a state where it is leaning against the change piece 2211a (or in a state where it is straddling the change piece 2211a and the rear piece 2211b). This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. Because of this, the first guide piece portion 2211 has the rear piece portion 221b branching into two from the change piece portion 2211a, so it is possible to accommodate game balls B (winning balls) flowing in at various speeds.

The second guide piece 2212 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest part of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the second gutter section 2202b. The second guide piece 2212 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower as it approaches the rear, and can guide the game ball B rearward. The height of the rear end of the second guide piece 2212 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the second gutter section 2202b. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the second guide piece 2212 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the second gutter section 2202b.

This second guide piece portion 2212 also has a steeply inclined steep piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and is more gently inclined rearward than the steep piece portion 2210a. The steep piece portion 2210a of the second guide piece portion 2212 is linearly inclined from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the second trough portion 2202b on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to a part at a height approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal, and the shape of the side is formed into a triangle (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the second trough portion 2202b, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001, which is formed by the second gutter portion 2202b, has a certain height from the general winning opening 2001 (the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the second guide piece portion 2212, because the axis of the ball entry direction of the game ball B passes above the second guide piece portion 2212. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 along the ball entry direction that faces diagonally downward to the right, it flows down in a parabola from the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted just before it), so that by the time the game ball B reaches the second guide piece portion 2212, its flow direction faces downward, and the game ball B comes into contact with the part of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of the second guide piece portion 2212. This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the corners at the boundaries between the top surface and the side of the second guide piece portion 2212, the side of the second guide piece portion 2212, etc.

Then, the game ball B that comes into contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the second guide piece portion 2212 is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and its flow direction is changed from below to the rear, and it is guided rearward by the loose piece portion 2210b. This allows the game ball B to be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100.

The third guide piece 2213 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest part of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the third trough 2202c. The third guide piece 2213 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower as it approaches the rear, and can guide the game ball B rearward. The height of the rear end of the third guide piece 2213 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the third trough 2202c. Therefore, the game ball B guided by the third guide piece 2213 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the third trough 2202c.

This third guide piece portion 2213 also has a steeply inclined abrupt piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the abrupt piece portion 2210a and is more gently inclined rearward than the abrupt piece portion 2210a. The abrupt piece portion 2210a of the third guide piece portion 2213 is linearly inclined from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the third trough portion 2202c on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to a part at a height approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal, and the shape of the side is formed into a triangle (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the abrupt piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the third trough portion 2202c, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001, which is formed by the third gutter portion 2202c, has a certain height from the general winning opening 2001 (the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the third guide piece portion 2213, because the axis of the ball entry direction of the game ball B passes above the third guide piece portion 2213. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 along the ball entry direction that faces diagonally downward to the left, it flows down in a parabola from the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted just before it), so that by the time the game ball B reaches the third guide piece portion 2213, its flow direction faces downward, and the game ball B comes into contact with the part of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of the third guide piece portion 2213. This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the corners at the boundaries between the top surface and the side surfaces of the third guide piece portion 2213, the side surfaces of the third guide piece portion 2213, etc.

Then, the game ball B that comes into contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the third guide piece portion 2213 is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and its flow direction is changed from below to the rear, and it is guided rearward by the loose piece portion 2210b. This allows the game ball B to be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100.

The fourth guide piece 2214 of the side unit 2200 is erected vertically upward from the lowest part of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the fourth gutter 2202d. The fourth guide piece 2214 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower as it approaches the rear, and can guide the game ball B rearward. The height of the rear end of the fourth guide piece 2214 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the fourth gutter 2202d. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the fourth guide piece 2214 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the fourth gutter 2202d.

This fourth guide piece 2214 also has a steeply inclined abrupt piece 2210a and a loose piece 2210b that continues from the rear end of the abrupt piece 2210a and is more gently inclined rearward than the abrupt piece 2210a. The abrupt piece 2210a of the fourth guide piece 2214 is linearly inclined from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the fourth trough 2202d on the rear surface of the front plate 2201 to a part at a height approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal, and the shape of the side is formed into a triangle (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the abrupt piece 2210a to the rear end of the fourth trough 2202d, so that it becomes lower as it goes rearward at an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal.

The general winning opening 2001 formed by the fourth gutter portion 2202d has a certain height from the general winning opening 2001 (the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 because the axis of the ball entry direction of the game ball B passes above the fourth guide piece portion 2214. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001 along the ball entry direction that faces diagonally downward to the left, it flows down in a parabola from the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted just before), so that by the time the game ball B reaches the fourth guide piece portion 2214, its flow direction faces downward, and the game ball B comes into contact with the part of the steep piece portion 2210a on the upper end surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214. This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the corners at the boundaries between the top surface and the side surfaces of the fourth induction piece 2214, the side surfaces of the fourth induction piece 2214, etc.

Then, the game ball B that comes into contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and its flow direction is changed from below to the rear, and it is guided rearward by the loose piece portion 2210b. This allows the game ball B to be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of the general winning opening 2001 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100.

The side unit 2200 also has a peeling hole 2204 that penetrates from front to back in the area where the front surface of the front plate portion 2201 is recessed rearward, mounting holes 2205 that penetrate from front to back in each of the two flange portions 2203, and positioning pins 2206 that protrude cylindrically rearward from the rear surfaces of each of the two flange portions 2203. The front side of the peeling hole 2204 is closed by a side unit seal 2220 that is affixed to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201.

When the side unit seal 2220 is attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, a rod-shaped member such as a wire can be inserted from the rear side into the peeling hole 2204, and the rod-shaped member can be used to press the side unit seal 2220 forward from the rear, thereby causing a part of the side unit seal 2220 to be rolled up forward from the front plate portion 2201. Then, by an operator pulling the rolled-up part of the side unit seal 2220, the side unit seal 2220 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2201. This improves the ease of work such as re-attaching the side unit seal 2220 during manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

In addition, the peel-off hole 2204 is hidden from the front by attaching the side unit seal 2220 to the front surface of the front panel portion 2201, which prevents the peel-off hole 2204 from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the peel-off hole 2204, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the peel-off hole 2204.

The mounting holes 2205 are countersunk holes through which mounting screws (countersunk screws) are inserted from the front to mount the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110). The positioning pins 2206 are provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150(c)) from the adjacent mounting holes 2205. The positioning pins 2206 are inserted with a predetermined fit tolerance into the positioning holes 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110).

In the side unit 2200, two sets, each consisting of one mounting hole 2205 and one positioning pin 2206, are provided with the four general winning ports 2001 positioned between them. By inserting a pair of positioning pins 2206 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the side unit 2200 can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the game area 5a. This makes it possible to set the probability of a game ball B being received by the general winning port 2001 through the multiple obstacle nails N planted in the game panel 1100 within a desired range.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a pair of positioning pins 2206, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2206 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100 to position the side unit 2200. This prevents the side unit 2200 from moving or floating away from the game panel 1100 when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 (see FIG. 190(b)) of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2205, facilitating the mounting work. In addition, even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2205 and tightened, the side unit 2200 does not move slightly, and the side unit 2200 can be reliably attached to a specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the four general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 145 etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200 within the gaming area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side below the center device 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 147 etc. The lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner as viewed from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the game panel 1100. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second start port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second start port sensor 2401 (see Fig. 153 etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2005.

The lower right unit 2400 also has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that extends left and right across its entire width in the left-right direction, a pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a pseudo out opening 2404 that is provided below the left end of the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 open forward. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens larger (wider) left and right than the second large prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of a normally used large prize opening, which is 135 mm.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a pseudo large prize opening solenoid 2406 (see FIG. 153, etc.) that opens and closes the pseudo large prize opening door 2405. The pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction, and its lower edge is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second start opening 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo out opening 2404 and directly above the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is located adjacent to the right of the second start opening 2005.

When assembled to the game board 5, the lower right unit 2400 has a left end located near the right side of the outlet 1008 and a right end close to the right rail 1005, and is formed long enough to cover most of the top of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2407 that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a partition 2410 that protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 and can form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. The base plate 2407 and the partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second start hole 2005, the second sub-out hole 2022, the pseudo large prize hole 2402, and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo large prize hole sensor 2403 is provided on the rear side of the base plate 2407. The pseudo large prize hole 2402 and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided inside the partition 2410.

The partition 2410 is made up of a bottom wall 2411 that extends left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end is higher, a first standing wall 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall 2411, a right inclined wall 2413 that extends diagonally from the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the lower left, a right lateral wall 2414 that extends horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall 2413 to the first standing wall 2412, a second standing wall 2415 that is spaced to the left of the right lateral wall 2414 and extends upward from a position at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall 2414 beyond the first standing wall 2412, and a second standing wall 2416 that is spaced to the left of the right lateral wall 2414 and extends upward from the position at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall 2414. The wall portion 2415 has a left inclined wall portion 2416 that extends diagonally downward and to the right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, a left lateral wall portion 2417 that extends horizontally from the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 to the left of the second standing wall portion 2415, an inclined wall portion 2418 that extends diagonally downward and to the left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411, and a third standing wall portion 2419 that extends downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position lower than the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to be approximately one game ball B shorter than the left-right length of the lower right rail 1004. The left-right distance between the first upright wall portion 2412 and the second upright wall portion 2415 is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the second large prize opening 2007. The distance between the bottom end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the bottom end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the left-right length of the second large prize opening 2007.

The second starting hole 2005 and the second sub-out hole 2022 are located in the area between the second upright wall 2415 and the inclined wall 2418 in the left side wall 2417. The pseudo large prize hole 2402 is located directly below the right side wall 2414, the left side wall 2417, and the inclined wall 2418, and opens forward in a shape where the area along the inclined wall 2418 is cut out obliquely from a horizontally long rectangle. The pseudo out hole 2404 is located adjacent to the area where the bottom wall 2411 and the third upright wall 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also has a flat lower right decorative part 2431 that closes the front end of the triangular frame formed by the first vertical wall part 2412, the right inclined wall part 2413, and the right lateral wall part 2414, a flat lower right left decorative part 2432 that closes the front end of the triangular frame formed by the second vertical wall part 2415, the left inclined wall part 2416, and the left lateral wall part 2417 and extends forward of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, and a lower right middle decorative part 2433 that is provided in the center between the lower right right decorative part 2431 and the lower right left decorative part 2432 and protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 in the shape of a downward arrow (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The lower right unit 2400 is further provided at the rear of the base plate 2407 and has a lower right decorative board 2434 mounted on the front surface with multiple LEDs that can independently illuminate and decorate the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the lower right right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has translucent decorative stickers affixed to the front of each of the pseudo big prize door 2405, the lower right right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right center decorative part 2433.

The lower right unit 2400 is installed in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot flow to the right and lower sides when assembled to the game board 5. Around the upper parts of the right inclined wall part 2413, the second standing wall part 2415, and the left inclined wall part 2416, the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the corresponding parts. In addition, the part between the first standing wall part 2412 and the second standing wall part 2415 is located below the second large winning hole 2007 in the center role 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall part 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacca left wall part 2568 in the center role 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall part 2415, that is, the inside of the partition part 2410, is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the second starting hole 2005 is located slightly to the right of directly below the right release passage 2565 of the center device 2500, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined wall portion 2418 is located lower than the first starting hole 2004. The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward above the second starting hole 2005, the second sub-out hole 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and a number of obstacle nails N are also planted in these areas.

Furthermore, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the pseudo outlet 2404 is located approximately one game ball B away from the outlet 1008 to the upper right. Also, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen from the front through a transparent base plate 2407, etc.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Also, the lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharge it downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 and a pseudo outlet 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). The inside of this partition 2410 is formed so that only game balls B received in the second large prize opening 2007 can circulate.

In the normal state of the lower right unit 2400, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright position, and the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 so that it cannot receive game ball B. In this state, game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402, flows down onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third upright wall 2419, and is received by the pseudo outlet 2404 that opens forward at that location. The game ball B received by the pseudo outlet 2404 is not returned to the game area 5a, but is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall 2411 is located close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo outlet 2404 is located close to the outlet 1008, so that the game ball B that rolls to the left on the bottom wall 2411 and is received by the pseudo outlet 2404 can be given the illusion to the player that it is actually rolling along the lower right rail 1004 and being received by the outlet 1008.

When the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is energized through the pseudo large prize opening solenoid 2406, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 rotates around the lower edge so that the upper end moves forward, depending on the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, and protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the upper end is positioned slightly higher than the lower end and the rear is lower. In this state, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is able to receive the game ball B. When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is in a state where it can receive the game ball B, the game ball B flows down to the front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402, where it comes into contact with the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that protrudes forward, and is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 and is received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

The pseudo large prize opening 2402 extends leftward to the lower portion of the right release passage 2565, which is used for releasing balls downward from the center device 2500 that are not accepted by the second large prize opening 2007. Therefore, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (pseudo large prize opening door 2405) is opening and closing, if game ball B is released downward from the right release passage 2565, the player is given the illusion that game ball B has also been accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

In addition, since it also extends leftward to the area directly below the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-outlet 2022, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opening and closing, game ball B that is not accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 but is released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center device 2500 and accepted by the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 can be made to look as if it is being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

The game ball B received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen by the player even through the open pseudo large prize opening 2402. Because the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen, the player is given the illusion that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening.

This pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 is used to execute a predetermined effect by detecting game ball B, and to open and close the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. By opening and closing the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 depending on the number of game balls B received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, it is possible to more easily create the illusion that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening.

The lower right unit 2400 of this embodiment has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that is wider and longer on both sides than the maximum width of 135 mm of a normally used large prize opening, giving the player the illusion that the machine is equipped with a large large prize opening never seen in a pachinko machine before, making a strong impact on the player and making it easier for players to actively select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby increasing the appeal to players.

In addition, according to the lower right unit 2400, a right side wall portion 2414, a left side wall portion 2417 and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided above the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which is larger in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007, and the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 by passing between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416), which are spaced apart by approximately half the distance of the second large prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction. This allows multiple game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 to be concentrated in a small area and directed toward the pseudo large prize opening 2402, giving the player the illusion that a greater number of game balls B are being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 than the game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, providing great entertainment to the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 to 147 and Figures 150 to 1534. Figure 150(a) is a front view of the center role in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of the arrow A part in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (b). Figure 151 is a perspective view of the center role from the left rear lower. Figure 152(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. Figure 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in Figure 152 seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in Figure 152 seen from the rear. Figure 154 is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate only seen from the rear in Figure 152 seen from the front.

The center gadget 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the play area 5a, above the starting unit 2100 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the play panel 1100. The center gadget 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and the performance display device 1600 provided behind the play panel 1100 and the various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front.

The center device 2500, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, and a first large winning opening 2006 and a second large winning opening 2007 that open and close to accept the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the first special pattern and the result of the lottery for the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B through the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005.

The frame-shaped center device 2500 has a portion (part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 all around, so that the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center role 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also called a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled to the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When assembled to the game board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center role 2500 to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The support parts 2503 are provided partially on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. The support parts 2503 are provided in the parts of the peripheral wall part 2501 where the flange part 2502 does not protrude, and reinforce the peripheral wall part 2501. The end edges of the support parts 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall part 2501 are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 or in a straight line, so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support parts 2503 from the peripheral wall part 2501 is within the range from the thickness of the support parts 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable to players while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The center gadget 2500 further has a plurality of mounting holes 2504 for mounting to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and a plurality of positioning pins 2505 for positioning on the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The mounting holes 2504 are provided in the flange portion 2502 so as to penetrate from the front to the back. The mounting holes 2504 are countersunk holes (see FIG. 150(c)), and it is desirable that the seat has a diameter of 7 mm or more.

It is also desirable to provide the mounting holes 2504 at a position that is at least a predetermined distance (e.g., 4.5 mm) away from the vertical wall (e.g., peripheral wall portion 2501). This makes it possible to prevent the screw fastening holders for fastening the mounting screws from interfering with the vertical wall when assembling the game board 5. Note that during assembly, in areas where mounting screws are simultaneously fastened through multiple mounting holes 2504, the mounting holes 2504 are provided at a predetermined distance (e.g., 29 mm) away from each other. This makes it possible to avoid interference between the screw fastening holders.

The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward by a length (effective length is 2 mm in this embodiment) that is approximately the same as the thickness of the protruding flange portion 2502. The positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a specified fit tolerance. The tip of the positioning pin 2505 is formed in a cone shape, making it easy to insert into the positioning hole 1117 of the gaming panel 1100.

The positioning pins 2505 are provided in five locations on the flange 2502: the lower right portion of the stage 2513, the lower portion of the warp entrance 2511, the left guide passage group 2530, the lower portion of the first sub-out port 2021, and the upper left corner, and are arranged so that the portions that affect the game are sandwiched between them. Specifically, the positioning pin 2505 on the lower right of the stage 2513 and the positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 are provided with the stage 2513 involved in the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 in between. In addition, the positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 and the positioning pin 2505 of the left guide passage group 2530 are provided with the variable winning port 2003 and the first large winning port 2006 in between. Furthermore, with the first large prize opening 2006 in between, there are a positioning pin 2505 for the left guide passage group 2530 and a positioning pin 2505 in the upper left corner. Also, with the second large prize opening 2007 in between, there are a positioning pin 2505 for the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 below the first sub-out opening 2021.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which some of the mounting holes 2504 are not paired with the positioning pin 2505, such as the mounting hole 2504 in the upper right corner of the center role 2500, but this is not limited to this, and all mounting holes 2504 may be paired with the positioning pin 2505. In this case, the center role 2500 can be more firmly fixed to the game board 5 (game panel 1100). In addition, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 can be accurately positioned at the desired position of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, that is, the positional relationship between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the obstacle nail N, the variation in the flow of the game ball B for each game board 5 (product) in the area outside the center role 2500 (for example, the area above or below the left guide passage group 2530, the space forming portion 2550 below the right guide passage group 2540, etc.) can be reduced as much as possible.

The positioning pin 2505 is provided adjacent to the mounting hole 2504, and the distance L1 between the centers of the adjacent mounting holes 2504 is set within a predetermined range. The above distance L1 is within a range of 1 to 6 times the length of the positioning pin 2505, preferably within a range of 5 mm to 8 mm. The reason for setting the distance L1 within the above range is that if it is smaller (closer) than the above range, the positioning hole 1117 into which the positioning pin 2505 is inserted and the screw hole 1116 into which the mounting screw is screwed through the mounting hole 2504 in the gaming panel 1100 will be too close, which may cause the hole position to shift or the hole to become distorted when the positioning hole 1117 or the screw hole 1116 is drilled in the gaming panel 1100. Also, if it is larger (farther) than the above range, when the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, there is a risk that distortion or cracks (cracks) may easily occur in the area between the positioning pin 2505 and the mounting hole 2504 in the flange portion 2502.

The positional relationship between the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 is not limited to the center part 2500, but can also be applied to the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo attacker unit), the gate member 2600, etc.

The positioning pin 2505 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the flange portion 2502 at a location that can be contacted by an operator from the front. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided at a location that is rear of a member (e.g., a front plate portion) that is away from the front of the flange portion 2502. This makes it possible, when assembling the game board 5, to press the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided, and reliably push the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100.

The center device 2500 has multiple positioning pins 2505, and by inserting these positioning pins 2505 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the center device 2500 can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the game area 5a. This makes it possible to set the probability of receiving the game ball B into the stage 2513, the variable winning hole 2003, the first large winning hole 2006, and the second large winning hole 2007, etc., provided in the center device 2500, within a desired range.

In addition, since the center role 2500 has multiple positioning pins 2505, when the center role 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100 to position the center role 2500. Therefore, when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the center role 2500 can be prevented from moving or floating away from the game panel 1100, making the installation work easier. In addition, even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened, the center role 2500 does not move slightly, and the center role 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

This center feature 2500 has a peeling hole 2508 that penetrates from front to back at the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the decorative sticker is attached to the front (see FIG. 151). The front side of this peeling hole 2508 is blocked by the decorative sticker. When the decorative sticker is attached to the front of the flange portion 2502, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side into the peeling hole 2508, and the rod-shaped member presses the decorative sticker forward from the rear, causing a part of the decorative sticker to roll up forward from the flange portion 2502. Then, the worker can easily remove (peel off) the decorative sticker from the flange portion 2502 by pulling the rolled-up part of the decorative sticker. This improves the workability of the work of re-attaching the decorative sticker during manufacturing and the work of sorting when disposing of the decorative sticker.

The center gadget 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2511 that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at a portion on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 when viewed from the front and forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp exit 2512 that is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and allows the game ball B that entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released, a stage 2513 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling it in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the top of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 prevents the game ball B from entering the frame of the center gadget 2500 from outside by bouncing the game ball B that bounces on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is curved with a recessed center in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than both the left and right sides. This stage 2513 is inclined so that the part (center release part 2513a) that is slightly higher than both the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both the left and right sides (side release part 2513b) are lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction (the central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting hole 2004 with an extremely high probability.

In this case, the center role 2500 of this embodiment has positioning pins 2505 on both the left and right sides with the stage 2513 (central release section 2513a) in between, so that the positioning pins 2505 can accurately position the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 at a specific position (directly above the first starting hole 2004 in the starting hole unit 2100) within the play area 5a. This makes it possible to keep the acceptance probability of the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 being accepted by the first starting hole 2004 below within a desired range, and even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, the relative positions of the stage 2513 and the first starting hole 2004 can be maintained, and changes in the acceptance probability can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, the center role 2500 has the positioning pins 2505 provided adjacent to some of the mounting holes 2504, but this is not limited thereto, and the positioning pins 2505 may be provided adjacent to all of the mounting holes 2504. In other words, the mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pins 2505 may be a set of mounting parts, and the center role 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by providing only a plurality of mounting parts. This not only provides the same effect as described above, but also allows the entire center role 2500 to follow the expansion and contraction of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) even if the environment, such as temperature and humidity, changes.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the positioning pin 2505 (positioning pin 2107, positioning pin 2206) is shown to be cylindrical, but this is not limited to this and may be a polygonal column, a star-shaped column, a hemisphere, or other shape.

[5-8e-1. First Attacker]
The center role 2500 is provided with a first attacker section 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006, above a warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of a frame-shaped peripheral wall section 2501. The first attacker section 2520 of the center role 2500 includes a variable winning opening door 2521 that closes the variable winning opening 2003 in an openable and closable manner, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 167, etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, and a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003.

The first attacker section 2520 also includes a first large prize opening door 2523 that closes the first large prize opening 2006 in an openable and closable manner, a first large prize opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 167, etc.) that is energized in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 to open and close the first large prize opening door 2523, and a first large prize opening sensor 2525 that detects the game ball B received into the first large prize opening 2006.

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 is equipped with a transparent flat center left front panel 2527 located in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first large winning opening 2006, and the left second guide passage 2532 (see Figure 137, etc.).

The center gimmick 2500 has a first attacker section 2520 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall section 2501. The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006.

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, and opens to the left in front of the flange portion 2502 that extends outward from the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, approximately near the center in the vertical direction of the center gimmick 2500. In addition, the first large winning opening 2006 opens upwards directly above the variable winning opening 2003, with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The variable prize opening door 2521 is supported so that its lower end can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and when it is in an upright position (normal position), it can close the variable prize opening 2003 so that it can receive a game ball B. When electricity is applied to the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, the variable prize opening door 2521 rotates so that its upper end moves to the left, and the variable prize opening 2003 can be placed in a position (open position) in which it can receive a game ball B. When the variable prize opening door 2521 is in the open position, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined lower to the right, so that the game ball B that flows down from above and abuts on the upper surface can be guided to the variable prize opening 2003 on the right.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, it is handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

The first large prize opening door 2523 is a flat plate that is inclined so that it is lower to the left, and is arranged so that it can move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In the normal state, the first large prize opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible for game balls B to be received by the first large prize opening 2006. In this state, game balls B that have flowed down above the first large prize opening door 2523 are guided to the left by the inclination of the first large prize opening door 2523, and flow through the left second guide passage 2532.

When the first large prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first large prize opening door 2523 retreats rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, making it possible for the first large prize opening 2006 to receive a game ball B. In this state, the game ball B received by the first large prize opening 2006 flows down in front of the flange portion 2502, is detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525 provided at a height between the first large prize opening 2006 and the variable prize opening 2003, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable prize opening 2003. The game ball B is then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center role 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is provided with a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can pass. In other words, the left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can pass is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 and the inner rail 1002. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit so that it passes through the left side of the center role 2500, the game ball B is always formed to pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

When assembled to the game board 5, the left guide passage group 2530 is located below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002, at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom of the game area 5a. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height in the vertical direction that is about three times the diameter of the game ball B. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game ball B in circulation can be seen in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 that contacts the inner rail 1002, and a left second guide passage 2532 that is provided to the right of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 that protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502.

The first large winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of this left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, if you want to receive game ball B into the first large winning opening 2006, you need to perform a shooting operation so that game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Furthermore, the center role 2500 is provided with a right guide passage group 2540, which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow. When assembled to the game board 5, the right end (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) of the right guide passage group 2540 is approximately in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000), and the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center role 2500 is always formed to pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length of approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the circulating game balls B to be seen in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role-piece 2500, and is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 that is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a right second guide passage 2542 that is provided to the right of the right first guide passage 2541. The entrances of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are separated from each other on the left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front of the gaming panel 1100 at a location directly below the entrance, then extends downward, and then extends forward from the front of the gaming panel 1100 at a position to the left of directly below the entrance, with its exit opening diagonally to the lower right. The right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and its exit opens diagonally to the lower right, lined up to the right of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right cross.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) when the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. The right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and is formed so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the right first guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that enters the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side closer to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. As will be described in detail later, the game ball B that enters the second guide area 2712 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 provided downstream, so when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 than when it enters the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a flow detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting game balls B flowing through the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, in a game situation in which the player is to "hit to the right," when the number of game balls B detected by the flow detection sensor 2543 per hour is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is possible to encourage the player to "hit to the right" in order to make the game situation more enjoyable, or to instruct the player to hit with a strength that prevents the ball from entering the right second guide passage 2542 and being received by the first sub-outlet 2021.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center role 2500 includes a space forming section 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540, and a second attacker section 2560 provided below the space forming section 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height of about half the total height of the play area 5a. The second attacker portion 2560 is It has a second large prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is located in the lower right corner of the center device 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, a flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center role 2500 has a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502, a guide wall portion 2552 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502 and extending downward and to the right from a lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and an opening portion 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 from front to rear in a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a small gap between the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The right wall portion 2551 also has a notch 2551a near the top that penetrates from left to right. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided so that a gap of approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction between the bottom end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over almost the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. The side of this opening 2553 closer to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 is a constant distance from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 moves further away from the right wall portion 2551 as it extends downward. In other words, in the space forming portion 2550, the side closer to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 of the flange portion 2502 extends vertically to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 with a constant width, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 of the flange portion 2502 extends vertically so that it becomes wider to the left as it extends downward.

When assembled into the game board 5, some of the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the front of the game panel 1100 are inserted from the rear into the opening 2553. The multiple obstacle nails N inserted into the opening 2553 are a specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a specific gauge arrangement, as will be described in detail later. In other words, the space forming portion 2550 of the center gimmick 2500 forms the space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

The space forming portion 2550 also has a number of rear ridges 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend left and right, and are spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The rear ridges 2554 are arranged in a staggered manner in the front-to-rear direction at positions corresponding to the multiple front ridges 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 described below. This allows the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 to flow down in a meandering manner in the front-to-rear direction by the front ridges 2555d and the rear ridges 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent flat center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a light-transmitting center right front plate seal 2556 that is affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555 (see FIG. 153, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540, and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front panel 2555 has a plurality of first storage sections 2555a that penetrate from front to back and each of which accommodates the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (set nail sections 2701), a second storage section 2555b that penetrates from front to back and accommodates the head of one obstacle nail N, a peeling hole 2555c that penetrates from front to back at the location where the center right front panel seal 2556 is attached, and a plurality of protrusions 2555d that bulge rearward from the rear surface and extend left and right and are spaced apart in the front to back direction. The center right front panel 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center role 2500 unless the center role 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first storage section 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that surrounds and contacts the heads of the multiple obstruction nails N (set nail section 2701) that it contains, forming a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line. In this embodiment, one first storage section 2555a is formed to a size that can accommodate the heads of two obstruction nails N, and the center of the first storage section 2555a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstruction nail N. The second storage section 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstruction nail N. These first storage section 2555a and second storage section 2555b are provided in positions that correspond to the obstruction nails N of the specific obstruction nail group 2700 described later.

The gap between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b is preferably in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and more preferably in the range of 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. If the gap is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected and bent when the center right front panel 2555 expands or contracts due to environmental changes, and it may be difficult to store the front end of the obstacle nail N in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b when assembling the game board 5, which may increase costs due to the labor involved. In addition, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending of the obstacle nail N when it is bent due to the impact of the game ball B hitting it, etc., may exceed the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow.

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N stored in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b, thereby preventing the obstacle nails N from being deformed (bent) due to impacts caused by the flow (contact) of the game balls B or some other external impact, and reduces the unintended flow of the game balls B. It also allows the game balls B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, making it possible to continuously exert the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 can suppress deformation of the obstructing nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for the amusement hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed to maintain the obstructing nails N.

In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the front of the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b are closed by the center right front panel seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front panel 2555, so that the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b are bent through the center right front panel seal 2556, the traces remain on the center right front panel seal 2556, making it easier to notice defects in the obstacle nails N.

When the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, a rod-shaped member such as a wire can be inserted from the rear side into the peeling hole 2555c, and the rod-shaped member can be used to press the center right front plate seal 2556 forward from the rear, thereby causing a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 to be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, by an operator pulling the rolled-up part of the center right front plate seal 2556, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555. This improves the ease of work, such as re-attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 during manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of the triangular area surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when assembled into the game board 5, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the peeling hole 2555c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where the game ball B is circulated, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, the peel-off hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate sticker 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, which prevents the peel-off hole 2555c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the peel-off hole 2555c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the peel-off hole 2555c.

The multiple front ridges 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the multiple rear ridges 2554 bulging out from the flange portion 2502. These front ridges 2555d are provided so that they are staggered vertically relative to the rear ridges 2554. This allows the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 to flow down in a meandering manner in the front-to-back direction by the front ridges 2555d and rear ridges 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Section]
The second attacker section 2560 of the center role 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. The right end of the second large winning opening 2007 is located at a position slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B to the right from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall section 2552, and the left end is located at a position about 1/3 from the right of the total width in the game area 5a. The second large winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right wall of the first sub-out opening 2021 is continuous with the right wall section 2551 of the space forming section 2550.

The second attacker section 2560 also has a second large prize opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007, a flat second large prize opening door 2562 that can open and close the second large prize opening 2007 by moving back and forth, and is inclined so as to be lower to the left, and a second large prize opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, to open and close the second large prize opening door 2562.

The second attacca section 2560 also has an attacca passage 2564 that is located above the second large winning opening door 2562 in front of the flange section 2502 and allows game balls B to flow to the left, a right release passage 2565 that extends downward from the left end of the attacca passage 2564 to the left of the second large winning opening 2007 and allows game balls B to be released downward, and a closing wall section 2566 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502, forms part of the ceiling wall of the attacca passage 2564, and extends leftward from the lower end of the guide wall section 2552 to the peripheral wall section 2501.

The attacca passage 2564 extends downward to the left at a height slightly greater than the diameter of the game ball B, with the ceiling wall being composed of a part of the peripheral wall 2501 and the closing wall 2566, and the floor wall being composed of the second large prize winning opening door 2562. In this attacca passage 2564, a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a are provided at the attacca passage 2564 portion of the flange 2502, which protrude forward and extend vertically, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction, and a plurality of front protrusions (not shown) are provided at the attacca passage 2564 portion of the center lower right front panel 2572, which will be described later, which protrude backward and extend vertically, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction so as to alternate with the rear protrusions 2564a. The multiple front and rear ridges 2564a allow the game ball B to flow leftward in the attacca passage 2564 while meandering back and forth, and the flow speed can be suppressed.

The right release passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a left-right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The outlet of the right release passage 2565 is provided at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right release passage 2565 has a right wall formed by the attacca left wall portion 2568, and a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Furthermore, the second attacca section 2560 has an attacca right wall section 2567 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502 to the right of the second large prize opening door 2562, extends downward from a position higher than the right end of the second large prize opening door 2562 and slightly lower than the right end of the closing wall section 2566, an attacca left wall section 2568 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502 to the left of the second large prize opening door 2562 and extends downward from a position lower than the left end of the second large prize opening door 2562, a right shelf section 2569 that extends lower to the left from the bottom end of the attacca right wall section 2567, a left shelf section 2570 that extends lower to the right from near the top end of the attacca left wall section 2568 to form a gap in the left-right direction between the right shelf section 2569, and a middle wall section 2571 that is provided in the center between the left shelf section 2570 and the right shelf section 2569.

The second large prize opening 2007 is defined in the left-right direction by the attacca right wall portion 2567 and the attacca left wall portion 2568. In other words, the left-right width between the attacca right wall portion 2567 and the attacca left wall portion 2568 is the left-right width of the second large prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the left-right width of the second large prize opening 2007 is 131 mm.

The attacca left wall 2568 extends downwards beyond the lower end of the attacca right wall 2567, and its lower end is bent slightly to the right. When assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacca left wall 2568, making it impossible for the game ball B to pass between the left and right sides. The lower ends of the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacca left wall 2568. Between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, second large winning hole sensors 2561 are provided, respectively. When assembled to the game board 5, the middle wall 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decorative part 2433 of the lower right unit 2400.

The second attacca section 2560 further has a transparent flat center lower right front panel 2572 that closes the front of the space formed by the attacca passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the attacca right wall section 2567, the attacca left wall section 2568, the right shelf section 2569, and the left shelf section 2570 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

In the normal state of the second attacker section 2560, the front end of the second large prize opening door 2562 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the flange section 2502, closing the second large prize opening 2007 so that it cannot receive game balls B. The second large prize opening door 2562, which closes the second large prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is formed as a flat plate extending left and right and front and rear, making it difficult to see when viewed from the front and difficult to tell whether it is open or closed.

In this normal state, game ball B that is hit into the right side of the center device 2500 and flows down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551 to the second attacker portion 2560 side. At this time, game ball B that flows down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-outlet 2021 with a high probability. Game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

If a game ball B is not accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 and flows down onto the second large prize opening door 2562, it will roll to the left inside the attacca passage 2564 while snaking back and forth along the multiple front and rear protrusions 2564a, and then enter the right release passage 2565 from the left end of the second large prize opening door 2562, and will be returned to the game area 5a from the bottom end (exit) of the right release passage 2565.

When assembled to the game board 5, the second attacca section 2560 of the center device 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400, and the upper end of the second standing wall section 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacca left wall section 2568, which constitutes the right wall of the right release passage 2565. This prevents the game ball B from passing between the right release passage 2565 and the right side of the second standing wall section 2415. In other words, an area (pseudo game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall section 2415.

In other words, a pseudo-game area 2010 is formed, which is partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the attacca left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 of the second attacca portion 2560. Only game balls B received in the second large winning opening 2007 can circulate in this pseudo-game area 2010.

When the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 is energized in response to the lottery results of the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the second large prize opening door 2562 moves back and the second large prize opening 2007 becomes able to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B circulating through the attacca passage 2564 and the game ball B that has flowed down from the space forming portion 2550 to the second large prize opening 2007 are received by the second large prize opening 2007.

The game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf section 2569 or the left shelf section 2570, and is then detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. In this second attacker section 2560, two second large prize opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, so that even if many game balls B are received by the second large prize opening 2007 in a short period of time, they can be detected without any delay.

According to the center gadget 2500 of this embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a first storage section 2555a that stores the heads of the multiple obstacle nails N of each set nail section 2701 that constitutes the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the heads of the obstacle nails N can be restricted from moving, and the obstacle nails N can be prevented from being deformed (bent) due to the impact of the flow (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact. This reduces the flow of the game ball B down in an unintended flow, allows the game ball B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and allows the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to be continuously exerted, and allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, according to the center role 2500, the second large prize opening door 2562, which closes the second large prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the second large prize opening door 2562 is moved forward and backward to open and close the second large prize opening 2007. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the second large prize opening door 2562 can be made difficult to see, and the existence of the second large prize opening 2007 can be made difficult to notice. This makes it possible to make the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (pseudo large prize opening door 2405) provided below the second large prize opening 2007 relatively conspicuous, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a strong illusion can be created that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening. Therefore, the machine gives the player the illusion that it has a large winning hole that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which can have a strong impact on the player, and it can also make it easier for players to actively choose this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, according to the center role 2500, the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This makes it possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged even if the game ball B abuts against the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided. In addition, because the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 can be removed from the injection molding die without being deformed.

In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes slightly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the support portion 2503 can reduce interference with the visibility of the decorative body of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear and the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that in the portion of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) close to the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This allows the playing area with multiple obstacle nails N within the playing area 5a to be as wide as possible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy playing as they intended.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110. This makes it possible to make the support portion 2503 less noticeable to the player, and makes it possible to make the center gimmick 2500 appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the circumference of the center role device 2500, the frame of the center role device 2500 can be made wider than when the support portion 2503 is provided around the entire circumference, and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role device 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 may be provided on a part of the circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends to an extent that it does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 143 and 144. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is disposed slightly below the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction, and below the variable winning hole 2003 of the center role 2500. The exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500 is disposed directly above the gate member 2600. In addition, the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 opens toward the left at the lower right of the gate member 2600.

The gate member 2600 has a gate 2002 through which a lottery for a normal symbol is performed to open and close a variable winning opening 2003 when a game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, upstream of the second large winning hole 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center role 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of nail groups 2701 each consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged adjacent to each other, and the nail groups 2701 are arranged at intervals that allow a single game ball B to pass through. In this embodiment, the nail group 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged so that the areas (gaps) between the multiple nail groups 2701 that are spaced apart are arranged in a predetermined pattern, making it possible to guide the game ball B by the multiple nail groups 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guidance area 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guidance area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guidance area 2710 is composed of a first guidance area 2711 and a second guidance area 2712 provided to the right of the first guidance area 2711. The first guidance area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 to the left side. The second guidance area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right side.

The first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are arranged in an arc shape with the center in the vertical direction bulging to the right. In detail, in the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712, in the multiple nails 2701 forming the outside of the arc, the multiple nails 2701 forming the inside of the arc are arranged so that the arc is tangent to the straight line connecting the nails 2701 near the upper end and the lower end. In other words, the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the vertically extending portion is reduced, making it easier to make the game ball B meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, the multiple nail sections 2701 that form the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712 are arranged so that the nail section 2701 located below between two nail sections 2701 spaced apart from each other on the left and right is located to the right (farther from the center of the arc) of the center between the two upper nail sections 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712.

Furthermore, the multiple nails 2701 forming the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712 are arranged so that the gaps between the multiple nails 2701 arranged in an arc shape are positioned higher toward the right row. In other words, among the multiple nails 2701 forming the walls on both the left and right sides of the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712, the right nails 2701 in a pair in the left-right direction are arranged so that the right nails 2701 are higher. This makes it easier to make the game ball B meander left and right.

The guidance area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward in a zigzag manner in the left-right direction by using multiple set nails 2701 arranged at intervals. This can suppress and slow down the flow speed of the game ball B compared to an area where obstacle nails N are planted in a general arrangement, and can delay the flow time (arrival time) of the game ball B to a specified position. In addition, by forming two obstacle nails N into a set in the set nail section 2701, the number of collisions between the obstacle nails N and the game ball B can be increased compared to a configuration with only one obstacle nail N, and the effect of delaying the fall of the game ball B is increased.

In the guidance area 2710, the multiple nails 2701 are spaced apart in the vertical direction, so that the guided game ball B may move to the left or right outside through the space. In other words, the game ball B may move from the first guidance area 2711 to the second guidance area 2712, from the second guidance area 2712 to the first guidance area 2711, from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside, or from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside.

The game ball B guided to the bottom end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows down between the guide wall 2552 and the attacca right wall 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that moves from the first guiding area 2711 to the left outside flows down between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 while meandering in the front-to-back direction due to the multiple rear ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the multiple front ridges 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. Then, it abuts against the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that moves from the second guiding area 2712 to the right outside will flow down between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551, meandering in the front-to-back direction due to the multiple rear ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the multiple front ridges 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. It will then flow down to the first sub-outlet 2021, or between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it will flow through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside, it may be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021. In other words, in this embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the right second guide passage 2542 has a higher probability of accepting the game ball B into the first sub-outlet 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, the player can perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when "hitting to the right", hitting the game ball B more strongly makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 close to the impact stopper 1006, so there is no need to hit the game ball B with fine adjustments, and the hitting operation can be performed easily.

Incidentally, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the set nail section is made up of only one obstacle nail N, the other obstacle nail N that is paired with the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass will be the obstacle nail N in all directions that form gaps with the obstacle nail N as the center. In other words, one obstacle nail N will be responsible for forming gaps in all directions. As a result, if the obstacle nail N bends, the gap will widen in one direction and narrow in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N will greatly change the probability of guiding the game ball B through the guiding area 2710, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N bends, it will be necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so that the gaps are the desired distance, which will require a lot of maintenance work.

In contrast, when the set nail section 2701 is made up of multiple obstacle nails N as in this embodiment, the adjacent obstacle nails N are responsible for forming gaps in the direction of a certain obstacle nail N in the set nail section 2701, so that the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is responsible for forming a gap can be limited to only some directions, and the number of obstacle nails N that are paired to form a gap can be reduced. As a result, even if one obstacle nail N of the set nail section 2701 is bent, the affected gap area is small, so that the change in the guiding probability of the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 can be suppressed. In addition, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it is only necessary to adjust the gap with the obstacle nail N in some directions to the desired distance, and the maintenance effort can be reduced compared to the case of adjusting the gap in all directions.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the heads of the obstacle nails N are inserted and accommodated in the first accommodation section 2555a and the second accommodation section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555. The set nail section 2701, which is made up of multiple obstacle nails N, is accommodated in the first accommodation section 2555a so that the heads of the obstacle nails are surrounded.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b of the center right front board 2555, which makes it possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to impact from the flow (contact) of the game ball B or some kind of external impact, and reduces the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. It also makes it possible to circulate the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, allowing the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the heads of the obstacle nails N are accommodated in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555, which suppresses deformation of the obstacle nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nails N by the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b that store the heads of the obstacle nails N are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so the obstacle nails N cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if an obstacle nail N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, a trace of this remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, making it easier to notice any defects in the obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 also has the function of distributing the incoming game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second large winning port 2007. This function is important as it affects the payout rate. In game halls, any nail adjustment is prohibited. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center gimmick 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is covered by the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate seal 2556, so that no nail adjustment can be made.

In the above embodiment, the multiple nail groups 2701 forming the specific nail group 2700 are shown to be composed of two nails N, but this is not limited to this and may be composed of three or more nails N. When the nail group 2701 is composed of three or more nails N, the multiple nails N may be arranged in a line or in a polygon such as a triangle, square, pentagon, or hexagon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the guiding area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is shown to be composed of two areas, the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712, but this is not limited to this and it may be composed of one area or three or more areas.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, the second large winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern (for example, "small win"), even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that it reaches the second large winning opening 2007 at the timing when it can be received, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 makes it difficult for the game ball B to reach the second large winning opening 2007 at the desired timing, making it difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. This makes it possible to impart a level of difficulty to the operation of hitting the game ball B, which can arouse the player's sense of fulfillment in the game and make him enjoy it, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second large winning opening 2007 to receive game ball B, thereby suppressing an increase in the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the circulation speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting multiple obstacle nails N, so the cost of the configuration can be reduced compared to when it is constructed from synthetic resin components, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo-game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 etc. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a. This is an area where only a specific game ball B can be distributed. In detail, only the game ball B received by the second large winning port 2007 (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) can be distributed. The pseudo play area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the play area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 has an exposed portion of the front of the flat game panel 1100 with the game area 5a in front, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that can be opened and closed depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and a pseudo outlet 2404 that discharges the game ball B that is not received into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 as an entrance that can receive the game ball B, and the pseudo outlet 2404 that discharges the game ball B, and has a configuration similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo-play area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacka section 2560 of the center gadget 2500. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the top by the right shelf 2569, left shelf 2570, and middle wall 2571 of the second attacka section 2560. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall 2412 of the partition 2410. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the left end by the attacka left wall 2568 of the second attacka section 2560, the second standing wall 2415 of the partition 2410, the left side wall 2417, the inclined wall 2418, and the third standing wall 2419. The pseudo play area 2010 is separated at its lower end by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the separating portion 2410.

The pseudo game area 2010 is between the second attacker section 2560 and the pseudo big prize opening 2402, with the front of the game panel 1100 exposed forward, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted in that area.

The second large prize opening 2007, which is a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010, is opened and closed by a second large prize opening door 2562. This second large prize opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves back and forth in the front and back directions, so that the second large prize opening door 2562 is difficult to see from the player's side. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a, and the parts that separate it from the game area 5a (such as the partition part 2410 and the left wall part 2568 of the attacca of the center role 2500) are formed transparent, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed parts of the game panel 1100, so that the player can have the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a.

The pseudo large prize opening 2402 provided in the pseudo play area 2010 is longer in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the second large prize opening 2007 has a left-right size of 131 mm, and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 has a left-right size of 170 mm. This pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens forward, so the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that allows the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to be opened and closed faces forward when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is closed (normal state), making the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 noticeable to players.

For this reason, when a player looks at this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 stands out more than the second large prize opening 2007, giving the player the impression that the machine is equipped with a larger prize opening than any other pachinko machine has ever seen, strongly catching the player's attention.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of this embodiment, in the normal state, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 so that it cannot accept game ball B. Also, in the normal state, the second large prize opening 2007 is closed by the second large prize opening door 2562, so that game ball B that is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 and flows down to the second large prize opening door 2562 rolls to the left on the second large prize opening door 2562 and is released into the game area 5a through the right release passage 2565. Therefore, in the normal state, game ball B does not circulate within the pseudo game area 2010.

When the second large prize opening door 2562 moves back from the normal state in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn when game ball B is received by the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, game ball B can be received by the second large prize opening 2007. In this state, when game ball B is received by the second large prize opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and is then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a number of obstacle nails N planted in the forward exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big prize opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo big prize opening door 2405, flows down onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third upright wall 2419, and is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the pseudo out opening 2404 that opens forward at that portion. In other words, it is discharged from within the pseudo game area 2010.

The pseudo outlet 2404 of the pseudo play area 2010 is located close to the right side of the outlet 1008, giving the player the illusion that the game ball B received in the pseudo outlet 2404 is actually received in the outlet 1008. This gives the player the illusion that the pseudo play area 2010 is part of the play area 5a.

Therefore, the game in which game ball B passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 can be mistaken as the game in which game ball B passes through a large prize opening in a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be disappointed when game ball B is not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. On the other hand, since game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 are circulated in the pseudo game area 2010, even if game ball B is not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out by acceptance by the second large prize opening 2007. As a result, game ball B is paid out even though game ball B was not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, so the player can feel that he has won, and the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened or closed, the large pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that is visible from the front opens and closes, so that the player can instantly notice that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is ready to receive a ball. This allows the player to perform an operation to hit the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500 (so-called "right hit") so that the game ball B can be received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of advance notice, or as a signal to instruct the player to "hit right". This pseudo large prize opening 2402 can only be entered by "hitting right", so it is easy for the player to understand intuitively.

For this reason, for example, before the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed to allow the player to perform a "right hit." This makes it easier for the game ball B hit to the right to reach the second large prize opening 2007 when the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, making it more entertaining for the player and preventing a decline in interest.

When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is also opened and closed during a "big win" game in which the second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, a large number of game balls B can be supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 in a short period of time through the second large prize opening 2007, and as a large number of game balls B circulate within the pseudo game area 2010, the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B and the game within the pseudo game area 2010. At this time, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is received by the large pseudo large prize opening 2402, which greatly entertains the player and prevents a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007, but above the pseudo large prize opening 2402, a right side wall portion 2414, a left side wall portion 2417, and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided, and a game ball B that passes between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416) is received into the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is approximately half the left-right distance of the second large prize opening 2007. Therefore, since the multiple game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 are concentrated in a small area and head toward the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the player is given the illusion that a greater number of game balls B are being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 than the game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, which greatly entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The pseudo big prize opening 2402 of this embodiment does not pay out game ball B or grant a special prize to the player by receiving game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 can be opened and closed in opening and closing patterns not seen in the big prize openings of conventional pachinko machines (for example, 3-3-7 beats, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, background music or the tempo of a specified piece of music, etc.), which can be enjoyed by the player.

In addition to the obstacle nails N, the pseudo play area 2010 may also be equipped with a windmill W. The presence of the windmill W in the pseudo play area 2010 makes it even more realistic, and makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo play area 2010 and the play area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the play area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 145 to 147. When assembled on the play board 5, the center role 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a. In the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center role 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided on the left side of the center role 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

First, on the left side of the center role 2500, the left guide passage group 2530, the gate 2002, and the side left upper unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. The multiple obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that game balls B are collected above the entrance to the left second guide passage 2532. As a result, when game ball B is hit to the left of the center role 2500, it can be circulated to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 will circulate downward while approaching the center role 2500, and will flow down to the left of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize opening 2006 that is normally closed by the first large prize opening door 2523 to prevent acceptance, and a game ball B that enters the left second guide passage 2532 rolls and flows down on the first large prize opening door 2523. When the first large prize opening door 2523 is retracted in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, if the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532, there is a high probability that it will be accepted into the first large prize opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first large prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525 installed below, and is discharged downward via the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the game ball B is detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so that they are gathered directly above the gate 2002, below the variable winning opening 2003. This allows a certain degree of probability for a game ball B to pass through the gate 2002 when it is hit to the left of the center device 2500. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the outer left and outer right sides of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed. If the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning port 2003 is ready to receive the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning port 2003 is ready to receive, the variable winning port door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the variable winning port 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B received by the variable winning port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning port sensor 2526, and then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning port sensor 2526, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300, a warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens to the left in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center gimmick 2500. The windmill W is located between the center gimmick 2500 and the inner rail 1002, closer to the center gimmick 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are positioned so that a game ball B that flows through the gate 2002 and the outer right side of the gate 2002 mainly flows down the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. Therefore, a game ball B that flows through the gate 2002 and the outer right side of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain degree of probability. On the other hand, a game ball B that flows through the outer left side of the gate 2002 will not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that enters the warp entrance 2511 passes through a warp passage and is supplied from the warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame of the center role 2500 to the stage 2513 provided near the lower end of the center part in the left-right direction of the center role 2500. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls left-right on the stage 2513 and is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either the central release section 2513a or the side release section 2513b.

The central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting opening 2004 in the left-right center of the play area 5a, so that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, a lottery for a first special symbol is held and a special bonus is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

The game ball B that is released from the stage 2513 and is not received by the first starting port 2004 is received by the outlet 1008 and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B that is received by the outlet 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide section 1003 and then discharged downward.

There is a high probability that a game ball B that has flowed to the right of the center of the windmill W will flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the upper tier of multiple obstacle nails N that are arranged in two tiers, one above the other, diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500. Game balls B that pass through the right side of the windmill W and do not flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the upper tier will flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the lower tier. On the other hand, game balls B that have flowed to the left of the center of the windmill W will flow down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300, roll the shelf 2301 to the right, and then flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the lower tier.

A game ball B that flows to the right of the center of the windmill W and flows down to the upper side of the multiple obstacle nails N that are lined up diagonally is guided to the center (first start opening 2004) of the left-right direction of the play area 5a below the center device 2500, and may be accepted by the first start opening 2004. In addition, since a gap is provided on the upper side where the multiple obstacle nails N are lined up diagonally so that one game ball B can pass through, the game ball may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap and may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. A game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2004 is discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the play area 5a.

On the other hand, if a game ball B flows down to the lower row of multiple obstacle nails N that are arranged diagonally on the left side below the center device 2500, it is guided by the multiple obstacle nails N to the center of the play area 5a in the left-right direction, and is not accepted by the first starting hole 2004 but is accepted by the outlet 1008 and discharged from the play area 5a. On this lower side, there are multiple gaps along the way that allow one game ball B to pass through, so there is a possibility that the game ball B may pass through the gaps and be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 provided in the side unit 2200.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Next, on the right side of the center role 2500, the right guide passage group 2540, the space forming section 2550, the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the second attacker section 2560, and the lower right unit 2400 are arranged in this order from the top. The space forming section 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker section 2560 is provided with the specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of multiple obstacle nails N.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough force to enter the upper part of the part of the upper edge of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center role 2500 that becomes lower from near the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

A game ball B that is hit relatively hard toward the right side of the center role 2500 hits the impact stop 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, a game ball B that is hit relatively weakly toward the right side of the center role 2500 rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 and enters the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B that enters the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the flow detection sensor 2543 and is released downward from the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 between the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500 and the right rail 1005. The game ball B that passes through the right first guide passage 2541 then enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and flows down while meandering left and right within the first guide area 2711. The game ball B that flows through the first guide area 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall 2552.

The multiple nails 2701 constituting the walls on both the left and right sides of the first induction area 2711 form a gap between them in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass, and the game ball B may move through the gap to the left or right outer side (second induction area 2712) of the first induction area 2711. The game ball B that moves from the first induction area 2711 to the left outer side flows down to the induction wall section 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall section 2501. At this time, the game ball B flows down while meandering in the front-back direction due to the multiple rear protrusions 2554 of the flange section 2502 and the multiple front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. The game ball B that flows down to the induction wall section 2552 flows diagonally downward and to the right along the induction wall section 2552. The game ball B that moves from the first induction area 2711 to the right outer side flows through the second induction area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side closer to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and flows down while meandering in the left and right direction within the second guide area 2712. The game ball B that flows through the second guide area 2712 abuts against the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall portion 2552.

The multiple nails 2701 constituting the walls on both the left and right sides of the second induction area 2712 form a gap between them in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass, and the game ball B may move to the left outer side (first induction area 2711) or right outer side of the second induction area 2712 through the gap. The game ball B that moves from the second induction area 2712 to the left outer side flows through the first induction area 2711. The game ball B that moves from the second induction area 2712 to the right outer side passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and flows down to the area between the induction wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. At this time, the game ball flows down while meandering in the front-back direction due to the multiple protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the multiple protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. The game ball B that moves from the second guide area 2712 to the outside right is likely to be received by the first sub-outlet 2021 and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged downward via the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by this specific group of obstacle nails 2700 has a slower flow rate than a portion where obstacle nails N are planted in a general gauge arrangement, and flows down at a slower rate even at the same height.

The game ball B that has passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been accepted into the first sub-outlet 2021 enters the attacca passage 2564 provided above the second large prize winning port 2007 of the second attacca portion 2560 from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567. In the normal state, the second large prize winning port door 2562 advances to close the second large prize winning port 2007 so that it cannot be accepted, so the game ball B that has entered the attacca passage 2564 rolls to the left on the upper surface of the second large prize winning port door 2562 and is then released downward through the right release passage 2565. In this attacca passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while snaking back and forth due to the rear protrusion portion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front protrusion portion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker section 2560 flows down while abutting against multiple obstacle nails N planted between the right lower unit 2400 (left side wall section 2417). Then, with a certain probability, it is accepted into the second starting port 2005, which is always open upward below the right release passage 2565. Also, although the probability of acceptance into the second starting port 2005 is lower, there is a certain probability that it is accepted into the second sub-out port 2022, which is open to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The game ball B received in the second start port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second start port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery for a second special pattern is held and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that is released from the right release passage 2565 and is not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 rolls diagonally downward and to the left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400, and is then discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

When the second large prize opening door 2562 retracts in response to the result of the lottery for the first special pattern or the result of the lottery for the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the game ball B circulating through the attacca passage 2564 of the second attacca section 2560 is accepted into the second large prize opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B accepted into the second large prize opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by one of the two second large prize opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded.

The game ball B supplied from the second large prize opening 2007 into the pseudo play area 2010 flows down while abutting against a number of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo play area 2010. When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo large prize opening door 2405, the game ball B flows down through the front of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is then received by the pseudo out opening 2404. The game ball B received by the pseudo out opening 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When game ball B is circulating in the pseudo game area 2010, if the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, there is a high probability that the game ball B will come into contact with the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 and be accepted into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 at the rear. The game ball B accepted into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and detected by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. A predetermined performance can be executed by the detection of game ball B by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403.

As for the performance using the pseudo large prize opening 2402, when the second large prize opening 2007 is open according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn (for example, according to "big win", "small win", etc.), the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened by the peripheral control board 1510 for the performance. At that time, the peripheral control board 1510 can know the timing of the opening of the second large prize opening 2007, so the degree to which the pseudo large prize opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. By utilizing this property, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it can be suggested that a high probability state (so-called probability state) will be entered after the "big win". Conversely, when there are many misses at the pseudo large prize opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal probability state) will be entered after the "big win". Furthermore, the state of such missed opportunities can also suggest probability settings (usually six levels, from 1 to 6).

In this way, in this embodiment, even if game ball B is shot to the right of the center device 2500 under normal conditions, it can only be accepted by the second starting port 2005, which grants a special bonus, and there is no possibility that it will pass through the gate 2002 or be accepted by the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2004. Therefore, a shooting operation can be performed that causes game ball B to flow to the left side of the center device 2500.

In more detail, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the second starting port 2005 have a longer special variable time for informing the player of the lottery result of the special symbol than the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number for the lottery result of the second special symbol, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Also, even if a game ball B is received into the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B paid out is one. For this reason, under normal circumstances, even if game ball B is shot into the right side of the center device 2500, it can only be accepted by the second starting hole 2005, and even if it is accepted by the second starting hole 2005, only one game ball B is paid out as a bonus, making it easier for players to shoot game ball B into the left side of the center device 2500.

In addition, in this embodiment, when game ball B is accepted by the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007, a bonus of many game balls B is awarded. To enable game ball B to be accepted by the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007, it is necessary to have the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 accept game ball B, and to draw a first special pattern or a second special pattern that will enable them to be accepted.

For this reason, under normal circumstances, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2004. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of game ball B guided by multiple obstacle nails N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for game ball B being received by the first starting opening 2004.

When game ball B is accepted into first start opening 2004 and a "win" (for example, a "small win", "medium win", "big win", etc.) is selected as the lottery result for the first special pattern, first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes, allowing game ball B to be accepted into first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007. This allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B into the game ball, while also increasing the anticipation of game ball B being accepted into first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007.

Specifically, when the first large winning opening 2006 becomes available, a hitting operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center device 2500. On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2007 becomes available, a hitting operation ("right hit") can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center device 2500.

When ball B is shot into the right side of the center device 2500, a right guide passage group 2540 consisting of a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a guide area 2710 consisting of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 by a specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided on the right side of the center device 2500. Since the ball B is more likely to be received by the second sub-outlet 2022 depending on the guide passage through which it flows, the strength of the ball B can be adjusted so that the ball B flows through the desired guide passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the ball B.

In addition, the second large prize opening 2007 is more open in the left-right direction than the first large prize opening 2006, so that the player can recognize at a glance that the second large prize opening 2007 is capable of accepting more game balls B in a short period of time. As a result, when the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, the player can immediately change the shooting operation so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center device 2500, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second large prize opening 2007 and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when game ball B is received in the second large prize opening 2007, game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 in which a pseudo large prize opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second large prize opening 2007 is provided, thereby increasing the anticipation of game ball B being received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 143, 144, 155, etc. Fig. 155 is a front view of the rear unit in the game board. The rear unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the rear ball guide unit 3100.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a rear box rear unit 3030 which is detachably attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020, and a rear board unit 3040 which is located behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 that is provided near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper front performance unit 3300 that is provided at the top of the rear box 3010 and at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, a rear lower front performance unit 3400 that is provided at the bottom behind the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in the rear box 3010, a rear upper rear performance unit 3500 (see Figure 162, etc.) that is provided behind the rear upper front performance unit 3300 in the rear box 3010, and a rear lower rear performance unit 3600 that is provided behind the rear lower front performance unit 3400 in the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the rear box 3010, and can be used to attach other components such as a presentation unit (here, the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200) to the rear box 3010, to place the rear unit 3000 face down with the front side facing downward, or to place the rear unit 3000 face up with the rear side facing upward, etc.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 156 to 160. Fig. 156 is a front view of the rear box configuration of the rear unit. Fig. 157(a) is a perspective view of the rear box configuration of the rear unit as seen from the front, and Fig. 157(b) is a perspective view of the rear box configuration of the rear unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 158(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box configuration of Fig. 157 disassembled into main members as seen from the front, and Fig. 158(b) is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 157 as seen from the rear. Fig. 159(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit disassembled as seen from the front, and Fig. 159(b) is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 158 as seen from the rear. Fig. 160(a) is a side view showing the rear unit placed face down using the functional surface portion, and Fig. 160(b) is a side view showing the rear unit placed face up using the functional surface portion.

The rear unit 3000 includes a box-shaped rear box 3010 that opens forward, a rear box rear unit 3030 that is attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a rear board unit 3040 that is provided behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010. The rear box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The rear box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a mounting surface 3010b provided at the bottom of the opening 3010a on which the rear box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) is placed, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the top of the opening 3010a, and a locking mechanism 3010d provided below near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010b, to which a lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be able to slide left and right.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the left-right direction. The opening 3010a is also provided in a position that is offset (eccentric) upward from the center of the rear box 3010 in the up-down direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixed piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear box rear unit 3030 is inserted from below into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear box 3010. In addition, the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted from the rear into the lock mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010 with the lock slider 3020 slid to the left in rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the lock mechanism part 3010d, if the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 can prevent the lower fixed piece 1652 from moving backward.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting the rear ball guide unit 3100, etc.

Furthermore, the rear box 3010 is provided with a pair of pivot supports 3010f on the rear surface that can rotatably support the shaft 3041a of the rear substrate unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a locking portion 3010g that is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the pair of pivot supports 3010f and that locks the locking claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040.

The rear box rear unit 3030 is removably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 from the rear. The rear box rear unit 3030 is composed of a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a set plate 1650 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached on the front side and which is attached to the rear box 3010, and a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 and which houses the peripheral control board 1510.

The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a rectangular, flat plate shape with the same size as the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that protrude upward from the upper edge at a distance in the left-right direction, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from near the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing groove 3010c of the rear box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the locking mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010.

The set plate 1650 also has a frame-shaped LCD mounting section 1653 on the front side that is open toward the front. The LCD mounting section 1653 is formed to a size corresponding to the performance display device 1600, and the performance display device 1600 is fitted in and attached from the front. In this embodiment, when viewed from the front, the center of the LCD mounting section 1653 coincides with the center of the set plate 1650. The set plate 1650 is formed to be transparent. This allows the inside of the rear box 3010 to be viewed from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 is composed of a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167, etc.) having a peripheral control unit 1511 and a performance display control unit 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper edge of the peripheral control board box 1520 is positioned slightly lower than the upper edge of the set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, an area with a height of approximately 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650.

The rear board unit 3040 comprises a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and thin from front to back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed within the board box 3041. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a on the outer edge of the part extending up and down in the L shape that are rotatably supported by the shaft support part 3010f of the rear box 3010. The board box 3041 also has a locking claw 3041b at the tip of the part extending left and right in the L shape that locks into the locking part 3010g of the rear box 3010.

This rear board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010, straddling the opening 3010a (rear box rear unit 3030). When assembled to the game board 5, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends vertically is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends horizontally is located between the lower end at the rear of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

This rear board unit 3040 can be opened at the rear of the rear box rear unit 3030 by releasing the engagement between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b and rotating the locking claw 3041b rearward around the shaft portion 3041a, and the rear box rear unit 3030 can be detached from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to mount a 19-inch LCD display device is provided on the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a, while a 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the set plate 1650. This allows the performance display device 1600 to be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 when the performance display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, and when the performance display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, it can be attached to the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 via a set plate 1650 that corresponds to the size of the performance display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to mount a performance display device 1600 of a different size by simply changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the rear box 3010 as it is. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, the design of the back box 3010 is changed when the model is changed, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even when the model is changed, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is necessary to change the position of the performance display device 1600 due to design changes, etc., this can be easily accommodated by changing only the set plate 1650, thereby reducing the costs associated with design changes, etc.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but it is not limited to this, and may be colored, such as colored transparent or colored opaque. If the set plate 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is preferable to use an opaque color, including black. This can prevent the player from seeing inside the island equipment or seeing light from behind, which could lead to the pachinko machine 1 looking bad. In this case, by making the set plate 1650 black, even if the set plate 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is possible to make the set plate 1650 less noticeable, so that the performance display device 1600 and other decorations in the pachinko machine 1 can be made more noticeable, making it easier to fully demonstrate the performance effects they provide.

The rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 of this embodiment has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3011 is provided inside the outer periphery of the rear box 3010 and behind the fixing piece portion 3010e for attaching the rear box 3010 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The front side and rear side of the functional surface portion 3011 are formed on a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. The functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front. The functional surface portion 3011 has a plurality of functional hole portions 3012, each of which is a set of two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally. The two through holes of the functional hole portion 3012 have the same diameter.

The functional surface portion 3011 can abut a predetermined member on the front side or rear side. For example, as shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, a part of the rear surface of the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is abutted against the functional surface portion 3011. At this time, in the functional hole portion 3012 of the part where the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 abuts, a positioning pin (not shown) of the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is inserted into one through hole, and a mounting screw for mounting the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is screwed into the other through hole. For this reason, the functional surface portion 3011 and the functional hole portion 3012 can be used to attach other members such as a performance unit to the back box 3010. At this time, since multiple functional hole portions 3012 are provided, if the mounting position of other members is changed due to design changes or model changes, any of the functional hole portions 3012 can be used for mounting. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be reused, which helps prevent an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

The functional surface portion 3011 is also arranged so that its rear side faces backward (visible when viewed from the rear), and the rear-front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the functional surface portion 3011 from the rear of the rear box 3010 with a mounting screw through the functional hole portion 3012 that penetrates the functional surface portion 3011. Therefore, the head of the mounting screw for attaching the rear-front peripheral decorative unit 3200 to the rear box 3010 is not exposed on the front side of the rear unit 3000, which improves the appearance from the front and further enhances the decorative effect of the rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 can abut a specified member against its front or rear side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the upper end of an intermediate member 3016 protruding from a specified member 3015 such as a workbench or a mounting table may be abutted against the front side of the functional surface portion 3011. In this case, the intermediate member 3016 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the front of the rear unit 3000 (here, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200). As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if it is desired to place the rear unit 3000 on the specified member 3015 with the front side facing downwards (laying it face down), the rear unit 3000 can be placed on the specified member 3015 with the front side facing downwards and the upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the specified member 3015 abutting against the front surface of the functional surface portion 3011, with the front surface of the rear unit 3000 spaced upwards from the specified member 3015.

As a result, damage to the front surface of the rear unit 3000 caused by contact with the specified member 3015 can be prevented, the rear unit 3000 (rear front peripheral decorative body 3201) can be maintained in good condition, and the occurrence of defective products (faulty products) caused by damage to the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be prevented, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. The intermediate member 3016 may be a separate member that is separate from the specified member 3015.

In addition, as described above, the functional surface portion 3011 can prevent contact between the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear unit 3000 and the specified component 3015, so that with the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) holding the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 laid face down, installation and wiring work for other components such as the performance display device 1600 and rear board unit 3040 can be performed on the rear side of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, since the rear box 3010 is provided with a functional surface portion 3011, the rear box 3010 can be placed face down even when the performance unit is not being held, compared to when the functional surface portion 3011 is provided on a performance unit such as the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200. Therefore, the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) can be placed face down even during assembly, and can be adapted to various work conditions (work modes).

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 can abut a predetermined member on its front side or rear side, for example, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the upper end of an intermediate member 3017 protruding from a predetermined member 3015 such as a workbench or a placement table may be abutted against the rear side of the functional surface portion 3011. In this case, the intermediate member 3017 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, if it is desired to place the rear unit 3000 on the predetermined member 3015 with the rear side facing downward (upward), the rear unit 3000 can be placed on the predetermined member 3015 with the rear side facing downward by abutting the upper end of the intermediate member 3017 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 against the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011.

Therefore, by abutting the upper surface of the intermediate member 3017 against the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the rear unit 3000 can be placed upright on the specified member 3015 while avoiding contact of the specified member 3015 with the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. This allows the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) to be stabilized in an upright position during assembly, making it easier to perform assembly work from the front end side of the rear box 3010.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in a portion recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear box 3010, at least a portion of the periphery of the functional surface portion 3011 has a portion protruding forward or rearward (for example, the side wall of the rear box 3010), and this portion can restrict the relative movement of the functional surface portion 3011 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or intermediate member 3017 in the direction along the surface of the specified member 3015. This makes it possible to make the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) less likely to move when placed face down or face up via the functional surface portion 3011, making it easier to perform assembly work, etc.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided with a plurality of functional holes 3012, by providing a positioning pin on the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or intermediate member 3017 that can be inserted into the through-hole of the functional hole portion 3012, the positioning pin can restrict the movement of the rear unit 3000 (rear box 3010) placed face down or up via the functional surface portion 3011 in a direction along the surface of the specified member 3015, thereby achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is arranged to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front, when the rear unit 3000 is placed face down or face up on a specified member 3015 such as a workbench or a stand via the intermediate member 3016 or intermediate member 307, the rear unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state, and it is possible to prevent the rear unit 3000 from tilting and the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, etc., from coming into contact with the specified member 3015.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is located behind the front surface of the rear box 3010, when the rear box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), the functional surface portion 3011 does not come into contact with the gaming panel 1100, and the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 without any problems.

In the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3011 is shown as a flat surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but is not limited thereto. For example, the functional surface portion may be a "curved surface portion recessed backward in a conical or frustum shape", a "multi-sided portion recessed backward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", a "curved surface portion protruding forward in a conical or frustum shape", a "multi-sided portion protruding forward in a polygonal pyramid or frustum shape", etc. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or multi-sided portion as described above, it is desirable to give the upper end surface of the intermediate member a shape that imitates the functional surface portion. This makes it possible to restrict the relative movement between the functional surface portion (rear box 3010) and the intermediate member in a direction along the surface of the specified member 3015.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the rear box 3010, but this is not limited to this, and the functional surface portion may be provided on a presentation unit attached to the rear box 3010 or on a ball guide member that guides the game ball B. For example, the end surface of the drive motor or solenoid of the presentation unit, the tip surface of the ball guide member, etc. may be the functional surface portion.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 143 etc. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010. The back ball guiding unit 3100 has a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see Fig. 167 etc.).

The back ball guide unit 3100 has a discharge passage that receives the game ball B that has been received by the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first large winning port 2006, the second large winning port 2007, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides it to near the center in the left-right direction of the lower end, and then discharges it downward.

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end inside the rear box 3010. The rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 includes a rear front peripheral decoration body 3201 formed in a ring shape along the periphery of the play area 5a when assembled to the play board 5, and a rear front peripheral decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to light up and decorate the rear front peripheral decoration body 3201.

The rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape that resembles a sumo ring. The rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is formed to be translucent, and can be illuminated with light from an LED mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board. The front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 protrudes forward beyond the front end of the rear box 3010.

This back-front peripheral decoration unit 3200 allows the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 to decorate the periphery of the play area 5a in a ring shape, improving the appearance of the play area 5a. In addition, by making the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 luminous, the periphery of the play area 5a can be luminous in a ring shape, strongly drawing the player's attention to the play area 5a.

In addition, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is divided into multiple parts in the circumferential direction, and each part can be individually illuminated and decorated using multiple LEDs on the rear front peripheral decorative board, allowing the player to see an illumination effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 protrudes forward from the front end of the rear box 3010, and when assembled to the game board 5, the front end side is located in a space partitioned by the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 and the through hole 1121 of the panel holder 1120. As a result, the front-to-rear position of the front surface (decoration) of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is as close as possible to the front-to-rear position of the game area 5a, so that when the focus is on the game area 5a, the focus is also on the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, and the decoration of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be clearly seen while viewing the game area 5a, and the decoration of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be reliably shown to the player. Therefore, the back-front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be made to stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention, and the decorative effect of the back-front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9d. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back upper front performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The back upper front performance unit 3300 is provided at approximately the same position as the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in the front-to-back direction at the top of the back box 3010. The back upper front performance unit 3300 includes a back upper front decorative body 3310 that is rectangular and long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back upper front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3310 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The upper back front decorative body 3310 is arranged so that sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are lined up from the left, and each ranking can be illuminated independently by the LEDs on the upper back front decorative board. The upper back front decorative body 3310 is formed to a length that crosses the front of the performance display device 1600 in the left-right direction.

The back-upper front decorative body 3310 is attached so that it can be raised and lowered, and can be raised and lowered by the back-upper front lifting unit. The back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of approximately the same height as the height of the back-upper front decorative body 3310. In the normal state, this back-upper front decorative body 3310 is in a raised position where it has moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled to the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and is located at the top of the game area 5a. Most of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500, and the remaining part can be seen through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

This back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from its normal raised position to its lowered position by the back-upper front lifting unit. When in the lowered position, the vertical center of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center gimmick 2500 (see Figure 166). When in the lowered position, almost the entire back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

According to this back-upper front performance unit 3300, the numbers on the back-upper front decoration 3310 can be illuminated and decorated independently, so for example, it is possible to perform an illumination performance in which after all the numbers have been illuminated and changed, only one number is illuminated and the change stops. In this way, when a high-ranking number is illuminated and decorated, the player can be made to think that their chance has arrived, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can also indicate to the player the likelihood of a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) occurring that gives the player an advantage, based on the ranking of the illuminated and decorated rankings. As a result, when the illuminated and decorated changing number of numbers on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 starts, the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether the change will stop at the desired ranking, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back-upper front lifting unit, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves toward the center of the game area 5a and blocks the upper part of the front of the performance display device 1600, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and the player can focus on the back-upper front decorative body 3310. This ensures that the light-emitting performance using the back-upper front decorative body 3310 as described above can be shown to the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, when the light-emitting performance as described above is performed in the lowered position rather than in the raised position, it is possible to enhance the sense of premium for the player, and therefore to further increase the reliability of the indication of the degree of expectation by the light-emitting performance, thereby increasing the expectation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9e. Backstage front performance unit]
Next, the back lower front performance unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The back lower front performance unit 3400 is provided at the bottom inside the back box 3010, rearward of the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200. The back lower front performance unit 3400 includes a back lower front decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, a back lower front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the lower back front decorative board. The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be raised and lowered between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back front lifting unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed to a length that crosses the front of the performance display device 1600 in the left-right direction.

The lower front decorative body 3410 has a base decorative body 3411 that is long from side to side, a central decorative body 3412 that is located in the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the left-right direction, and a front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 that are located in front of the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the left-right direction so that they can cover the central decorative body 3412 from the front (see Figure 163, etc.).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that resembles a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 is circular when viewed from the front, and the characters "Osaka" (sake cup) are formed in relief. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction from the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so that they are in contact with each other, and are provided so that they can move away from each other in the left and right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are each translucent. The front left decorative body 3413 has the character "heaven" formed in relief. The front right decorative body 3414 has the character "rising" formed in relief.

In the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in a closed position close to each other, hiding the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear from being visible from the front. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to an open position in which they are separated from each other in the left and right directions. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear can be seen from the front through the gap between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the back-lower front performance unit 3400, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located in the lowered position. Also, in the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is not visible from the front. When assembled to the game board 5, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state has its center in the vertical direction located at a height slightly higher than the side left upper unit 2300, its lower end located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the center role 2500, and its upper end located at a height slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511. A part of the back-lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state is visible through the frame of the center role 2500, and the remainder is visible through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

The back-lower front decorative body 3410 can be moved from a lowered position to an elevated position by the back-lower front lifting unit. When the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is in the elevated position, its upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the back-upper front decorative body 3310 in the elevated position (see FIG. 161). In other words, when in the elevated position, the center in the vertical direction of the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located at approximately the same height as the first large winning opening 2006. In addition, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 can move the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the elevated position.

With this back-lower front performance unit 3400, when the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is moved upward from its lowered position, it moves toward the center of the game area 5a and blocks part of the performance display device 1600, strongly attracting the player's attention and drawing their attention to the back-lower front decorative body 3410.

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear becomes visible (appears), and the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 makes the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the back-lower front decorative body 3410 allows the central decorative body 3412 to rotate around a front-to-rear axis, when the front-left decorative body 3413 and the front-right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position to reveal the central decorative body 3412, rotating the central decorative body 3412 gives the player a strong feeling that something good must be about to happen, further increasing the player's sense of expectation and preventing a decline in interest. Also, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visible, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates, entertaining the player.

In addition, the back-lower-front performance unit 3400 can show the player a variety of moving performances by appropriately combining the raising and lowering of the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 as described above, the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 by the movement of the front-left decorative body 3413 and the front-right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412, thereby making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable performance of the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 as described above, the back-lower-front performance unit 3400 also allows for light-emitting performance using multiple LEDs on the back-lower-front decorative board, allowing players to see a wider variety of performances, entertaining them and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9f. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back upper rear performance unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back upper rear performance unit 3500 is provided at the top of the back box 3010, behind the back upper front performance unit 3300. The back upper rear performance unit 3500 includes a back upper rear decorative body 3510 (see FIG. 162, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, a back upper rear decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rear lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper rear decorative body 3510.

The upper back decorative body 3510 is translucent and can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the upper back decorative board. The upper back decorative body 3510 is arranged so that it can be raised and lowered between the highest raised position and the lowest lowered position by the upper back lifting unit. Furthermore, the upper back decorative body 3510 is arranged behind the lower back decorative body 3410.

The upper back decorative body 3510 is formed in a shape that resembles the upper half of a championship cup, with the character "Yu" (Excellent) formed in relief in the center from left to right. The upper back decorative body 3510 can form one large championship cup by abutting the lower back decorative body 3610 at its lower end (see Figure 164, etc.). The upper back decorative body 3510 is approximately the same height as the upper back decorative body 3310.

In the normal state of the rear upper performance unit 3500, the rear upper decorative body 3510 is located in the raised position. In this state, the rear upper decorative body 3510 is located behind the rear upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position, and cannot be seen from the front.

When the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back-upper rear lifting unit, the lower end of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is located at approximately the center height in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. When the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the performance display device 1600. In this state, if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 or the back-down front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

According to the back-upper rear performance unit 3500, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be raised and lowered to appear visible from the front, so the appearance of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can surprise the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be abutted against the back-down rear decorative body 3610 to form one large decoration, making a strong impact on the player and making the player believe that their chance has arrived, preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9g. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back-down rear performance unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-down rear performance unit 3600 is provided behind the back-down front performance unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back-down rear performance unit 3600 includes a back-down rear decorative body 3610 (see FIG. 162, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, a back-down rear decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back-down rear decorative body 3610 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-down rear lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-down rear decorative body 3610.

The rear decorative body 3610 is translucent and can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board. The rear decorative body 3610 can be raised and lowered between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the rear lifting unit.

The lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape that resembles the lower half of a championship cup, with the character "prize" formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large championship cup by abutting the upper back decorative body 3510 at its upper end (see Figure 164, etc.). The lower back decorative body 3610 is approximately the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the normal state of the rear-down performance unit 3600, the rear-down decorative body 3610 is located in the lowered position. In this state, the rear-down decorative body 3610 is located behind the front-down decorative body 3410 in the lowered position, and cannot be seen from the front.

When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back-down rear lifting unit, the back-down rear performance unit 3600 is located at a height where the upper end of the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is approximately in contact with the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 in the raised position. When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the performance display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decorative body 3310 or the back-down front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back-down rear decorative body 3610, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be seen through the frame of the center role piece 2500.

According to the back-down rear performance unit 3600, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be raised and lowered to appear visible from the front, so the appearance of the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can surprise the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be abutted against the back-up rear decorative body 3510 to form one large decoration, making a strong impact on the player and making the player believe that their chance has arrived, preventing a decline in interest.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 161 to 166. Figure 161 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the back unit and the back-down rear decoration of the back-down rear performance unit in the back unit are moving to the raised position. Figure 162 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear performance unit has moved to the top of the back-down front decoration, and the back-down rear decoration of the back-down rear performance unit has moved to the bottom of the back-down front decoration. Figure 163 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration of the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the state of Figure 162 have moved to the open position and the central decoration has appeared.

Also, FIG. 164 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position, and the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and is in contact with the back-upper rear decorative body. FIG. 165 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front-left decorative body and the front-right decorative body of the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit have moved to an open position, and the central decorative body has appeared, in the state of FIG. 164. FIG. 166 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-upper front decorative body of the back-upper front performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position, and the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved to the rear of the back-upper front decorative body, and the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit has risen and moved to the lower side of the back-upper front decorative body, and the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and is in contact with the back-upper rear decorative body behind the back-down front decorative body.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center role 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed almost entirely transparent, so that in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 142, the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 of the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100, the rear upper front decoration 3310 of the rear upper front performance unit 3300, and the rear lower front decoration 3410 of the rear lower front performance unit 3400 can be clearly seen through them, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center role 2500.

In more detail, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is arranged in a ring shape along the periphery of the play area 5a, and can be seen through the transparent play panel 1100 and the center role 2500. The rear upper front decorative body 3310 of the rear upper front performance unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the performance display device 1600, at an elevated position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and most of it can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500, while the remaining part can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 of the lower back front performance unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the bottom end of the performance display device 1600, with the center in the vertical direction being slightly higher than the upper left side unit 2300, and a portion of it can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500, while the remainder can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center gimmick 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center gimmick 2500. The performance display device 1600 can be seen well within the frame of the center gimmick 2500 through the square area between the upper back front decorative body 3310 and the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 of the back-upper rear performance unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and cannot be seen from the front. Also, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 of the back-down rear performance unit 3600 is located behind the back-down front decorative body 3410 and cannot be seen from the front.

Depending on the results of the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received in first start opening 2004 or second start opening 2005, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, back upper front performance unit 3300, back lower front performance unit 3400, back upper rear performance unit 3500, and back lower rear performance unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 perform a predetermined moving performance or light-emitting performance. In addition, the game board 5 performs a performance using game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable performances as shown in Figures 161 to 157. First, as shown in Figure 161, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 of the back-lower front performance unit 3400 and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back-lower rear performance unit 3600 are moved together to their respective raised positions. This causes the back-lower front decorative body 3410, which crosses the performance display device 1600, to move upwards, cutting across the performance display device 1600, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the back-lower front decorative body 3410, making the player think that something good is going to happen.

Incidentally, in FIG. 161, when only the back-down front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. However, since this back-down rear decorative body 3610 is formed to be paired with the back-up rear decorative body 3510, if only the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is visible, it may look incomplete and unnatural, which may deteriorate the appearance of the play area 5a. Also, when the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is visible, its incomplete shape may cause some players to think that it is to be combined with other decorative bodies, and when a joint movable performance with the back-up rear decorative body 3510 described below is performed, the impact on the player may be reduced, and a sufficient performance effect may not be obtained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back-down front decorative body 3410, so that the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can remain hidden, preventing the appearance of the play area 5a from being poor and making it difficult to notice the presence of the back-down rear decorative body 3610, allowing the full effect of the joint movable presentation with the back-up rear decorative body 3510 described below to be fully realized.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 161, as shown in FIG. 162, the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the play area. At this time, for the same reason as above, the back-bottom front decorative body 3610 is moved together with the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 so that the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is positioned forward. In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to a position between the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and the back-bottom front decorative body 3410, and the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved below the back-down front decorative body 3410.

As a result, the front of the performance display device 1600 is almost completely covered by the back-upper rear decorative body 3510, the back-lower front decorative body 3410, and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which creates a strong impact on the player and makes them feel that something good is going to happen. In this state, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which together form one decoration (here, a championship cup), are vertically separated from each other, but because the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located between them, the player is given the illusion that the middle of the championship cup, which is long vertically, is hidden by the back-lower front decorative body 3410, which helps to avoid an unsightly appearance.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from a closed position close to each other to an open position farther apart from each other, causing the central decorative body 3412 to visibly appear between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414. As a result, the new appearance of the central decorative body 3412 on the back lower front decorative body 3410 strongly makes the player think that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, increasing anticipation for the favorable gaming state and suppressing a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be moved gradually or may be opened and closed repeatedly. This keeps the player on edge and entertained as they wait for the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 to open and reveal the central decorative body 3412.

In the state shown in FIG. 163, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. In this way, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 162, and then, as shown in FIG. 164, the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are each moved to the center in the vertical direction so that they abut (combine) with each other. As a result, a large championship cup appears in the center of the play area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that a favorable play state (for example, a "jackpot" play state) that gives the player an advantage will occur, and the player's expectations for the favorable play state are heightened, preventing a decline in interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 164, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the underside front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position as shown in FIG. 165. This makes it possible to strongly convince the player that a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. This allows the player to recognize that the occurrence of a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage has been confirmed, increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the first action is to move the back-upper front decorative body 3410 (back-down rear decorative body 3610) to the raised position, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 may be moved to the lower position, and the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 may be moved to the rear of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 together with the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and the back-down front decorative body 3410 may be moved to the lower side of the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and the back-down rear decorative body 3610 may be moved to the rear of the back-down front decorative body 3410 together with the back-down front decorative body 3410. Alternatively, the back-down front decorative body 3410 may be moved to the center of the play area 5a together with the back-down rear decorative body 3610. These actions can also produce the same effects as those described above.

In this way, on the game board 5 of this embodiment, the series of effects as described above are executed according to the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005, respectively, and can be entertaining for the player. Also, the series of effects progresses to the end or ends midway depending on the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol drawn, and by showing it in multiple stages, it is less likely that the player will tire of it.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the movable effects described above can be appropriately combined with light-emitting effects, and can also be combined with effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a variety of patterns of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned moving effects are executed in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005, but this is not limited to this, and they may be executed in response to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403. This allows the player to enjoy the moving effects even during a favorable game state (for example, a "big win" game state) that gives the player an advantage, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 and the like. FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the display of performance images on the performance display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and displaying errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code that is assigned a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2401 detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2005, a general prize port sensor 3001 detects a game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, a gate sensor 2601 detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, and a game ball B received in the first large prize port 2006. Detection signals from the first large prize opening sensor 2525, the second large prize opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc., are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start opening sensor 3002, and the second start opening sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310, without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the second large winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting the respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first large winning port solenoid 2524, and the second large winning port solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, i.e. indirectly, or outputting the respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal reserve indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special reserve number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special reserve number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, i.e. without going through other boards. Also, based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below is started.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the second large winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2601 also frequently detect the game ball B. For this reason, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the first large winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters the hole frequently, so the first large winning hole sensor 2525 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first large winning hole sensor 2525. In addition, since the game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the out hole 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general winning hole 2001, into which the game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispense control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and also controls ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a push operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and initiates the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing in the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of the launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145, triggered by the input of the ball delivery reference pulse, to receive one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launch device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current, triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 167, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, although detailed illustration is omitted, is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM which stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC which produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM which stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5. The door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, and the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a variety of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data that draws the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When the performance display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Game Contents]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 144 to 146. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the ball can be shot, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center role 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center role 2500 as viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500. Near the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532, there is a first large prize opening 2006 that is normally closed by the first large prize opening door 2523 to prevent it from being accepted, and the game ball B that enters the left second guide passage 2532 rolls and flows down on the first large prize opening door 2523.

The game ball B that has flowed through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and after hitting a number of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, there is a certain probability that the ball will pass through the gate 2002.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is held on main control board 1310, and if the lottery result for the normal symbol drawn is a "normal win," variable winning port 2003, which is closed by variable winning port door 2521, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be accepted into variable winning port 2003.

In this embodiment, the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in a position close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500, so there is a higher probability that the ball will be accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 if it is circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 rather than the left first guide passage 2531. Then, when a game ball B is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (e.g., 1 to 5 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when game ball B passes through gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal variable time). This indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning port 2003 opens after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2002 between the time when game ball B passes through gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result for the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern is reserved until the previous suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern has ended. Also, the number of reserved lottery results for the normal pattern is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

At the location of this gate 2002, game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the outer left side of gate 2002, or the outer right side of gate 2002. Game ball B that flows down below gate 2002 enters warp entrance 2511 that opens into the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500. In this embodiment, due to multiple obstacle nails N planted in the area between gate 2002 and windmill W, game ball B that passes through the outer right side of gate 2002 enters warp entrance 2511 with a high probability.

Then, game ball B that enters the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to stage 2513 from warp exit 2512. Game ball B supplied to stage 2513 rolls back and forth on stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into game area 5a from central release section 2513a in the center of stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by first starting opening 2004, since central release section 2513a is located directly above first starting opening 2004.

When a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a first special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (probability change) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is advantageous is generated. The result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called the special change time).

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the first starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each first starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center device 2500, it passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 of the center device 2500, and is released into the space forming part 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center role 2500 is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance opens near the impact stopper 1006, and a right second guide passage 2542 whose entrance opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. As a result, if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the right first guide passage 2541, and if the game ball B is hit with enough strength not to hit the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker strength than right hit), it will enter the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center role 2500 will flow through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has flowed through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

The game ball B released into the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering left and right along the guidance area 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the induction area 2710, and if it deviates from the second induction area 2712 to the right, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 located below. If the game ball B is accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021, it is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 located downstream.

In this embodiment, the ball is configured to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 with a higher probability if it is circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 rather than the right first guide passage 2541. This allows the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the right first guide passage 2541 during a "right hit". In other words, during a "right hit", the player is prompted to perform an operation to rotate the handle 195 greatly so that the game ball B is shot with enough strength to abut against the impact stopper 1006, making it easier to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy shooting operation.

The game ball B that flows through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 and enters the second attacca portion 2560. In a normal state, the second large prize winning port 2007 provided in the second attacca portion 2560 is closed by the second large prize winning port door 2562 so that it cannot accept the game ball B, so the game ball B that passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large prize winning port door 2562, rolls to the left on the second large prize winning port door 2562 (attacca passage 2564), and is then released downward from the second attacca portion 2560 through the right release passage 2565.

The second starting port 2005 is provided below the right release passage 2565, and the second sub-outlet 2022 is provided to the right of the second starting port 2005, and the inclined wall portion 2418 of the right lower unit 2400 is provided to the left of the second starting port 2005. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the outlet of the right release passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-outlet 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received by the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received by the second sub-outlet 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and is not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418, rolls diagonally downward and to the left along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418, and is released to the left at a position below the first starting port 2004 and is received by the outlet port 1008.

In other words, under normal conditions, when game ball B is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit"), only the second starting port 2005 has the opportunity to receive game ball B. This allows the player to actively perform a shooting operation that causes game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center device 2500 under normal conditions, and also gives a sense of premium to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit").

When the game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 is received by the second starting hole 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a second special pattern (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the drawn second special pattern is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the lottery for the selected second special symbol is then suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time) that is longer than the special fluctuation time of the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the second starting port 2005 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previously drawn second special symbol is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the second special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each second starting port 2005, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005 is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004. As a result, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number of the lottery result of the second special pattern, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special pattern executed by the second starting hole 2005 is smaller. Therefore, even if the game ball B is shot into the right side of the center role 2500 in a normal state, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency of the lottery result of the second special pattern being executed is low, so that the player can be actively made to perform a shooting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500.

As described above, depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received by first starting opening 2004 or second starting opening 2005, first large winning opening 2006 or second large winning opening 2007 opens or closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, making it possible to receive game ball B.

When the first large winning opening 2006 is ready to receive, the first large winning opening 2006 is located in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center device 2500, so the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows through the left second guide passage 2532. When the first large winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first large winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2007 is available, since the second large winning opening 2007 is located below the right side of the center device 2500, the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows along the right side of the center device 2500. When the second large winning opening 2007 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the attack passage 2564 of the second attack section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attack right wall section 2567 is received by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this way, when the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting game ball B, it is possible to have a large number of game balls B paid out by having the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 accept the game ball B, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is, for example, a "small win", the second large winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, a small win rush). At this time, even if you try to shoot the game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second large winning opening 2007 opens and can receive the game ball B, it is difficult to find the right timing to shoot the game ball B because a specific obstacle nail group 2700 that can delay the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second large winning opening 2007. This imparts a level of difficulty to the operation of shooting the game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding to play and entertains the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second large winning opening 2007 to receive game ball B, thereby suppressing an increase in the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, if the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened to receive the game ball B, if either a predetermined time (e.g., 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the second large winning opening 2007, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that closes the opening to receive the game ball B is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R jackpot", this is repeated two rounds, if there is a "5R jackpot", five rounds, if there is a "15R jackpot", 15 rounds, respectively, creating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "wins" that change the probability of drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the "jackpot" ("probability win"), or change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the result of the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol (for example, the result of the drawing for the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot," the first big prize winning slot 2006 or the second big prize winning slot 2007 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (Special Time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of a special chance or time reduction for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations.

In this embodiment, below the second large prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 can circulate. The game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and then enters the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that enters the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, for example, when the second large prize opening 2007 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern due to a "jackpot" or the like as described above. This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second large prize opening 2007, so that many of the game balls B received by the second large prize opening 2007 are received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which keeps the player from getting bored during "jackpot" play and keeps the player entertained, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the lottery results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the lottery results for the special symbols (the lottery results for the first special symbol and the lottery results for the second special symbol). The lottery results for the special symbols are suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the combination of lit LEDs suggests the lottery results for the special symbols.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, stops the displayed picture rows in sequence, and stops and displays each of the three picture rows so that the pictures of the stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "miss", after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is generated.

The time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special change time)) is different from the time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image suggesting the result of the lottery for the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol drawn. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, rear upper front performance unit 3300, rear lower front performance unit 3400, rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and rear lower rear performance unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting performances and display performances, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various performances and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

[8. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 168 to 173. Fig. 168 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate. Fig. 169(a) is a perspective view of the center role in the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from the front, and Fig. 169(b) is a perspective view of the center role in the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from the back. Fig. 170(a) is an exploded perspective view of the right half of the center role in Fig. 169, in which the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit are disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 170(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 171(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center role in Fig. 169, and Fig. 171(b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. Fig. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the sous line in Fig. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the se line in Fig. 171, (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the so-so line in Fig. 171, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the ta-ta line in Fig. 171. Fig. 173(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit in Fig. 171 as seen from the right front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit in Fig. 171 as seen from the left front.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and part of the front unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment has three normal winning holes 2001. Also, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting hole 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is the normal winning hole 2008, and the variable winning hole 2003 of the game board 5 is the second starting hole 2005 that opens and closes depending on the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2008. Furthermore, in the game board 5A, instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided.

Due to the above differences, in the second embodiment of the game board 5A, the variable winning hole sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with a second starting hole sensor, and the second starting hole sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced with a normal winning hole sensor.

The center device 2500 of the game board 5A has a ball guiding unit 2580 that is provided in the space forming section 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker section 2560 and can guide the game ball B that has flowed through the right guide passage group 2540, and a flat center right front panel 2590 that extends vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker section 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580.

The space forming portion 2550 of the center device 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 that penetrates in the shape of a long rectangle in the vertical direction in the flange portion 2502 that extends to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b that are provided below the opening 2553 and through which the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 2580 flows.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape, extending downward from an entrance, then to the right, and then downward again. The lower right second passage 2550b is provided to the right of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front panel 2590. When assembled to the game board 5A, the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located approximately in the vertical center of the game area 5a.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560, exposing the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a number of obstacle nails N are planted in the corresponding portions of the panel plate 1110.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward directly above the first sub-outlet 2021. This makes it more likely that a game ball B released downward from the lower right second passage 2550b will be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 than that from the lower right first passage 2550a. Since game balls B that have passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flow through this lower right second passage 2550b, in order to reduce the probability of game ball B being accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021, the player can be made to actively perform a shooting operation to enter the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when "hitting to the right," hitting the ball harder makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541, which is closer to the impact stopper 1006, so there is no need to make delicate adjustments when hitting the game ball B, making it easier to perform the hitting operation.

[8-1. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 guides the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 separately in a state where it can be seen from the front. The ball guiding unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a that guides the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541, and a second guide passage 2580b that guides the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. The second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging it in the left-right and front-back directions in a state where it can be seen.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an entrance that opens toward the front near the upper end, and an exit that opens diagonally downward toward the front at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance that opens toward the front at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and an exit that opens diagonally downward toward the front at the lower end.

The ball guiding unit 2580 is composed of a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, a right passage member 2582 attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and provided with a second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guiding unit 2580 is formed to be transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat side wall portion 2581a extending front-to-rear and up-down, and a plurality of inclined portions 2581b that protrude to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, are inclined so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower, and are provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals in the up-down direction to allow the game ball B to flow, and are provided so that the lower sides are alternately different between the top and bottom. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-to-rear direction beyond the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, at an interval allowing the game ball B to flow.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 has a vertical wall portion 2581c extending upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b, further upward than the upper inclined portion 2581b, and a top wall portion 2581d extending upward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2581c.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the upper inclined portion 2581b of the inclined portion 2581b from which the standing wall portion 2581c stands. The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction up to near the lower surface of the further upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming a gap between the top wall portion 2581d and the further upper inclined portion 2581b.

Furthermore, the left passage member 2581 has a plurality of first protrusions 2581e protruding to the right from the portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b in the side wall portion 2581a, and a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b and the vertical wall portion 2581c in the side wall portion 2581a. The first protrusions 2581e are provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-to-rear direction, and are formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b and in a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The first protrusions 2581f extend vertically, with the lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so that it is lower to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is located further rearward than the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. In addition, the lowermost top wall portion 2581d does not extend beyond the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 has a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and multiple first protrusions 2582b that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. When assembled into the ball guide unit 2580, the multiple first protrusions 2582b are provided in pairs in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581, with the first protrusion 2581e between them. The upstream side of the first protrusion 2582b protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first protrusion 2581e protrudes to the left in a trapezoid shape with the upstream end side inclined and extending downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2581c.

The right passage member 2582 also has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c that protrude to the right from the surface of the side wall portion 2582a facing right, are inclined so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower, and are spaced apart in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are spaced apart in the vertical direction to allow the game ball B to flow through, and are spaced apart so that the lower sides alternate between the top and bottom. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are also spaced apart so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-to-rear direction beyond the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, at a distance allowing the game ball B to flow through.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 has a vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c, further upward than the upper inclined portion 2582c, and a ceiling wall portion 2582e extending upward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d.
Top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to upper inclined portion 2582c of inclined portion 2582c from which upright wall portion 2582d stands. Top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction up to near the lower surface of inclined portion 2582c further above upper inclined portion 2582c, forming a gap between top wall portion 2582e and inclined portion 2582c further above upper inclined portion 2582c.

The right passage member 2582 further has a plurality of second protrusions 2582f protruding to the right from the portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c in the side wall portion 2582a, and a plurality of second projections 2582g protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c and the vertical wall portion 2582d in the side wall portion 2581a. The second projections 2582g are provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2582c in the front-to-rear direction, and are formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c and in a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The second projections 2582g extend vertically, with the lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that its rear end is lower, and its front end forms the lower side of the entrance to the second guide passage 2580b. The lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that its front end is lower and is located further rearward than the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. The lowermost top wall portion 2582e does not extend beyond the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 has a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and multiple second protrusions 2583b that protrude to the left from the surface facing left of the side wall portion 2583a. When assembled to the ball guide unit 2580, the multiple second protrusions 2583b are provided in pairs in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, with the second protrusion 2582f between them. The upstream side of the second protrusion 2582f of the second protrusion 2583b protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the second protrusion 2582f protrudes to the left in a trapezoid shape with the upstream end side inclined and extending downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2582d.

In the ball guiding unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, it rolls backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. Above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right, in front of and behind the first protrusion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the first protrusion 2582b, then guided rightward by the next first protrusion 2581e, and further guided leftward again by the next first protrusion 2582b, and rolls while snaking (swinging) left and right to the rear end (bottom end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, the game ball B flows down from the bottom end of the inclined portion 2581b along the vertical wall portion 2581c onto the lower inclined portion 2581b. At this time, the game ball B, which has been guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, is guided to the right by the first protruding piece portion 2581f protruding to the right, and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. This prevents the game ball B from flowing vertically down from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that flows down the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Above this inclined portion 2581b, the first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right, one behind the first protrusion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear first protruding piece 2581f is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e, and further guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b, rolling while snaking (swaying) left and right to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. Then, as it flows downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first protruding piece 2581f on the front side and flows further down onto the lower inclined portion 2581b, and the above-mentioned movement of the game ball B is repeated until it reaches the exit of the first guide passage 2580a.

In addition, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it rolls backward due to the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. In this second guide passage 2580b, as in the first guide passage 2580a, the game ball B flows down while swaying left and right and front and rear. In more detail, above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, a second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closure plate 2583 protrude from the right, in front and behind the second protrusion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and then guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b, rolling while snaking (swaying) left and right to the rear end (bottom end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, the game ball B flows down from the bottom end of the inclined portion 2582c along the vertical wall portion 2582d onto the lower inclined portion 2582c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the previous second protrusion portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g protruding to the right, and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically down from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that flows down the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Above this inclined portion 2582c, the second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right, one behind the second protrusion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear second protrusion 2582g is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and further guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b, rolling while snaking (swinging) left and right to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. Then, as it flows downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second protruding piece 2582g on the front side and flows further down onto the lower inclined portion 2582c, and the above-described movement of the game ball B is repeated until it reaches the exit of the second guide passage 2580b.

In this way, according to the ball guidance unit 2580 of this embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 can be made to flow down while swaying (snaking) left and right and front and back, and then released downward, so that the residence time (flow time) of the game ball B at the same height can be made longer compared to when the game ball B is made to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage. This makes the circulation speed of the game ball B relatively slow, making it easier for the player to see the game ball B, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, with the ball guiding unit 2580, the game ball B is caused to flow down while swaying (snaking) left and right and forward and backward, which causes the game ball B to move in a more complex manner than if it were flowing down a spiral passage. This allows the player to be entertained by movements of the game ball B that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and helps to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the left side of the ball guiding unit 2580 faces the inside of the frame of the center device 2500, by looking through the inside of the frame of the center device 2500, it is possible to clearly see the game ball B circulating in a zigzag motion in the back and forth direction in the ball guiding unit 2580, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that the same effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be achieved. In detail, for example, depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 (for example, the lottery of "small win"), the second large winning hole 2007 of the second attacker section 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, small win rush), and the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second large winning hole 2007 at the timing when the second large winning hole 2007 becomes available for reception. In this case, even if you try to shoot game ball B at that timing, it is difficult to time it so that you can shoot game ball B because a ball guide unit 2580 capable of slowing down the flow speed of game ball B is provided upstream of the second large winning opening 2007. This makes it possible to impart a degree of difficulty to the operation of shooting game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding for the player and makes it fun for the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, a gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d, and between the inclined portion 2582c and the top wall portion 2582e, so that when a ball becomes clogged inside the first guiding passage 2580a or the second guiding passage 2580b, the ball can be removed by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form a first guide passage 2580a and a second guide passage 2580b that guide the game ball B. Therefore, compared to a case in which a passage is formed using multiple obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (the obstacle nails N are deformed) by the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided in a stable state.

[8-2. Center right front panel]
The center right front panel 2590 of the game board 5A is formed in a transparent flat plate shape, and is attached to the right outer front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 so as to cover the front between the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560. The center right front panel 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower part, a number of first storage sections 2590a that penetrate from front to back and each of which accommodates the heads of a number of obstacle nails N, a second storage section 2590b that penetrates from front to back and accommodates the head of one obstacle nail N, and a peeling hole 2590c that penetrates from front to back.

The first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b store the heads of multiple obstacle nails N that are planted in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the front of which is exposed, between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560.

The first storage section 2590a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that surrounds and contacts the heads of the multiple (not shown, but in this embodiment, two or three) obstructing nails N that it contains, forming a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line. As a result, the center of the first storage section 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstructing nail N. The second storage section 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. These first storage section 2590a and second storage section 2590b are provided in positions that correspond to the obstructing nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560.

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N stored in the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b, thereby preventing the obstacle nails N from being deformed (bent) due to impacts caused by the flow (contact) of the game balls B or some other external impact, reducing the unintended flow of the game balls B and allowing the game balls B to circulate in a stable state, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b of the center right front panel 2590 can suppress deformation of the obstructing nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for the amusement hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed to maintain the obstructing nails N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in the mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center role 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is to be attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, this peeling hole 2590c can be used to insert a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker attached, and press the sticker forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, thereby causing a part of the sticker to roll up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the sticker can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by the worker pulling the rolled-up part of the sticker. This improves the workability of re-attaching stickers during manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss, so even if someone tries to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear of the gaming panel 1100 or the area where the gaming balls B are distributed, when it is assembled to the gaming board 5, the rear is closed by the mounting screw, making it possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted and thus preventing illegal acts.

If a sticker is attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, the sticker can make the peeling hole 2590c less visible from the front, preventing the peeling hole 2590c from making the game look unsightly. It also makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, making it more difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2590c.

In addition, if a sticker is attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, when assembled to the game board 5, the front side of the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b can be closed by the sticker attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, so that the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2590a or the second storage section 2590b cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if a sticker is attached, if an obstacle nail N whose head is stored in the first storage section 2590a or the second storage section 2590b is bent through the sticker, a trace of the bending will remain on the sticker, making it easier to notice a defect in the obstacle nail N.

[9. Third embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 174 to 177. Fig. 174 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. Fig. 175(a) is a perspective view of the game board of Fig. 174 in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration board are assembled, as seen from the front, and Fig. 175(b) is a perspective view of the game board of Fig. 174 in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration board are assembled, as seen from the rear. Fig. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 174 in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration board are disassembled, as seen from the front, and Fig. 177 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 174 in a state where the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration board are disassembled, as seen from the rear. In Fig. 174, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is shown with shading.

The gaming board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 is opaque and translucent white, a front sheet 1130 with a predetermined pattern (not shown) is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110A, and a panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, and detailed descriptions of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5B comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a front sheet 1130 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a flat panel decorative substrate 1140 that has multiple LEDs 1141 mounted on the front surface that can irradiate the game panel 1100 with light from behind.

The front component 1000 is the same as the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in the first embodiment. This front component 1000 is formed to be transparent.

The game panel 1100 is composed of a flat panel plate 1110A whose outer circumference is formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110A and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A number of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. The panel plate 1110A in this embodiment is formed as an opaque white color with translucency. The panel holder 1120 is formed as a transparent material.

[9-1. Gaming panel of the gaming board of the third embodiment]
Next, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 175 to 177. The game panel 1100 of the game board 5B includes a translucent, opaque, flat panel board 1110A having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel board 1110A is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum thickness required (8 to 10 mm) to be able to adequately hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front side and the front unit 2000 attached.

The panel plate 1110A is located at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and the portion corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. The panel plate 1110A also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Because the panel plate 1110A is milky white and opaque, as shown in FIG. 174, the rear unit 3000 and other parts of the panel plate 1110A located behind the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 cannot be seen from the front (player side) except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is opaque and white with translucency, when the decorative elements of the rear unit 3000 located at the rear, such as the rear front peripheral decorative element 3201, the rear upper front decorative element 3310, and the rear lower front decorative element 3410, are illuminated, light from behind passes through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the decorative elements, and the luminous color of the decorative elements can be transmitted in its original color, allowing the player to see a colorful illumination effect.

The portion of the panel plate 1110A that overlaps with the front-rear direction of the preceding component 1000 can be seen from the front through the preceding component 1000 because the preceding component 1000 is formed transparent (see FIG. 174).

The panel plate 1110A also has a number of positioning holes 1113 formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps 1114 formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges (see FIG. 176). The positioning holes 1113 are used to position the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps 1114 are used to engage with the engagement claws 1125 and engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120, allowing the panel holder 1120 to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110A has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left, right, and lower sides, excluding the area above the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

In addition to the openings 1112 and positioning holes 1113, the panel plate 1110A is formed with a plurality of nail holes (not shown) for planting obstacle nails N, screw holes 1116 for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center part 2500, and positioning holes 1117. The nail holes, screw holes 1116, and positioning holes 1117 penetrate the panel plate 1110A and the front sheet 1130 in the front-rear direction.

In more detail, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 in this embodiment has a main body portion 1151 that is translucent, and a specific portion 1152 that is translucent and has a different light transmittance from the main body portion 1151. In the panel board 1110A, the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are integrally formed from the same material, and the specific portion 1152 has a different light transmittance by being thinner than the main body portion 1151.

The specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130. The specific portion 1152 is formed by a blind hole-like recess 1115 that is cylindrically recessed forward from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151, with the front surface being located on the same plane as the front surface of the main body portion 1151 and the rear surface being located forward of the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 (see FIG. 178).

In this embodiment, the specific parts 1152 are provided in a portion of the guidance area 2710 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the game panel 1100A is arranged. More specifically, they are provided in a portion of the first guidance area 2711 in the guidance area 2710. Therefore, when the multiple LEDs 1141 of the panel decorative board 1140 are illuminated, the rear of the guidance area 2710 can be illuminated, and the multiple specific parts 1152 can make the first guidance area 2711 shine brightly.

The thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within a range of 10% to 80% of the thickness of the main portion 1151. The reason for setting the thickness of the specific portion 1152 within the above range is that if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thinner than the above range, the strength of the portion of the specific portion 1152 on the panel board 1110A is reduced, which may cause unevenness in the specific portion 1152 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, or damage due to the circulation or collision of the game balls B. In addition, if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thicker than the above range, the light transmittance approaches the light transmittance of the main portion 1151, so even if the rear LED 1141 is illuminated, it will appear to be as bright as the main portion 1151, and there is a risk that the effect of the light emission effect by the specific portion 1152 will not be fully exhibited.

The specific portion 1152 is provided on the panel board 1110A to avoid the obstructing nail N. In other words, the specific portion 1152 is provided in a portion where the obstructing nail N is not planted. It is desirable to provide the specific portion 1152 in a portion away from the portion where the obstructing nail N is planted (for example, 1 mm or more). As a result, the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, is provided to avoid the portion where the obstructing nail N is planted, so that the portion around the base of the obstructing nail N in the main body portion 1151 becomes thinner, and the depth of the base of the obstructing nail N becomes relatively shallow, thereby preventing a decrease in the holding strength of the obstructing nail N.

The panel board 1110A of this embodiment is formed of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS) as a white type. This HIPS is significantly cheaper than the acrylic resin generally used for transparent game boards. Also, in this embodiment, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 20% of the thickness of the main portion 1151, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 is 40% of the thickness of the main portion 1151. Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the thickness of the main portion 1151 is 10 mm, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 2 mm, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 is 4 mm.

The translucent opaque material in panel 1110A should desirably have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to create a luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain the opaque material. Also, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the components located to the rear will be easily discerned, and there is a risk that the dramatic effect of concealment will not be fully achieved.

In addition, the panel board 1110A is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)) as a white color, but "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", "chalk color Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "brown color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "grayish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "indigo blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "cherry blossom color Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "white ... The color may be white, such as Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5).

Furthermore, although the panel board 1110A is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), it may be made of "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", etc. Also, although the panel board 1110A is made of white due to the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), it may be made of white by adding a coloring agent to a transparent material.

In this panel board 1110A, the opening 1112 and the positioning hole 1113 are formed by cutting with the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the flat base material. In detail, the panel board 1110A is first formed by attaching the front sheet 1130 to one surface of the flat base material. Next, using an NC router processing machine or the like, the penetrating positioning hole 1113, the positioning hole 1117, the screw hole 1116, the engagement step portion 1114 recessed from the front surface side, etc. are processed from the surface side (rear surface side) of the base material to which the front sheet 1130 is attached. Next, the opening 1112 and the specific portion 1152 are processed from the surface side (rear surface side) to which the front sheet 1130 is not attached. Finally, the panel board 1110A is completed by processing the nail hole (inclined nail hole) for planting the obstacle nail N from the front surface side. Then, the nail installation machine is used to install the obstacle nail N into the nail hole.

When cutting is performed using an end mill or the like with an NC router processing machine or the like, the cutting chips are discharged to the base end side of the end mill, so a force acts on the cutting target in the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the end mill. Therefore, when cutting is performed with an end mill from the surface side to which the front sheet 1130 is attached, cutting chips are discharged to the side opposite the base material (panel board 1110A) and a force acts on the front sheet 1130, so the front sheet 1130 is easily peeled off from the base material, and burrs are easily generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. In contrast, in this embodiment, the through opening 1112 is cut from the back side with an end mill, so that cutting chips are discharged toward the base material side of the front sheet 1130 and a force is applied to the front sheet 1130, and the force acts in a direction that brings the front sheet 1130 into close contact with the base material, making the front sheet 1130 less likely to peel off and increasing the shear force on the front sheet 1130, making it less likely for burrs to form on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 and improving its appearance.

And because the specific portion 1152 is machined at the same time that the opening 1112 is machined, there is no need to change the setup of the base material just to machine the specific portion 1152. The specific portion 1152 can be machined with only a slight increase in processing time, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the meantime, a drill is used to cut (drill) circular through holes such as part of the positioning hole 1113, the nail hole, the screw hole 1116, and the positioning hole 1117. However, if the drill is used to cut from the back side of the front sheet 1130 where the front sheet 1130 is not attached, a strong force acts on the front sheet 1130 in the opposite direction to the base material when the hole is cut, so that the front sheet 1130 is likely to peel off from the base material near the cut end surface, or burrs may occur on the cut end surface. In contrast, in this embodiment, the cutting (drilling) of part of the positioning hole 1113, the nail hole, the screw hole 1116, the positioning hole 1117, etc. is performed from the front side, so that burrs are less likely to occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, and the appearance can be improved.

The positioning holes 1113 and the engagement step 1114 are machined from the front side, but when assembled to the game board 5B, they are located outside the game area 5a and are difficult to see from the player's side, so even if some burrs occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the appearance is not deteriorated. In addition, since the nail holes and screw holes 1116 are inserted with the obstructing nails N or screws from the front side, even if burrs occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the burrs are pushed into the holes by the obstructing nails N or screws, so the appearance is not deteriorated. In addition, since the panel board 1110A is opaque, even if burrs on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 are pushed into the holes, the opaque panel board 1110A makes it impossible to see from the outside, improving the appearance.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel plate 1110A, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110A (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (e.g., a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1127 (see FIG. 176) that is roughly the same size as the panel plate 1110A and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the bottom end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008 (see Figures 175(b) and 177).

The panel holder 1120 also includes a number of protruding pins 1124 that protrude forward from the holding step 1127 and are inserted into a number of positioning holes 1113 in the panel plate 1110A, a number of engaging claws 1125 that are positioned outside the holding step 1127 and elastically engage with engaging steps 1114 on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110A, and a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that protrude upward from the lower outside of the holding step 1127 and respectively engage with the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110.

The panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached by engaging the engagement step 1114 on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110A with the engagement piece 1126 from diagonally above and forward, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward so that the engagement step 1114 on the upper and lower left inclined parts elastically engages with the engagement claw 1125, while the panel plate 1110A is housed in the holding step 1127. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110A is positioned relative to the panel holder 1120.

In the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 with the game area 5a in front is opaque and white, so the end surface of the opening 1112 to which the center role 2500 and the like are attached is white. Therefore, compared to when plywood is used for the game panel, the end surface of the opening 1112 can be made less noticeable, and there is no need to finish the end surface neatly, decorate the end surface, or hide the end surface with the center role 2500 and the like attached to the opening 1112, so the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced. In addition, even if the center role 2500 and the like attached to the opening 1112 are made of a transparent material, the end surface of the opening 1112 is not noticeable, so the center role 2500 and the like can be made of a transparent material.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and white, if a white decorative board with multiple LEDs mounted on it is provided on the edge of the opening 1112 to which the center gadget 2500 is attached, it creates the illusion that the decorative board is integrated with the edge of the opening 1112, making the decorative board less noticeable, and by illuminating the LEDs on the decorative board, the panel plate 1110A can be illuminated and the center of the center gadget 2500 can be illuminated.

[9-2. Front sheet of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the front sheet 1130 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described. The front sheet 1130 is attached to the entire front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 178, etc.). The front sheet 1130 is formed of a synthetic resin film with excellent abrasion resistance and a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown in the figure, the front sheet 1130 is printed with a predetermined pattern. The front sheet 1130 is formed so that a part of the pattern shines brightly through the panel board 1110A by emitting light from the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140.

The pattern on the front sheet 1130 has a characteristic portion (not shown), and a specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind the characteristic portion. This allows the characteristic portion of the pattern to shine brighter than other portions via the specific portion 1152.

The front sheet 1130 (pattern) may have transparent areas, opaque translucent areas, or non-translucent areas. For example, in the front sheet 1130, if the area corresponding to the specific portion 1152 is surrounded by an opaque (low translucency) area, the visual contrast can be increased, and the area corresponding to the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter.

In this embodiment, the materials for the front sheet 1130 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "high impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", etc.

This front sheet 1130 is attached to the base material of the panel board 1110A before processing and is cut together with the base material.

In the present embodiment, the front sheet 1130 is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110A, and therefore the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a. This makes it possible to use an inexpensive material with low abrasion resistance for the panel plate 1110A, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[9-3. Panel decoration substrate of the game board according to the third embodiment]
Next, the panel decoration board 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 174 to 177. The panel decoration board 1140 is provided behind the part where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged on the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, that is, the part where the guiding area 2710 is provided in front. The panel decoration board 1140 has a white solder resist applied to the front and rear surfaces, and the front and rear surfaces are formed in white. The panel decoration board 1140 has a plurality of LEDs 1141 mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main part 1151.

The multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative substrate 1140 are high-brightness full-color LEDs. The first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 may be a narrow-angle LED with a narrow irradiation range, and the second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151 may be a wide-angle LED with a wide irradiation range.

Although not shown in the figure, the rear surface of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided with a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for illuminating the multiple LEDs 1141, and the like.

When the second LED 1141b is illuminated, the panel decorative substrate 1140 can brightly illuminate the area behind the second guiding area 2712 in the main body portion 1151 of the panel board 1110A, and when the first LED 1141a is illuminated, the area behind the first guiding area 2711 in the panel board 1110A can be illuminated via the specific portion 1152 so as to shine brighter than the second guiding area 2712.

[9-4. Illumination effects by the gaming panel and panel decoration board of the third embodiment]
Next, the light-emitting effects by the game panel 1100 and the panel decoration board 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board, where (a1) in (a) is an explanatory diagram seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned off, (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of (a1), (b1) in (b) is an explanatory diagram seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration board turned on, and (b2) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of (b1). Note that in FIG. 178, for convenience, the color of the white (milky white) material of the panel board 1110A is dark gray, the light amount is shown by shading, and the pattern of the front sheet 1130 is omitted.

In the game board 5B of this embodiment, a translucent front sheet 1130 is attached to the front of a translucent white (milky white in this case) opaque panel board 1110A, and a panel decoration board 1140 with a number of LEDs 1141 mounted on the front is provided behind the panel board 1110A. The panel board 1110A is composed of a main body part 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a number of specific parts 1152 that are thinner than the main body part 1151. The specific parts 1152 are formed by processing a blind hole-like recess 1115 in the main body part 1151 (panel board 1110A) so that it is cylindrically recessed from the rear surface toward the front. Therefore, the front surface of the specific parts 1152 is on the same plane as the front surface of the main body part 1151.

The panel decorative substrate 1140 is coated on the front and back with a white solder resist film. The multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative substrate 1140 are composed of a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151 of the panel board 1110A and a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152.

In the normal state where the multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative substrate 1140 of this game board 5B are not illuminated, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) is uniformly bright, as shown in FIG. 178(a), and the specific portion 1152 and the panel decorative substrate 1140 located at the rear are not visible to the player in front.

The entire interior of this panel plate 1110A is uniformly opaque, so the amount of light incident from the rear attenuates (decreases) as it travels forward. Furthermore, panel plate 1110A uses the same opaque material for main body portion 1151 and specific portion 1152, and the thickness of specific portion 1152 is different from the thickness of main body portion 1151. Therefore, the amount of attenuation of the light incident from the rear until it is emitted forward from the front surface differs between main body portion 1151 and specific portion 1152, and the light transmittance of specific portion 1152 differs from that of main body portion 1151.

From this normal state, when the multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative board 1140 are illuminated as the game progresses, the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1141 is irradiated onto the rear surface of the panel board 1110A (main body portion 1151 and specific portion 1152) and enters the translucent interior.

The light emitted forward from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear of the thick main body 1151 spreads in a truncated cone shape as it enters the inside from the rear surface of the main body 1151, and spreads further before reaching the front surface, with the amount of light being attenuated relatively greatly by the opaque material (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the area in front of the second LED 1141b on the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light in a relatively large diameter circle that is brighter than other areas (see (b1) in FIG. 178(b)).

On the other hand, the light irradiated forward from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific part 1152, which is thinner than the main part 1151, spreads in a truncated cone shape and is irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific part 1152. However, the light spreading from the first LED 1141a is diffused by the inner surface of the recess 1115 for forming the specific part 1152, and is irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific part 1152 with the spread suppressed. Therefore, in the specific part 1152, even though the distance from the rear surface to the LED 1141 (first LED 1141a) is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the main part 1151 to the LED 1141 (second LED 1141b), the amount of light irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific part 1152 is almost the same as the amount of light irradiated onto the rear surface of the main part 1151.

The light entering the inside from the rear surface of the specific part 1152 attenuates (decreases) in light intensity as it travels forward, but because the thickness is thin, the area that spreads in a truncated cone shape is narrow before reaching the front surface, and the attenuation of the light intensity due to the opaque material is relatively small (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the front part of the first LED 1141a (specific part 1152) on the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light in a circular shape with a smaller diameter than the front part of the second LED 1141b, and shines brighter than the front part of the second LED 1141b (see (b1) in FIG. 178(b)). In this embodiment, the specific part 1152 emits light to shine brightly with the same brightness as when the panel board 1110A is transparent.

For this reason, by providing a specific portion 1152 behind a characteristic portion of a pattern (not shown) on the front sheet 1130 attached to the front of the panel board 1110A, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which the characteristic portion of the pattern shines brightly due to the light emitted by the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative board 1140. This strongly attracts the player's attention, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided, and the bright lighting of the characteristic portion of the pattern can suggest to the player that an opportunity is approaching, making the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is depicted on the front sheet 1130, and a specific portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic part of the character (e.g., eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). When light is shone forward from the first LED 1141a behind the specific portion 1152, the specific portion 1152 can cause the characteristic part of the character to shine brightly, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's attention, while making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

According to this embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has a game area 5a in front of which the game balls B circulate and a front sheet 1130 with a predetermined pattern attached to the front, is composed of a translucent white main body part 1151 and a specific part 1152 that has a higher light transmittance than the main body part 1151 and is provided at a position corresponding to the pattern on the front sheet 1130. Therefore, as the game progresses, the second LED 1141 provided behind the main body part 1151 on the panel decoration substrate 1140 When b is illuminated, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused within the main body 1151, making the image on the front sheet 1130 shine brightly, making it appear as if it is self-illuminating. When the first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 is illuminated, the amount of light that travels in a straight line increases as it has a higher light transmittance than the main body 1151, making it possible to make the part of the image corresponding to the specific portion 1152 shine brighter than other parts, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines that used plywood or transparent plates for the game panel 1100, the image on the front sheet 1130 lights up, allowing the player to see a pachinko machine 1 that self-illuminates in various brightnesses within the game area 5a like nothing they've ever seen before, strongly attracting the player's attention and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players; and because part of the image shines brightly, it suggests to the player that a good opportunity is coming, making the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

[9-5. Different specific parts of the gaming board of the third embodiment]
Next, other embodiments of the specific portion 1152 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 179 to 181. Figure 179(a) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a part of a game panel provided with a specific portion of a different form from the specific portion of Figure 178, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a part of a game panel provided with a specific portion of yet another different form, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing in a perspective view a game panel provided with a specific portion of yet another different form. Figure 180 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having special portions of different thicknesses together with a panel decorative substrate, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a conical rear surface together with a panel decorative substrate, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a light-blocking coating provided on the side of a blind hole-shaped recess together with a panel decorative substrate, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a gaming panel having a special portion with a light-blocking sleeve provided in a blind hole-shaped recess together with a panel decorative substrate. Figure 181 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel having a special portion formed by a groove-shaped recess, together with a panel decorative substrate; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel having a substrate accommodating recess for accommodating a panel decorative substrate, together with a panel decorative substrate; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel having a special portion filled with a transparent material in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel, together with a panel decorative substrate; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel having a special portion filled with a transparent material in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front surface of the game panel, together with a panel decorative substrate.

First, in the embodiment of FIG. 179(a), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a triangular prism-shaped blind hole-like recess 1115 formed in a main body portion 1151 of a gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A). In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the specific portion 1152 is triangular. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear is illuminated, the portion of the specific portion 1152 on the panel board 1110A can be illuminated to shine brightly in a triangular shape.

In the embodiment of FIG. 179(b), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a star-shaped cylindrical blind hole recess 1115 formed in a main portion 1151 of a gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A). In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the specific portion 1152 is star-shaped. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided at the rear is illuminated, the portion of the specific portion 1152 on the panel board 1110A can be illuminated to shine brightly in a star shape.

In the embodiment of Figures 179 (a) and (b), the shape of the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is shown as a triangle or a star, but this is not limited to this and may be an "oval", "square", "pentagon", "hexagon", "polygon", "heart", "irregular shape", "the shape of a specific character or item", "the shape of letters such as a logo", etc.

In the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the specific portion 1152 is formed by a hexagonal cylindrical blind hole-shaped recess 1115 formed in the main portion 1151 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). In other words, the specific portion 1152 is formed by a groove-shaped recess 1115 of a certain width extending along the outer periphery of the hexagon. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape when viewed from the front) of the specific portion 1152 is a ring-shaped hexagon. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration board 1140 provided at the rear is illuminated, the part of the specific portion 1152 on the panel plate 1110A can be illuminated so as to shine brightly in a ring-shaped hexagon. Note that one first LED 1141a may be provided for one specific portion 1152 (recess 1115), or multiple first LEDs 1141a may be provided depending on the size and shape of the specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the shape of the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is shown as a ring-shaped hexagon, but this is not limited to this and may be a "ring-shaped circle," "ring-shaped oval," "ring-shaped triangle," "ring-shaped square," "ring-shaped pentagon," "ring-shaped polygon," "ring-shaped star," "ring-shaped heart," "ring-shaped irregular," "the outer shape of a specified character or item," "the outer shape of letters such as a logo," etc.

In the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the specific portion 1152 is formed by extending a groove of a constant width in an annular shape, but this is not limited thereto, and the specific portion 1152 may be formed by a groove extending in a straight or curved shape.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 179, the specific portion 1152 has various shapes, so that the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is illuminated as the game progresses, making it possible to make the front portion of the specific portion 1152 on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (front sheet 1130) shine brightly in the same shape as the rear surface of the specific portion 1152. This can make a strong impact on the player, strongly attracting the player's attention and making the player think that something good is going to happen, thereby increasing expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, a picture of a specific character is applied to the front sheet 1130, and a groove is provided in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 to follow the outer periphery of the character to form a specific portion 1152. When the first LED 1141a on the rear panel decorative substrate 1140 is illuminated, the outer periphery of the character can be made to shine brightly, and the player can be shown a light-emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 180(a), the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is varied on one panel board 1110A. As a result, the thicker the specific portion 1152, the lower the light transmittance, and therefore, even if the first LED 1141a provided at the rear is caused to emit light with the same brightness, the thicker the specific portion 1152, the darker the brightness of the front of the specific portion 1152. Therefore, since the front of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light with various brightnesses, a more diverse light-emitting effect can be shown to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored.

In addition, when the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the cutting program. Alternatively, when the specific portion 1152 (game panel 1100) is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the protrusion amount of the core pin or mandrel used to form the specific portion 1152. Therefore, since the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed, it is possible to easily respond to design changes and model changes, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and it is also possible to easily provide the specific portion 1152 with a higher presentation effect, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is formed into a cone shape that is thinnest at the center. This makes the specific portion 1152 thinnest at the center, so that when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is illuminated, the player can see an illumination effect in which the center shines brightest in the area in front of the specific portion 1152 on the panel board 1110A.

In addition, because the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the strength of the panel plate 1110A caused by the formation of the recess 1115, compared to when the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made thinner overall. This allows the specific portion 1152 to shine brighter while maintaining the strength of the panel plate 1110A. In addition, because the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, it can be easily machined with a drill with a conical tip, suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(b), the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is shown as being cone-shaped with its center located at the front, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be cone-shaped with its center located at the rear, and can be made to shine in a circular ring shape with the light from the first LED 1141a.

The rear surface of the specific part 1152 may also be a "pyramid shape," a "relief shape imitating a character, item, logo, etc.," a "geometric pattern shape," etc. If the rear surface of the specific part 1152 is in a relief shape or a geometric pattern shape, the thickness of the specific part 1152 varies depending on the part so as to imitate the shape of the rear surface. As a result, the light transmittance varies depending on the part of the specific part 1152. Due to the light from the first LED 1141a, a light with a different shade that follows the shape of the rear surface of the specific part 1152 can be seen in the part in front of the specific part 1152 on the panel board 1110A. A predetermined character, pattern, etc. can be projected on the front surface of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130), and a light-emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's attention can be provided.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(c), a light-shielding coating 1153 is provided on the side of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152. The coating 1153 is formed by applying a paint with high light-shielding properties or attaching a film or metal foil with high light-shielding properties. On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 180(d), a light-shielding sleeve 1154 is provided (inserted) in the blind hole-shaped recess 1115. The sleeve 1154 is made of a synthetic resin, paper, wood, metal, or the like with high light-shielding properties. The sleeve 1154 is attached to the recess 1115 by press-fitting or adhesive. Alternatively, the sleeve 1154 is provided by insert molding or two-color molding when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is injection molded.

According to the embodiment of Figures 180(c) and (d), when the first LED 1141a of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided behind the specific portion 1152 is illuminated, only the portion of the panel board 1110A (front sheet 1130) in front of the specific portion 1152 can be illuminated brightly, so that the decorative and dramatic effects of the glow of that portion can be reliably achieved, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

To be more specific, in the panel plate 1110A, the side of the recess 1115 forming the specific portion 1152 is formed by the main body portion 1151 having translucency, so that when light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 is irradiated onto the side of the recess 1115, a part of the irradiated light enters the main body portion 1151, and the light that enters the main body portion 1151 brightens the area around the specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the shape of the specific portion 1152 may become unclear due to the specific portion 1152 and the area around the specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 being lit up, or an area of the pattern of the front sheet 1130 that does not correspond to the specific portion 1152 may be lit up, which may reduce the effect of the illumination by the specific portion 1152. In contrast, in this embodiment, a highly light-blocking coating 1153 and sleeve 1154 are provided on the side of the recess 1115 that forms the specific portion 1152, so that light can be prevented from entering the main body portion 1151 from the side. This makes it possible to prevent the area around the specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 from being illuminated by light from the first LED 1141a behind the specific portion 1152, making it possible to make only the specific portion 1152 shine brightly, ensuring the presentation effect of the shining specific portion 1152, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

The coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may have a high light reflectivity. This allows the light from the first LED 1141a to be diffused by the inner surfaces of the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 and guided (guided) forward, so that most of the light irradiated forward from the first LED 1141a can be irradiated onto the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, making the specific portion 1152 shine brighter.

In the embodiment of Figures 180(c) and (d), a coating 1153 or a sleeve 1154 is provided on the side of the blind hole-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, but this is not limited to this, and a coating 1153 or a sleeve 1154 may be provided on the side of the groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 181(a), a second LED 1141b is provided behind the main body 1151 between two specific parts 1152 formed by a groove-shaped recess 1115. This allows the specific part 1152 (range a) to shine brightly due to the light emitted by the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific part 1152, and allows only the part (range b) sandwiched between the specific parts 1152 to shine brightly due to the light emitted by the second LED 1141b provided behind the part (range b) sandwiched between the specific parts 1152 in the main body 1151, allowing the player to see a lighting effect with clear boundaries between light and dark.

In detail, in the panel plate 1110A, since the main body 1151 has translucency, when light from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear enters the inside from the rear surface of the main body 1151, the light also diffuses in a direction along the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. However, if the panel plate 1110A has a groove-shaped recess 1115 to form the specific portion 1152, the recess 1115 blocks the diffusion of light, and the light does not diffuse beyond the specific portion 1152 to the opposite side of the main body 1151. For this reason, when the second LED 1141b is illuminated in FIG. 181(a), only the portion (range b) sandwiched between the specific portions 1152 can be illuminated brightly, and the portion outside the specific portion 1152 can be darkened.

Therefore, for example, if the specific portion 1152 formed by the groove is provided along the periphery of a distinctive character or the like in the design of the front sheet 1130, the light from the second LED 1141b of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the character can be used to brightly illuminate only the character while keeping the areas outside the character dark, and the light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 can be used to make the periphery of the character shine. This makes it possible to make the character stand out and strongly attract the player's attention, and by appropriately setting the light emission patterns of the first LED 1141a and the second LED 1141b, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, providing a pachinko machine 1 that entertains the player.

The embodiment of FIG. 181(b) provides a board accommodating recess 1155 recessed forward on the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), and the panel decorative board 1140 is accommodated in the board accommodating recess 1155. This allows the rear surface of the panel decorative board 1140 to be positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, making it easier to secure space behind the panel plate 1110A, and allowing the decorations of the rear unit 3000 to be relatively large, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that can present a more effective presentation.

In addition, by accommodating the panel decorative substrate 1140 in the substrate accommodating recess 1155, the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 can be brought closer to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, allowing the specific portion 1152 to shine brighter.

181(c) and (d), the recess 1115 such as a blind hole or a groove for forming the specific portion 1152 is filled with a transparent filling portion 1156. The filling portion 1156 may be formed by pressing or gluing the filling portion 1156 having the same shape as the recess 1115 after the specific portion 1152 is formed by the recess 1115. Alternatively, the filling portion 1156 may be formed by insert molding or two-color molding when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is injection molded. According to this embodiment, the filling portion 1156 can make the panel plate 1110A have a constant thickness, and the decrease in strength and rigidity of the panel plate 1110A can be suppressed compared to the case where a hollow recess 1115 is formed.

In more detail, in the embodiment of FIG. 181(d), the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is positioned rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the recess 1115 such as a blind hole or groove in front of the specific portion 1152 is filled with the filling portion 1156, so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are flush with each other. This allows the surface of the panel plate 1110A to be flat without any irregularities, allows the front sheet 1130 to be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A in good condition, and allows the surface through which the game balls B circulate to be flat.

In addition, in the panel plate 1110A, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 may be located rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 may be located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. In other words, the specific portion 1152 that is thinner than the main portion 1151 may be provided in an intermediate portion of the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (main portion 1151). In this case, it is desirable to fill at least the front portion of the specific portion 1152 with the filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are on the same plane. This allows the front surface of the panel plate 1110A to be flat, and the front sheet 1130 can be attached in a good condition without floating.

[9-6. Different gaming panels in the gaming board of the third embodiment]
Next, in the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the game panel 1100A of the embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game panel whose board thickness changes and the panel decoration board, and FIG. 182(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a different relationship from FIG. 182. FIG. 182 shows the part where the board thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. The game panel 1100A of this embodiment has a main body part 1151 of a predetermined thickness and a specific part 1152 whose light transmittance is increased by being thinner than the main body part 1151. Behind the game panel 1100A, a panel decoration board 1140 is provided on the front surface of which are mounted a first LED 1141a located behind the specific part 1152 and a second LED 1141b (not shown in FIG. 182) located behind the main body part 1151.

The gaming panel 1100A of this embodiment has a thicker plate thickness in the area where the multiple obstacle nails N are planted (for example, the area where the play area 5a is provided in the front), and a thinner plate thickness in other areas. This allows the gaming panel 1100A to be lightweight while maintaining the holding strength of the obstacle nails N. In addition, by forming the gaming panel 1100A of this embodiment by injection molding, the amount of synthetic resin required for the gaming panel 1100A can be reduced compared to when the entire panel is formed to a constant thickness, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(a), the panel decorative substrate 1140 extends to the rear of the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness changes, and an LED 1141c capable of emitting light forward is provided behind the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness changes. As a result, when the LED 1141c is illuminated, the portion in front of the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness changes becomes brighter as it moves to the left on the page. In other words, the light from the LED 1141c can illuminate the periphery of the gaming area 5a in a ring shape that becomes brighter as it moves outward. For this reason, in this embodiment, the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness changes is considered to be a type of specific portion 1152.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(a), the area where the plate thickness changes is the peripheral area of the play area 5a, but this is not limited to this. The plate thickness may be changed by slanting the end face of the opening 1112 that penetrates from front to back to attach the center device 2500 or the like, and an LED 1141c may be provided behind it.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(b), a second panel decorative substrate 1145 is provided on which an LED 1146 capable of irradiating light to the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel 1100A changes is mounted, in a direction along the front surface of the gaming panel 1100A, outside the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel 1100A changes. As a result, when the LED 1146 is illuminated, the light is irradiated along the front surface of the gaming panel 1100A to the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel changes, and the light that enters the inside of the gaming panel 1100A from the portion is diffused, so that the portion in front of the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel 1100A changes and the portion inside the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel 1100A changes can be illuminated darker than in the embodiment of FIG. 182(a). Therefore, for example, if the portion of the gaming panel 1100A where the thickness of the gaming panel changes is the periphery of the gaming area 5a, the light from the LED 1146 can be illuminated in a circular shape with a certain width from the periphery of the gaming area 5a to the inside.

[9-7. Features of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the main features of the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 174 to 177. As described above, the game board 5B of the third embodiment includes a transparent front component 1000, a game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and provided with a game area 5a in front, a front sheet 1130 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 and having a predetermined pattern, and a panel decoration substrate 1140 capable of irradiating light onto the game panel 1100 from behind.

The game panel 1100 is composed of a white, opaque, flat panel board 1110A with a play area 5a provided at the front and multiple obstacle nails N planted in it, and a transparent, frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and removably holding the panel board 1110A from the front. The panel board 1110A has a main body portion 1151 that is translucent, and a specific portion 1152 that has a higher light transmittance than the main body portion 1151. The specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is provided behind a characteristic portion of the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130.

The panel decorative substrate 1140 is located between the rear surface of the panel board 1110A and the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction. The surface (front and rear) of the panel decorative substrate 1140 is formed in white. The panel decorative substrate 1140 has a plurality of LEDs 1141 mounted on the front surface, which can irradiate light forward. The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A, and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151.

According to the game board 5B of this embodiment, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body 1151 of the panel board 1110A in the panel decorative substrate 1140 is illuminated depending on the progress of the game (for example, depending on the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005), the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused within the main body 1151 to make the pattern on the front sheet 1130 shine brightly, making it appear as if it is self-illuminating, and when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 is illuminated, the amount of light traveling in a straight line increases due to its higher light transmittance than the main body 1151, so that the part of the pattern corresponding to the specific portion 1152 can be made to shine brighter than other parts, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines 1 that used plywood or transparent panels as game panels, the image on the front sheet 1130 lights up, allowing the player to see a pachinko machine 1 that self-illuminates with various brightnesses within the game area 5a like nothing they've ever seen before, strongly attracting the player's attention and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and because part of the image shines brightly, it suggests to the player that a good opportunity is approaching, making the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Specifically, for example, if a specific character is depicted on the front sheet 1130 and a specific portion 1152 is provided behind a distinctive part of the character (e.g., eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.), then when light is shone from behind the specific portion 1152 forward, the distinctive portion of the character can be made to shine brightly by the specific portion 1152, which can make a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention, as well as making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front of the panel board 1110A, and the panel board 1110A (main part 1151) is recessed from the rear to form the specific part 1152, so that the specific part 1152 of the game panel 1100 cannot be seen from the front. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the specific part 1152 until the light emission effect in which the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 shine with different brightness is executed by irradiating the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 with light emitted by the LED 1141 provided on the panel decoration board 1140, so that the impact of the execution of the light emission effect (light emission decoration) of the game panel 1100 can be increased to surprise the player, and the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the main part 1151 of the panel board 1110A is opaque and white, and the specific part 1152 is not visible from the front, the color of the front of the panel board 1110A is uniformly white, so that the inside of the play area 5a can be made bright, the game ball B circulating in the play area 5a can be made easier to see, and the color of the decorative body (for example, the front unit 2000 such as the starting port unit 2100 and the center role 2500) provided in this pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body can be strongly exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided. In addition, as described above, since the front of the panel board 1110A is uniformly white, the color of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exerted.

In addition, the panel board 1110A is opaque and white, and the multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative board 1140 are full-color LEDs. By changing the light color of the LEDs 1141 as the game progresses, it is possible to make the main part 1151 and specific parts 1152 of the panel board 1110A emit light in a variety of colors. This allows the player to see a variety of light-emitting effects, making it less likely for the player to get bored. The light-emitting colors can also suggest the player's expectations, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and white, the game area 5a in front can be brightened, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a, and the color of the decoration of the front unit 2000 provided in this pachinko machine 1 stand out relatively, so that the decorative effect of the decoration can be enhanced, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players can be provided. Also, as described above, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white, the color of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 attached to the front can be enhanced, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exerted.

In addition, the specific parts 1152 of the panel board 1110A are made thinner than the main part 1151 to make them have different light transmittances, so that the specific parts 1152 with different light transmittances can be easily provided by forming recesses 1115 such as blind holes or grooves in the main part 1151 to make the thicknesses different. This allows the specific parts 1152 to be made of the same material as the main part 1151, and the cost of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) can be reduced compared to inserting the specific parts 1152 with different light transmittances into the main part 1151.

Furthermore, in the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, recesses 1115 are formed in the main body 1151 to provide different thicknesses, thereby providing specific parts 1152 with different light transmittances. Since the specific parts 1152 are made of the same material as the main body 1151, the cost of the gaming panel 1100 can be reduced compared to inserting specific parts with different light transmittances into the main body. In addition, since the specific parts 1152 are formed by cutting, the thickness (light transmittance), shape, and position of the specific parts 1152 can be easily changed simply by changing the cutting program, making it easy to respond to design changes and model changes, suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and making it easier to provide specific parts 1152 with a higher presentation effect, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, when the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by cutting, it can be cut at the same time as cutting the nail holes (prepared holes) for planting the obstacle nails N into the panel plate 1110A, the openings 1112 that run through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) from front to back for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center gimmick 2500 or the lower right unit 2400, etc. This eliminates the need to change the setup in order to cut the specific portion 1152, and allows the specific portion 1152 to be processed with only a slight increase in processing time, thereby suppressing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the panel board 1110A is opaque and white, even if the pattern on the front sheet 1130 has transparent parts, the bases of the multiple obstacle nails N (the parts inserted into the panel board 1110A) planted in the panel board 1110A are hidden from the player, improving the appearance of the play area 5a, compared to when the panel board is transparent.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is opaque and white, the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 of the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 and the rear lower front decoration 3410 of the rear lower front performance unit 3400, which are provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), can be partially invisible from the front (player side). When the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A are illuminated, light from the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like passes through the translucent panel board 1110A to the front, so that the panel board 1110A can be partially illuminated and the player can be made aware of the presence of the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like provided at the rear. In this case, because the panel board 1110A is white, when the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A are illuminated, the light can be transmitted forward in its original color, allowing players to enjoy colorful illumination effects and presenting a wide variety of illumination effects to players, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and white, a portion of the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 of the back-bottom front performance unit 3400 located behind the panel board 1110A can be made invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, when the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is raised to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the entire back-bottom front decorative body 3410 can be made visible from the front through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see moving performances in which the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is partially hidden or entirely visible, and a variety of moving performances can be presented to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque and white, and the surface of the rear panel decorative substrate 1140 is white, the panel decorative substrate 1140 can be made difficult to see through the panel plate 1110A, preventing the appearance of the game panel 1100 (within the game area 5a) from being poor. In addition, the white panel decorative substrate 1140 can reflect light from the LED 1141 and the panel plate 1110A side forward, allowing the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) to emit light more brightly.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque (synthetic resin) and the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A protects the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a, a cheaper synthetic resin with a lower grade of abrasion resistance (here, high impact polystyrene) can be used as the material for the panel plate 1110A compared to when the panel plate 1110A is transparent, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is opaque and white, and the front sheet 1130 is patterned, when the player looks into the play area 5a, the focus is easily focused on the front of the panel board 1110A, so that the focus naturally comes to the game ball B circulating in the play area 5a just by looking at the panel board 1110A. At this time, as described above, the light from the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 makes the panel board 1110A (main part 1151 and specific part 1152) self-illuminating, so that the game ball B circulating in the play area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from behind, making it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the play area 5a, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is thinner than the main body portion 1151, when the second LED 1141b of the panel decorative substrate 1140 provided behind the main body portion 1151 is illuminated, the light from the second LED 1141b diffusing within the main body portion 1151 is blocked by the recessed portion for forming the specific portion 1152, and it becomes possible to illuminate only the portion in front of the second LED 1141b in the main body portion 1151. Therefore, for example, when a circular groove is formed in the main body portion 1151 and the portion of the groove is the specific portion 1152, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the inner portion of the circular specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 is illuminated, only the portion inside the specific portion 1152 can be illuminated brightly, and the portion outside the specific portion 1152 can be darkened. In other words, depending on the shape of the specific part 1152 and the arrangement of the multiple LEDs 1141 on the panel decorative board 1140, it is possible to illuminate only any part of the main body part 1151, providing a pachinko machine 1 that can perform a wider variety of illumination effects.

In addition, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel board 1110A is thinner than the main portion 1151, if the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is made into a three-dimensional relief shape that imitates a specific character, item, logo, etc., the thickness of the specific portion 1152 will vary to follow the shape of the rear surface. Therefore, when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 on the panel decorative substrate 1140 is illuminated, the light transmittance differs depending on the part of the specific portion 1152, so that when viewed from the front (player's side), a light with a different shade that follows the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is seen. A specific character, etc. can be projected on the front surface of the panel board 1110A by the illumination of the first LED 1141a, and a light-emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's attention can be provided.

Furthermore, the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is recessed from the rear surface of the main portion 1151, so that the front surface of the specific portion 1152 is flush with the front surface of the main portion 1151. This allows the game ball B to circulate smoothly within the forward game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the component 1000 is transparent, the portion of the component 1000 that overlaps with the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 in the front-to-rear direction can also be decorated with the pattern on the front sheet 1130 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110A, and the light emitted by the panel plate 1110A can be seen by the player. In other words, because the component 1000 is transparent, the entire panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be seen from the player, allowing a wider area to be decorated (see FIG. 174).

In addition, because the panel board 1110A in the gaming panel 1100 is opaque, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel board 1110A is not required. In other words, with a transparent panel board, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel board is necessary to improve the appearance, but in this embodiment, because the panel board 1110A is opaque, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel board 1110A is not required. As a result, compared to when the gaming panel (panel board) is made transparent, there is no need to provide a separate member to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel board 1110A or to devise a way to route the wiring, etc. so that it is difficult to see, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A has multiple recesses 1115, the weight of the panel board 1110A can be reduced by the multiple recesses 1115, and the game board 5 can be made lighter. Note that the panel board 1110A may be provided with recesses 1115 for weight reduction in addition to the light emission effects due to the difference in light transmittance as described above, and the game board 5 (panel board 1110A) can be made even lighter.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to be composed of a panel plate 1110A and a panel holder 1120, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be composed of a single member.

In the above embodiment, the panel board 1110A is machined from a flat base material, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be an injection molded panel board 1110A (game panel 1100). By injection molding the panel board 1110A, it is possible to form the specific portion 1152 with a complex or sharp shape that cannot be obtained by machining. In addition, by using insert molding or two-color molding (multi-color molding) to mold the panel board 1110A, it is possible to make the specific portion 1152 out of a material with a different light transmittance from the main body portion 1151, or to integrally form the sleeve 1154 and the filling portion 1156.

In the above embodiment, the specific portion 1152 with a different light transmittance is formed by recessing the main portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) to make the thickness different, but this is not limited to the above, and the specific portion 1152 may be formed from a material with a different light transmittance from that of the main portion 1151. Specifically, for example, the specific portion 1152 may be formed by providing a material with a different light transmittance from that of the main portion 1151 so as to penetrate the main portion 1151 (by inserting, pressing, injecting, insert molding, two-color molding, etc.).

When the gaming panel 1100 (including the panel plate 1110A) is formed by injection molding, the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152, which have different light transmittances, can be formed integrally at the same time. In addition, when the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a transparent material can be insert molded or multi-color molded into the part (recess 1115) forming the specific part 1152, which is thinner than the main part 1151. This allows the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 to have the same thickness, and by eliminating the recessed part, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the strength and rigidity of the gaming panel 1100. In addition, in this case, since the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 have the same thickness, it is possible to plant a nail N in the specific part 1152, which increases the degree of freedom in arranging the specific part 1152, and a pachinko machine 1 with a higher decorative effect and presentation effect can be provided.

In addition, when the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be changed by simply changing the amount of protrusion into the cavity of the core pin or mandrel used to form the recessed portion (recess 1115) of the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed.

In addition, when the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, it is possible to form a finer and sharper shape for the shape of the rear surface of the specific part 1152, the shape of the specific part 1152 when viewed from the front, etc., compared to cutting processing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a specific part 1152 that enhances the presentation effect, which can entertain the player and strongly attract the player's interest, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110A is shown as being opaque in a white color, but this is not limited thereto, and the panel board 1110A (game panel 1100) may be "opaque (colored opaque) having a predetermined color (e.g., red, blue, yellow, mixed color, etc.)" or "colorless or colored transparent." Examples of opaque panel boards 1110A include "opaque throughout, including the inside," "opaque in part," "transparent inside and opaque on at least one side," "molded from opaque synthetic resin with translucency," "a transparent board and an opaque board with translucency bonded together," "a transparent board with an opaque film (cell) with translucency bonded on at least one side," "a transparent board with a shrinking process using ultraviolet curing ink applied to the rear surface," and "a transparent board with a sandblasting process applied to the rear surface." In addition, colored items include "red-based," "blue-based," "yellow-based," "mixed-color items (multiple specific colors mixed together to create a single color)," and "multicolored items (colors dispersed in patterns such as spots, stripes, polka dots, geometric patterns, etc.)."

In addition, in the above embodiment, the specific portion 1152 has a higher light transmittance than the main portion 1151, but this is not limited thereto, and the specific portion 1152 may have a lower light transmittance than the main portion 1151.

In the above embodiment, the main part 1151 of the panel board 1110A is shown as being opaque, but this is not limiting, and the main part 1151 may be transparent. In this case, since the light transmittance does not change significantly even if the thickness of the main part 1151 is changed, a specific part 1152 having a different light transmittance from the main part 1151 due to its color or material is provided. This makes it possible to make the specific part 1152 appear to be floating in the air relative to the transparent main part 1151, and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated by the shape of the specific part 1152. At this time, when light is irradiated onto the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), the specific part 1152 that appears to be floating in the air emits light as if it were self-illuminating, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the specific part 1152, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a panel decorative substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, and light is irradiated onto the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, but this is not limited to this. A decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of a side or end surface of the panel plate 1110A, and light may be irradiated onto the side or end surface of the panel plate 1110A.

In the above embodiment and the embodiment described later, the panel boards 1110, 1110A, 1110B, etc. of the game panel 1100 in which the obstacle nails N are planted are made of resin, regardless of whether they are transparent or opaque (milky white), so the spacing between the planted obstacle nails N is more accurate and there is less change over time compared to when plywood such as veneer is used for the game panel.

[10. Fourth embodiment of the game board]
Next, the fourth embodiment of the game board 5C in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of the fourth embodiment, in which the panel board, the rear sheet, and the panel decoration board are disassembled and viewed from the front. The game board 5C of the fourth embodiment has a panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 that is opaque and translucent, and is provided with a rear sheet 1160 on the rear surface of which a predetermined pattern is applied, and a panel decoration board 1170 on the front surface of which are mounted a plurality of LEDs 1171 capable of irradiating light from the rear of the rear sheet 1160 to the front. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The panel plate 1110B has the same shape as the above-mentioned game panel 1100 and game panel 1100A, and is attached to the rear side of the transparent front component 1000 via the frame-shaped transparent panel holder 1120 in a state where it is removably held from the front by the panel holder 1120.

In this embodiment, the panel board 1110B is made of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS).

The translucent opaque material in panel board 1110B should desirably have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to create a sufficiently bright illuminating decoration, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain the opaque material. Also, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the components located to the rear will be easily discerned, and there is a risk that the dramatic effect of concealment will not be fully achieved.

In addition, the panel board 1110B is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)) as a white color, but "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", "chalk color Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "brown color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "grayish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "indigo blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "cherry blossom color Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "white ... The color may be white, such as Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5).

Furthermore, panel board 1110B is made of high impact polystyrene (HIPS), but it may be made of "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "glass", etc. Also, panel board 1110A is made of a white-based color due to the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), but it may be made of a white-based color by adding a colorant to a transparent material.

In addition, the opaque panel board 1110B may be "one that is entirely opaque including the interior", "one that is partially opaque inside", "one that is transparent inside and at least one side is opaque", "one that is molded from opaque synthetic resin with translucency", "one that has a transparent board and an opaque board with translucency glued together", "one that has an opaque film (cell) with translucency glued to at least one side of a transparent board", "one that has been subjected to shrinkage processing with ultraviolet curing ink on the back side", "one that has been subjected to sandblasting processing on the back side of a transparent board", etc.

Also, a front sheet with excellent abrasion resistance may be attached to the front of the panel plate 1110B, similar to the game board 5B of the third embodiment. The front sheet attached to the front of the panel plate 1110B may or may not have a pattern. This allows the panel plate 1110B to be protected from the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a by the front sheet, so that an inexpensive synthetic resin with low grade abrasion resistance (here, high impact polystyrene) can be used as the material for the panel plate 1110B, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

The rear sheet 1160 is attached to the entire rear surface of the panel board 1110B of the gaming panel 1100. The rear sheet 1160 is formed from a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown in the figure, the rear sheet 1160 has a predetermined translucent pattern printed on it. By illuminating the LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170, the rear sheet 1160 can project a pattern onto the opaque white panel board 1110B.

In addition, the rear sheet 1160 (pattern) may have transparent areas, or may have opaque areas other than the front of the panel decorative substrate 1170.

In this embodiment, the materials of the rear sheet 1160 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "high impact polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", etc.

The panel decorative board 1170 is provided at the rear of two locations on the panel board 1110B of the gaming panel 1100: the area between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300, and the area in front where the guidance area 2710 is provided. The panel decorative board 1170 has a white solder resist applied to the front and rear, and is formed in white on both the front and rear. The panel decorative board 1170 has multiple LEDs 1171 mounted on the front. The multiple LEDs 1171 are high-brightness full-color LEDs.

Although not shown in the figure, the rear surface of the panel decorative board 1170 is provided with a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for illuminating the multiple LEDs 1171, and the like.

In the normal state where the multiple LEDs 1171 on the panel decorative substrate 1170 of the game board 5C of this embodiment are not illuminated, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110B is a uniformly bright white color, and the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 located at the rear are not visible from the front (player side).

When the multiple LEDs 1171 on the panel decorative board 1170 are illuminated from this normal state as the game progresses, the light is projected forward through the rear sheet 1160 and the panel board 1110B. At this time, since the rear sheet 1160 is decorated with a predetermined pattern, the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 projects the pattern onto the opaque white panel board 1110B, making the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 visible to the player.

In this way, according to the fourth embodiment of the game board 5C, the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 are illuminated according to the progress of the game (for example, according to the special lottery results drawn by the reception of game balls B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005), so that the image on the rear sheet 1160 can be projected onto the panel board 1110B. By projecting the image onto the rear surface of the game area 5a through which game balls B circulate, it is possible to show a game area 5a with an image floating up to the rear, something never seen in previous pachinko machines, which can make a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's interest, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, images are projected onto the panel 1110B as the game progresses, making the player feel as though something good is about to happen, heightening anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 projects (projects) the translucent pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B, so that the light transmittance can be varied depending on the color and ink (paint) that constitute the pattern, and therefore the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be given the same function as the main part 1151 and the specific part 1152 of the panel board 1110A in the game board 5B of the third embodiment. In detail, for example, by increasing the light transmittance of the pattern part in the rear sheet 1160 and decreasing the light transmittance of the part other than the pattern, the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 can be used to brighten the parts other than the pattern, and the pattern part can be made to shine brightly. Therefore, the game board 5C of this embodiment can also achieve the same effect as the game board 5B of the third embodiment described above.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B is white and the surface of the panel decoration board 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B is white, the color of the panel decoration board 1170 blends in with the color of the panel plate 1110B and is invisible from the front, so that the player is not aware of the presence of the panel decoration board 1170 and the rear sheet 1160 (pattern). When the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are illuminated, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel plate 1110B, so that the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be seen through the panel plate 1110B. This makes the player very surprised by noticing the presence of the rear sheet 1160 (pattern), whose existence was unforeseen, and makes the player strongly feel that a chance has arrived. In addition, the player can be shown a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the rear sheet 1160 is formed from a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, because the rear sheet 1160 is formed flat and is provided so as to contact the rear surface of the panel board 1110B, the space required for the front-to-rear direction to place the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5C) can be made as small as possible, so that it is relatively easy to secure space to place other components (e.g., a performance device, a performance display device, etc.) behind the panel board 1110B (rear sheet 1160), and a pachinko machine 1 that can show a wider variety of performances to the player can be provided.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but this is not limiting, and the rear sheet 1160 may be provided behind the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B. This reduces the amount of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 that can be seen through the panel plate 1110B, and increases the impact of the pattern when it is projected by the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 on the panel decorative substrate 1170.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided over the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but this is not limited to this, and the rear sheet 1160 may be provided on only a portion of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is translucent and the light that passes through the pattern is projected onto the panel plate 1110B, but this is not limited to the above, and the pattern may be opaque and the shadow of the pattern may be projected onto the panel plate 1110B.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided, but this is not limited to this, and the image on the rear sheet 1160 may be projected onto the panel board 1110B using light from the luminous decorative body (e.g., the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 or the rear lower front decorative body 3410) of the rear unit 3000 provided behind the rear sheet 1160 or the performance display device 1600, etc.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170 are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decorative substrate 1170, a light-emitting decorative body provided behind the panel board 1110B or a performance image of the performance display device 1600 may be projected onto the panel board 1110B. In more detail, a translucent decorative body provided behind the panel board 1110B replaces the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, and a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted to light-emittingly decorate the decorative body replaces the panel decorative substrate 1170. Alternatively, a liquid crystal panel that displays a performance image in the performance display device 1600 replaces the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, and replaces the backlight of the performance display device 1600 and the panel decorative substrate 1170. This allows for the same effects as described above, and by moving the decorations or creating animated images, the image projected on panel board 1110B moves, allowing players to see a more effective light-emitting effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110B is shown as being white-based, but this is not limited to this and it may be colored. Examples of colored boards include "red-based", "blue-based", "yellow-based", "mixed-color boards (multiple specific colors mixed together to create a single color)", and "multi-color boards (colors dispersed in a pattern such as spots, stripes, polka dots, geometric patterns, etc.)".

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a panel decorative substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel plate 1110B, and light is irradiated onto the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160), but this is not limited to this, and a decorative substrate may be provided on the outside of the side or end surface of the panel plate 1110B, and light may be irradiated onto the side or end surface of the panel plate 1110B.

In the above embodiment, the front sheet 1130 may be attached to the front of the panel board 1110B. In this case, the front sheet 1130 may be provided with a predetermined pattern that corresponds to the pattern on the rear sheet 1160. Specifically, for example, if the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 caused by the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 is projected onto the area of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 excluding the characteristic area, the pattern on the front sheet 1130 can be shown with the same brightness overall when the LEDs 1171 are not illuminated, and when the LEDs 1171 are illuminated as the game progresses, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 caused by the light from the LEDs 1171 can brighten (shine) the characteristic area of the pattern on the front sheet 1130, thereby providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a rear sheet 1160 is provided between the panel board 1110B and the panel decorative substrate 1170, but this is not limited to the above, and a projection body that can move or change shape as the game progresses may be provided between the panel board 1110B and the panel decorative substrate 1170. This allows the shadow of the projection body projected onto the game panel 1100B by the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative substrate 1170 to be moved or changed shape, greatly surprising the player and making him or her think that a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot" game state) that gives the player an advantage may occur, thereby increasing the player's expectations and preventing a decline in interest.

The above-mentioned projection object may be made movable as the game progresses between a retreated position where it is invisible from the front by the panel plate 1110B and an emerging position where it is visible from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B. As a result, when the projection object is in the retreated position, it is made invisible from the front by the opaque panel plate 1110B, and therefore when the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decorative board 1170 are not illuminated, the shadow of the projection object is not projected onto the panel plate 1110B, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the projection object. In this state, when the LED 1171 is illuminated as the game progresses, the light from the LED 1171 projects the shadow of the projection object onto the panel board 1110B, so that the shadow of the projection object can be seen by the player through the translucent panel board 1110B, and the player can be indirectly made aware of the presence of the projection object. The projection of the shadow of the projection object onto the panel board 1110B can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Then, when the projection object is moved to an appearance position where it can be seen from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110B as the game progresses, the projection object becomes directly visible through the opening 1112, so that the player can be greatly surprised and have a strong impact on the player, and can be strongly made to think that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, which can increase the player's expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when the projection object is moved between the retracted position and the emergent position, the decorative aspect of the panel board 1110B due to the shadow of the projection object projected on the panel board 1110B by the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 at the retracted position may be made different from the decorative aspect of the projection object itself (for example, the pattern applied to the projection object). Specifically, for example, if the outer shape of the projection object is the shape of the initial form of a specified character and the pattern of the final form of the character is applied to the front of the projection object, the initial form of the character is projected on the panel board 1110B by the light from the LEDs 1171 when in the retracted position, so that the player can recognize the presence of the projection object (decorative object) of the character in its initial form. Furthermore, when the projection body is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position as the game progresses, contrary to the expectation that the initial form of the character will appear, the final form of the character will appear, which can have a strong impact on the player, making them strongly believe that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player will occur, and can heighten anticipation for the game, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is used to project the shadow of the pattern on the flat rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B, but this is not limited to the above. Instead of the rear sheet 1160, a three-dimensional projection body may be provided, and the shadow of the projection body may be projected onto the panel board 1110B. In this case, if the three-dimensional projection body is made translucent, the shadow of the projection body projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the LEDs 1171 will have a shading effect, allowing the player to see the decoration of the projection body and strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, if the projection body is made of a sheet material that is formed into a three-dimensional shape by pressure forming or vacuum forming, the projection body can be made lighter than its apparent size. If the projection body is made movable according to the progress of the game, it can be moved with a small force (energy), so that a small, low-output drive source such as a drive motor or solenoid for moving the projection body can be used, the space required for driving can be relatively small, and an inexpensive drive source can be used. In addition, since the projection body can be made lighter, the projection body can be supported by a support mechanism with a relatively low rigidity, making it easier to miniaturize (save space) the support mechanism for the projection body and to make the support mechanism inexpensive. As a result, it is easier to secure space for arranging other components, and the arrangement of other components allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances, and the cost of this pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5C, which has the game area 5a in front of it through which the game balls B circulate, is made of an opaque white color with translucency, making the game area 5a appear bright and making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a easier to see. Furthermore, when light from the LEDs and performance display device 1600 provided on this pachinko machine 1, light from the lighting in the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, etc. is irradiated onto the panel board 1110B, the light is diffused by the panel board 1110B, making the panel board 1110B appear to be dimly lit and self-illuminating. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent panels as the game panel 1100, players can see a pachinko machine 1 with a self-illuminating game area 5a that they have never seen before, which strongly attracts the player's interest and makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is opaque with translucency, in a state (normal state) where the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) are not illuminated, the opaque panel plate 1110B makes the rear sheet 1160 (projection body) and the panel decoration board 1170 invisible from the front, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration board 1170. When the LEDs 1171 are illuminated from this normal state as the game progresses, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected (projected) onto the panel plate 1110B by the light from the LEDs 1171, so that the player can see the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 through the translucent panel plate 1110B, and the panel plate 1110B can be illuminated to have light and dark. In this case, since the panel board 1110B is opaque and white, the light emission color of the LED 1171 and the color of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be transmitted forward, allowing the player to enjoy a colorful light emission performance and presenting a variety of light emission performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest. In this way, the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 is projected behind the play area 5a, so the shadow can be used to decorate the play area 5a, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and making a strong impact on the player, strongly attracting the player's interest. In addition, the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, which is normally invisible, becomes visible due to the light from the LED 1171 that emits light as the game progresses, making the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing the player's expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

As described above, the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 can be made to self-illuminate by light from the outside, or the panel board 1110B can be made to emit light by light from the multiple LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170. This allows the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a to look like silhouettes due to the light from the rear panel board 1110B, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a, and allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, since the game balls B in the game area 5a can be made easier to see, it is easier to make subtle adjustments to the hitting strength of the game balls B, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which involves devising a hitting operation for the game balls B, can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, because the rear sheet 1160 is formed from a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Also, because the rear sheet 1160 is formed in a planar shape so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space required for arranging the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 in the front-to-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, it is relatively easy to secure space behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) for arranging other components (e.g., a performance device, a performance display device, etc.), and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players by showing them a wider variety of performances, and it is also possible to make the rear sheet 1160 cheaper, which reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the panel plate 1110B of the gaming panel 1100 is opaque (synthetic resin) with translucency, a lower grade synthetic resin can be used compared to when the panel plate 1110B (gaming panel 1100) is made transparent, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, because the panel board 1110B is opaque, the bases of the multiple obstacle nails N (the parts inserted into the panel board 1110B) planted in the panel board 1110B are invisible to the player, compared to when the panel board 1110B is transparent, which improves the appearance of the play area 5a.

Furthermore, because the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is white, the color of the decorative bodies provided on this pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out relatively, so the decorative effect of the decorative bodies can be made to stand out more strongly, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players can be provided. Also, because the panel plate 1110B is white, when a front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110B, the color of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 can be made to stand out more, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably achieved.

In addition, by attaching a front sheet 1130 to the front of the panel board 1110B, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel board 1110B from the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a. This makes it possible to use an inexpensive material with a low grade of wear resistance, etc., as the material for the panel board 1110B, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the panel plate 1110B of the gaming panel 1100 is opaque, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel plate 1110B is not required. In other words, with a transparent gaming panel, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the gaming panel is necessary to improve the appearance, but in this embodiment, because the panel plate 1110B is opaque, processing to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel plate 1110B is not required. As a result, compared to when the gaming panel (panel plate) is made transparent, there is no need to provide a separate member to hide the wiring, etc. behind the panel plate 1110B or to devise a way to route the wiring, etc. so that it is difficult to see, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[11. Detailed configuration of winning slots on game board]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning hole in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 184 to 189. Fig. 184(a) is a plan view showing the configuration of the winning hole in the game board, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of (a). Fig. 185(a) is a side cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the winning hole in this embodiment, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a conventional winning hole. Figs. 186(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning hole in which a different embodiment of a guide piece part is provided in a winning hole in which the ball entrance direction is inclined, Figs. 187(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning hole in which a further different embodiment of a guide piece part is provided, and Figs. 188(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning hole in which a further different embodiment of a guide piece part is provided. Fig. 189 is a perspective view showing a conventional winning hole in which the ball entrance direction is inclined.

The following describes in detail the relationship between the upstream passage section 2031 and downstream passage section 2032 that constitute the winning port unit 2030 having the winning port 2015, and the configuration of the guide piece section 2035 or guide piece section 2050 provided in the winning port 2015 or winning port 2016. The winning port 2015 or winning port 2016 can be applied to the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the normal winning port 2008, the sub-out port, etc. In addition to the winning port unit 2030, the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 can also be applied to the guide passage or discharge passage through which the game ball B flows.

[11-1. Relationship between the upstream passage portion and the downstream passage portion]
First, the relationship between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 in the winning port unit 2030 having the winning port 2015 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 184. Note that Fig. 184(b) shows only a cut end surface. The winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment has an upstream passage section 2031 having the winning port 2015 and capable of receiving the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a and changing the flow direction to the rear, and a downstream passage section 2032 provided behind the upstream passage section 2031 and capable of circulating the game ball B received in the winning port 2015.

The upstream passage section 2031 has a box-shaped (container-shaped) upstream main body 2031a that is open at the top and rear, and a rib-shaped guide piece section 2035 that stands upward from the center in the left-right direction of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a. The upstream main body 2031a is formed to a size that allows only one game ball B to enter. The upper end surface of the guide piece section 2035 is highest at the front end and is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear. The rear end of the guide piece section 2035 is higher than the top surface of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a.

The upper end surface (tip surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 is bent in the middle in the front-to-rear direction so that the inclination angle changes. More specifically, the guide piece portion 2035 is bent such that the front part of the bend is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal, and the rear part of the bend is gently inclined at an angle of 5 degrees to the horizontal. The part of the guide piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a steep angle (steep piece portion 2035a) is formed in a triangular shape (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle) in a side view, and is a change piece portion that changes the flow direction of the game ball B to the rear. On the other hand, the part of the guide piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a gentle angle (slow piece portion 2035b) is a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B to the rear. For this reason, the upstream passage section 2031 can use the guide piece section 2035 to guide the game ball B that enters the upstream main body 2031a from above to the downstream passage section 2032 located at the rear.

In the winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031 has a triangular shape on the side surface of the front portion, which is a bent straight line. This makes it possible to shorten the length of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the front-rear direction compared to when the front portion is an arc shape. This makes it possible to shorten the guide distance (rolling distance) of the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning port 2015 until it is guided rearward as much as possible, so that the game ball B can be guided rearward quickly, preventing the game ball B from stagnation and making it less likely for ball clogging to occur, and also makes it possible to increase the number of game balls B accepted by the winning port 2015 per unit time, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more enjoyable for players.

The downstream passage section 2032 has a gutter-shaped downstream body 2032a that is open in the front-rear direction and upward, and a flat flange section 2032b that extends left-right and downward from the front end of the downstream body 2032a. The bottom of the downstream body 2032a is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The downstream body 2032a is formed so that the internal left-right width w1 is larger than the internal left-right width w2 of the upstream body 2031a of the upstream passage section 2031 (see Figure 184 (a)). The flange section 2032b is attached to the game panel 1100 by abutting the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) against the rear surface.

However, when the flow path through which the game ball B flows is formed by multiple passage sections, as in the winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment, if the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are set to be the same height at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 on the upstream side and the downstream passage section 2032 on the downstream side when assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), there is a risk that a step (also called a reverse step) will occur in which the downstream passage section 2032 is higher than the upstream passage section 2031 due to manufacturing errors (errors or tolerances), assembly errors, etc. of the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032. Furthermore, if a reverse step occurs between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, there is a risk of malfunctions such as game ball B becoming stagnant due to the reverse step, causing ball clogging, or game ball B bouncing upstream due to the reverse step, flowing back through the upstream passage section 2031 and being discharged from the entrance of the upstream passage section 2031, invalidating any winnings.

In contrast, the winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment is formed so that, when assembled, a step G is formed at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, where the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher than the downstream passage portion. In more detail, a step 2033 (see FIG. 184 (b)) is formed between the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2031b and the front end of the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a, where the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher. As a result, a step 2033 is formed between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, where the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher, so that even if there are manufacturing errors or assembly errors in the upstream passage portion 2031 or the downstream passage portion 2032, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a reverse step where the downstream passage portion 2032 is higher. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as ball clogging due to the reverse step and invalidation of winning due to the backflow of the game ball B.

Incidentally, it is desirable that the height G of the step 2033 between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 is within the range of 0.5 mm to 5 mm, preferably within the range of 0.5 mm to 1 mm. The reason for setting the height G of the step 2033 within this range is that if the height G of the step 2033 is smaller than the above range, depending on the manufacturing errors of the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, the assembly errors of the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, etc., a reverse step in which the downstream main body 2032a side is higher will be generated, and the flow of the game ball B will be hindered by the reverse step, which may cause ball clogging, or the game ball B that has entered the winning port 2015 may flow back and be discharged from the winning port 2015, making the winning invalid. On the other hand, if the height G of the step 2033 is larger than the above range, the game ball B from the upstream passage section 2031 will be more likely to bounce off the bottom of the downstream passage section 2032, and the game ball B may fly out from the open upper end side of the downstream passage section 2032 to the outside, or the game ball B may move wildly in the downstream passage section 2032, causing circulation to be halted and resulting in ball clogging, or the vertical dimensions of the winning port unit 2030 may become unnecessarily large. As described above, in this embodiment, the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are made of separate members, so a significant effect can be expected because of the influence of installation errors, etc. Even if the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are integrally constructed, the step 2033 can be expected to have the effect of preventing the game ball B from flowing back.

In the above embodiment, the steep piece portion 2035a of the guide piece portion 2035 has a triangular side shape, but this is not limited to this and may be an arc shape.

In the above embodiment, the game ball B flows (rolls) along the bottom of the downstream body 2032a of the downstream passage section 2032, but this is not limited thereto. The downstream passage section 2032 may be provided with a guide rib (guide piece portion) that protrudes upward from the bottom of the downstream body 2032a and extends in the front-to-rear direction so that the rear is lower, and the game ball B rolls along the upper end surface. When the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage section 2032, the front end of the guide rib is set lower than the rear end of the upstream passage section 2031 (guide piece portion 2035). When the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage section 2032, the bottom of the downstream body 2032a may be formed horizontally.

In the above embodiment, the rear end edge of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031 is shown as a pin angle, but this is not limited to this, and a chamfer such as a C chamfer or R chamfer may be provided on the rear end edge of the upper end surface. This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging due to plating pools when plating is performed on the upstream passage portion 2031. In detail, if a plating pool is formed on the rear end edge of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, the plating pool also bulges upward, so there is a risk of ball clogging occurring when the game ball B gets caught in the plating pool. In response to this, by providing a chamfer on the rear end edge, the plating (plating liquid) can be released downward to make it difficult for a plating pool to be formed, and even if a plating pool is formed, the plating pool can be prevented from bulging upward from the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, preventing ball clogging due to plating pools.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the downstream passage section 2032 is shown as being attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), but this is not limited thereto, and the upstream passage section 2031 may have its rear end extending rearward of the gaming panel 1100, and the downstream passage section 2032 may be a ball guide member (or ball discharge member) provided rearward of the gaming panel 1100.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning port unit 2030 is formed by the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, but this is not limited to this, and the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 may also form a guide passage or a discharge passage through which the game ball B flows.

[11-2. Preventing balls from clogging the prize hole]
Next, the prevention of ball clogging in the winning opening 2015 (winning opening unit 2030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 185. The winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the winning opening unit 2030 of FIG. 185, and is composed of an upstream passage section 2031 and a downstream passage section 2032. The winning opening 2015 opens upward in the game area 5a so as to be able to receive the game ball B. This winning opening unit 2030 has a guide piece section 2035 for guiding the received game ball B backward. The guide piece section 2035 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent in the middle in the front-rear direction so that the inclination angle changes.

The guide piece portion 2035 has a steep piece portion 2035a at the front of the bend that is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees from the horizontal, and a loose piece portion 2035b at the rear of the bend that is gently inclined at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal. The steep piece portion 2035a in the guide piece portion 2035 is formed in a triangular shape (roughly a right-angled isosceles triangle) when viewed from the side, and serves as a change piece portion that changes the flow direction of the game ball B to the rear. On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2035b in the guide piece portion 2035 serves as a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B to the rear.

Therefore, when game ball B enters winning opening 2015 from above, it first comes into contact with steep piece portion 2035a of guide piece portion 2035, and the inclination of steep piece portion 2035a changes the flow direction of game ball B from below to the rear so that game ball B is reflected. Then, game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by steep piece portion 2035a, is guided rearward by loose piece portion 2035b. This allows game ball B to be quickly guided rearward from the entrance of winning opening 2035.

In the winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185(a), the guide piece portion 2035 is formed so that the center of the game ball B, which is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035, is located a distance forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) that constitutes the rear end of the winning port 2015, that is shorter than the radius of the game ball B.

Meanwhile, a winning port unit 2901 having a conventional winning port 2900 has a guide piece portion 2902 for guiding an accepted game ball B rearward, as shown in FIG. 185(b). The guide piece portion 2902 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent midway in the front-to-rear direction so that the inclination angle changes. In more detail, the guide piece portion 2902 has a steep piece portion 2902a with a steep incline, and a gentle piece portion 2902b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2902a and inclines rearward more gently than the steep piece portion 2902a.

In the guide piece portion 2902 of such a conventional winning port unit 2901, the center of the game ball B in contact with the sharp piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b is located forward of the radius of the game ball B from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) that forms the rear end of the winning port 2900. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the game ball B in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 from above abuts against the game ball B in contact with the sharp piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b, the load from the upper game ball B acts on the lower game ball B in a forward direction, and the lower game ball B cannot move backward, causing a ball jam (ball jamming). The occurrence of ball jamming at the winning port 2900 may cause discomfort to the player and reduce interest in the game.

In contrast, as described above, the winning port unit 2030 of this embodiment is designed so that the center of game ball B that is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035 is located a distance forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is shorter than the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, when a game ball B that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 from above abuts a game ball B that is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035, a backward force acts on the lower game ball B due to the load from the upper game ball B, and this force moves the lower game ball B backward, so that game ball B does not get stuck on the guide piece portion 2035. Therefore, ball jamming will not occur in the winning slot 2015, which can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable due to ball jamming, allowing players to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the downstream passage section 2032 has a flange section 2032b that does not extend above the winning opening 2015 in a front view. However, this is not limited to this, and the downstream passage section 2032 may have a flat flange section 2032b that extends to a portion directly above the winning opening 2015 on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 in a front view. In this case, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with both the sharp piece section 2035a and the loose piece section 2035b of the guide piece section 2035 is positioned forward from the front surface of the flange section at a distance shorter than the radius of the game ball B.

[11-3. Detailed configuration of the winning hole with an inclined ball entry direction]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning port unit 2040 having the winning port 2016 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 186 to 189. The winning port 2016 of this embodiment is capable of receiving the game ball B in the game area 5a. The winning port unit 2040 has a flat front plate portion 2041 provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a gutter-shaped receiving portion 2042 extending rearward from the front plate portion 2041 and opening obliquely upward and rearward, a flat flange portion 2043 extending outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 and capable of abutting against the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a gutter-shaped rearward extending portion 2044 extending rearward from the flange portion 2043 so as to be continuous with the receiving portion 2042. This winning opening unit 2040 forms the winning opening 2016 with a front plate portion 2041 and a receiving portion 2042 .

The winning port unit 2040 also has a guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B received in the winning port 2016 backward. The guide piece portion 2050 has a change piece portion 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B that entered the winning port 2016 backward, and a rear piece portion 2052 that guides the game ball B backward. The change piece portion 2051 is provided so that the tip surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts faces in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the game ball B in the winning port 2016. The rear piece portion 2052 is provided so that the tip surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts faces in a direction different from the ball entry direction (including the opposite direction).

In the conventional winning opening 2910 in which the ball B enters in a tilted direction relative to the vertical, as shown in FIG. 189, a guide piece 2911 for guiding the ball B received in the winning opening 2910 backward is erected vertically. Therefore, when the ball B enters the winning opening 2910 from diagonally above, the ball B is likely to come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the top face and the side face of the guide piece 2911, the side face of the guide piece 2911, etc., and the ball B's contact causes a force to act on the guide piece 2911 in a direction different from the erected direction, which causes the guide piece 2911 to fatigue early and become easily damaged. When the guide piece 2911 is damaged, the broken pieces cause balls to jam, forcing the player to stop playing, which reduces the player's interest.

In contrast, in the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has a changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball clogging does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball clogging, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, a specific embodiment of the winning port unit 2040 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(a) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The guide piece portion 2050 extends upward from the lowest part of the semicircular arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extension portion 2044 is gutter-shaped and open upward, and the bottom surface is curved in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

This winning port unit 2040 further has a rear guide piece portion 2045 that extends upward from the lowest point on the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044 and slopes so that its upper end surface becomes lower as it approaches the rear. The rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided directly behind the guide piece portion 2050, and the front end of its upper end surface is located lower than the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050, and extends back and forth from the front end to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044. As a result, in the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, a step is formed between the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045, with the guide piece portion 2050 side being higher.

This winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050 formed integrally, as well as a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045 formed integrally, with the receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) being separate members.

The guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port unit 2040 in this embodiment is erected vertically upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and the portion from the front end to a specified range rearward bends and extends upward in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the winning port 2016 (the direction of the arrow in the figure). In this embodiment, the portion of the guide piece portion 2050 that bends and extends in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction is called the change piece portion 2051, and the portion further back is called the rear piece portion 2052.

The upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 of the guiding piece portion 2050 is inclined from the rear end of the changing piece portion 2051 so as to be lower at a gentler angle than the upper surface of the changing piece portion 2051, and then bends midway in the front-to-rear direction so that the inclination becomes even gentler. As a result, the upper end surface of the guiding piece portion 2050 is bent in two stages from the front end side so that the inclination becomes gentler.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 186(a), when a game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along a ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical, it abuts against the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2051 of the guide piece 2050, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction, and the game ball rolls rearward on the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 that is connected to the rear end of the changeable piece 2051. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning port 2016 to be smoothly and quickly guided rearward.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball jamming does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Next, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extension portion 2044 has a bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extension portion 2044, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher. In this embodiment, two guide pieces 2050 are provided. This winning port unit 2040 is formed as a single unit.

The two guide pieces 2050 are provided on both sides of the center line of the winning opening 2016, which is parallel to the ball entry direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) of the game ball B. The guide piece 2050 above the center line extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate 2041 to a position forward of the rear end of the receiving part 2042, and extends upward (to the entrance side) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction from the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042. The upper end surface of this upper guide piece 2050 is inclined so that the front end side becomes lower as it goes rearward from a position below the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (the upper end edge of the front plate 2041), and the rear end coincides with the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042. The guide piece 2050 has a triangular side shape (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle shape), and has only a change piece 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B.

On the other hand, the guide piece portion 2050 below the center line extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044, and extends vertically upward from the lowest part of the semicircularly curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the rear extension portion 2044, and then bends halfway to extend upward (towards the entrance) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction. The part of the lower guide piece portion 2050 in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction is located symmetrically to the upper guide piece portion 2050 with respect to the center line of the winning opening 2016, and its upper end surface is formed on the same plane as the upper end surface of the upper guide piece portion 2050. Therefore, in the lower guide piece portion 2050, the portion facing (parallel to) the ball entry direction is the change piece portion 2051, and the portion erected vertically to the rear of that is the rear piece portion 2052, and the upper end surface is twisted between the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion 2052. The rear end of the upper end surface of this guide piece portion 2050 is located above the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044.

For the reasons described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the prize winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment has two changeable piece portions 2051 and one rear piece portion 2052, and one of the two changeable piece portions 2051 is integrally continuous with the rear piece portion 2052.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 186(b), when a game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along a ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical direction, it abuts against the upper end surface of each of the changeable pieces 2051 of the two guide pieces 2050 that are provided in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction, and the ball's flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction. Then, the game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by the changeable piece 2051, rolls rearward on the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 of the lower guide piece 2050. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning port 2016 to be smoothly and quickly guided rearward.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball jamming does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, two changeable pieces 2051 are provided that extend in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 abuts against the two changeable pieces 2051. This reduces the impact caused by the game ball B abutting against one of the changeable pieces 2051, increases the durability of the changeable piece 2051 (guiding piece 2050), and allows this winning port 2016 to be applied to winning ports into which a larger number of game balls B enter.

Next, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(a) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 has a part of its bottom surface curved in an arc shape to make it lower. The flange portion 2043 has a rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 abutting against its front surface, and an opening 2043a is formed at a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042, which is large enough for the game ball B to pass through. The lower end of the opening 2043a of this flange portion 2043 is located lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening 2043a, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher. The rear extension portion 2044 has a part of its bottom surface curved in an arc shape to make it lower, and is located at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 and the rear extension portion 2044, with the flange portion 2043 being higher.

This winning slot unit 2040 further has a pair of rear guide pieces 2045 on either side of the lowest point of the rear extension 2044, which are inclined downward toward the rear. The pair of rear guide pieces 2045 extend forward and backward from a portion on the same plane as the front surface of the flange 2043 to a portion rearward of the rear end of the rear extension 2044. The front ends of the upper end surfaces of the pair of rear guide pieces 2045 protrude into the opening 2043a of the flange 2043 at a height lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

This winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050 formed integrally, as well as a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045 formed integrally, with the receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) being separate members.

The winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guide pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guide piece 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate 2041 to a portion forward of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends from a portion facing the ball entry direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction to a portion near the entrance of the winning port 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042). The upper end surface of the guide piece 2050 extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction is inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base side) that contacts the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. Therefore, the shape of the side of this guide piece 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, forming a change piece 2051 that can change the flow direction of the game ball B that enters the winning hole 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear.

Meanwhile, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and also extends vertically upward from the lowest part of the arc-shaped curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The upper end surface of this guide piece portion 2050 is inclined at a gentle angle to the horizontal so that it slopes downward toward the rear, forming a rear piece portion 2052 that can guide the game ball B rearward. The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. This rear piece portion 2052 is positioned forward between the pair of rear guide piece portions 2045.

For the reasons described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port unit 2040 in this embodiment is provided with a change piece portion 2051 and a rear piece portion 2052, which are provided separately.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 187(a), when the game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along the ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical direction, it abuts against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece 2051, which is provided in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the two guide pieces 2050, and the ball's flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning port 2016 more than directly above the rear piece 2052, which is the remaining guide piece 2050 at the bottom, the game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by the change piece 2051, abuts against the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052 and rolls rearward on the upper end surface. Then, the game ball B that rolls on the rear piece 2052 rolls backward from the rear end of the rear piece 2052, straddling the pair of rear guide pieces 2045. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 to be smoothly and quickly guided backward, and can be straightened backward by the pair of rear guide pieces 2045.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball clogging does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball clogging, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a portion (upper end side) of the changeable piece 2051 extends toward the entrance of the winning hole 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2051 intersects with the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052), so that the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning hole 2016 can be guided rearward by the rear piece 2052 while the changeable piece 2051 changes its flow direction. This allows the game ball B to be guided rearward in good condition even if the ball's entry direction into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, even when the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045, which are provided at the front and rear, are positioned at different positions and are not continuous, as in the case of the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end face of the rear rear guide piece portion 2045 on the rear side is configured lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, so that it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B downward.

Next, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with the bottom surface curved in a semicircular arc, and is formed into an inclined U-shape when viewed from the front. The rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 abuts against the front surface of the flange portion 2043, and an opening 2043a cut out in a U-shape with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through is formed at a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042. The lower end of the opening 2043a of this flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening 2043a, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher.

The rear extension 2044 is J-shaped when viewed from the front, and its bottom surface is curved in a semicircular arc with a radius larger than the radius of the U-shaped portion of the opening 2043a of the flange 2043, and is located lower than the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange 2043. As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange 2043 and the rear extension 2044, with the flange 2043 side being higher.

This winning slot unit 2040 further has a rear guide piece 2045 that extends upward from the lowest point on the bottom surface of the rear extension 2044 and slopes so that its upper end surface becomes lower as it extends rearward. The rear guide piece 2045 extends forward and backward from the same point as the front surface of the flange 2043 to the rear end of the rear extension 2044. In addition, the front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece 2045 extends upward to the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and protrudes into the opening 2043a of the flange 2043.

This winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050 formed integrally, as well as a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045 formed integrally, with the receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) being separate members.

The winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guide pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. One guide piece 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends from a portion facing the ball entrance direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 to a portion near the entrance of the winning port 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entrance direction. The upper end surface (tip surface) of the guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entrance direction is inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base side) that contacts the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. Therefore, the shape of the side of this guide piece 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, forming a change piece 2051 that can change the flow direction of the game ball B that enters the winning hole 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear.

Meanwhile, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends upward from a portion opposite the changeable piece portion 2051 from the lowest portion of the arc-shaped curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The upper end surface (tip surface) of this guide piece portion 2050 is inclined at a gentle angle to the horizontal so that it is lower toward the rear, forming a rear piece portion 2052 that can guide the game ball B rearward. The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. This rear piece portion 2052 is provided lower than the changeable piece portion 2051.

For the reasons described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port unit 2040 in this embodiment is provided with a change piece portion 2051 and a rear piece portion 2052, which are provided separately.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 187(b), when the game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along the ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical direction, it abuts against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece 2051, which is provided in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction of the two guide pieces 2050, and the ball's flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning port 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052, which is the remaining guide piece 2050 at the bottom, the game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by the change piece 2051, abuts against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the rear piece 2052 below the change piece 2051, and rolls backward.

At this time, because the rear piece 2052 is located on the opposite side of the changeable piece 2051 with the lowest part of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 in between, the game ball B rolls backward while abutting against both the changeable piece 2051 and the rear piece 2052. This prevents the game ball B from swinging left and right, and straightens it out backward. The game ball B that has been guided backward will then roll backward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 along the upper end surface of the rear guide piece 2045. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 to be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball clogging does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball clogging, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a portion (upper end side) of the changeable piece 2051 extends toward the entrance of the winning hole 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2051 intersects with the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052), so that the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning hole 2016 can be guided rearward by the rear piece 2052 while the changeable piece 2051 changes its flow direction. This allows the game ball B to be guided rearward in good condition even if the ball's entry direction into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, even when the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045, which are provided at the front and rear, are positioned at different positions and are not continuous, as in the case of the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end face of the rear rear guide piece portion 2045 on the rear side is configured lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, so that it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B downward.

Next, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(a) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 has a portion of its bottom surface curved in an arc shape to make it lower. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The front end surface of the rear extension portion 2044 abuts against the rear surface of the flange portion 2043. The rear extension portion 2044 also has a bottom surface curved in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is located at a lower position than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As a result, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044, with the receiving portion 2042 side being higher.

This winning port unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest point of the rear extension portion 2044, and further has a rear guide piece portion 2045 that extends forward and backward over the entire length of the rear extension portion 2044. The upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is gently inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is at approximately the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042.

This winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, a guide piece portion 2050, and a flange portion 2043 that are integrally formed, as well as a rear extension portion 2044 and a rear guide piece portion 2045 that are integrally formed, with the receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the rear extension portion 2044 side (downstream passage portion side) being separate members.

The winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with multiple (three in this embodiment) guide pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. Each guide piece 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate 2041 to a portion forward of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and extends from a portion facing the ball entrance direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 to a portion near the entrance of the winning port 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entrance direction. The upper end surface (tip surface) of the guide piece portion 2050 extending in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entrance direction is inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base side) that contacts the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. Therefore, the shape of the side of this guide piece 2050 is formed into a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, forming a change piece 2051 that can change the flow direction of the game ball B that enters the winning hole 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear.

Meanwhile, the remaining guide piece portions 2050 extend forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the same position as the rear surface of the flange portion 2043, and also extend vertically upward from both the left and right sides of the lowest part of the arc-shaped curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The upper end surfaces (tip surfaces) of the pair of guide piece portions 2050 are inclined at a gentle angle to the horizontal so that they are lower toward the rear, forming rear piece portions 2052 that can guide the game ball B rearward. The entire rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. The pair of rear piece portions 2052 are arranged so that the part between them is located in front of the rear guide piece portion 2045.

For the reasons described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port unit 2040 in this embodiment is provided with one change piece portion 2051 and two (a pair) rear pieces 2052, which are provided separately.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 188(a), when the game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along the ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical direction, it abuts against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece 2051 provided in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a rearward and downward direction. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning port 2016 more than directly above the pair of lower rear pieces 2052, part of which is the remaining guide piece 2050, the game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by the change piece 2051, abuts against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the pair of rear pieces 2052 and rolls backward while straddling the pair of rear pieces 2052. This pair of rear pieces 2052 allows the game ball B to be straightened backward. The game ball B guided rearward rolls rearward from the rear ends of the pair of rear pieces 2052 along the upper end surface of the rear guide piece 2045. This allows the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 to be guided rearward smoothly and quickly.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball jamming does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, a portion (upper end side) of the changeable piece 2051 extends toward the entrance of the winning hole 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052 (in a plan view, the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2051 intersects with the upper end surface of the rear piece 2052), so that the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning hole 2016 can be guided rearward by the rear piece 2052 while the changeable piece 2051 changes its flow direction. This allows the game ball B to be guided rearward in good condition even if the ball's entry direction into the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, even when the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045, which are provided at the front and rear, are positioned at different positions and are not continuous, as in the case of the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end face of the rear rear guide piece portion 2045 on the rear side is configured lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, so that it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B downward.

Next, the winning port unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of this winning port unit 2040 has a side wall 2042a that stands vertically so as to face the winning port 2016. The bottom surface of this receiving portion 2042 is formed in a flat shape and gently slopes downward toward the rear. The guide piece portion 2050 is provided within the receiving portion 2042. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042. The rear extension portion 2044 extends rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2043.

This winning port unit 2040 is erected vertically upward from the bottom surface of the rear extension 2044, and the upper end surface is gently inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear, and further has a rear guide piece 2045 that extends forward and backward over the entire length of the rear extension 2044. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece 2045 is located at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. In this embodiment, a pair of rear guide piece parts 2045 are provided at the winning port 2016 on the left side of the paper in Figure 188, and one rear guide piece part 2045 is provided at the winning port 2016 on the right side.

This winning slot unit 2040 is integrally formed with a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, a guide piece portion 2050, a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045.

The guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion forward of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and also extends from the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042 in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction to a portion near the entrance of the winning port 2016. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) that is inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base side) that contacts the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is formed in a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and serves as a change piece portion 2051 that can change the flow direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning port 2016 from the ball entry direction to the rear.

In the winning port unit 2040 of FIG. 188(b), when the game ball B enters the winning port 2016 along the ball entry direction that is inclined relative to the vertical direction, it abuts against the tip surface (upper end surface) of the change piece 2051 provided in the direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entry direction, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to a direction rearward and downward. Because the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 that is gently inclined toward the rear is provided below this change piece 2051, the game ball B whose flow direction has been changed to the rear by the change piece 2051 abuts against the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 and rolls backward. Then, the game ball B that rolls backward on the bottom surface of the receiving part 2042 rolls backward from the rear end of the receiving part 2042, straddling a pair of rear guide pieces 2045, or on the upper end surface of one of the rear guide pieces 2045. This allows the game ball B that has entered (been accepted into) the winning opening 2016 to be guided smoothly and quickly backwards.

In this way, according to the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward has the changeable piece portion 2051 that extends in a direction opposite (parallel) to the ball entry direction into the winning port 2016, so that the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can abut against the tip surface (upper end surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051. As a result, the game ball B does not abut against the corner edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and it is possible to prevent the guide piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged by early fatigue caused by the game ball B abutting against the corner edge or side surface, so that ball jamming does not occur due to broken pieces of the broken guide piece portion 2050, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to ball jamming, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, as in the winning port unit 2040 of this embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045, which is rearward of the receiving portion 2042, is configured to be lower than the portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 where the game ball B rolls, so that it does not interfere with the flow of the game ball B.

In the above embodiment, the modified piece portion 2051 of the guide piece portion 2050 has a triangular side, i.e., the upper end surface (tip edge) is a straight, flat surface, but this is not limited to this, and the upper end surface (tip edge) may also be a curved surface that is curved in an arc shape.

Incidentally, when the opening 2043a in the flange portion 2043 through which the game ball B passes is a through hole, as in the winning opening 2016 shown in FIG. 187(a), that is, when the flange portion 2043 extends upward from the winning opening 2016 in a front view and has an opening 2043a consisting of a through hole through which the game ball B passes, it is desirable to make the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 (or the steep piece portion) in the guide piece portion 2050 a curved surface that is curved in an arc shape, regardless of whether the ball entry direction into the winning opening 2016 is vertical or inclined relative to the vertical.

In detail, if the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is a through hole, the rear end side of the entrance of the winning opening 2016 will be at the flange portion 2043 abutting the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), so that the rear end of the entrance of the winning opening 2016 will be positioned forward by the thickness of the flange portion 2043, and the fore-aft dimension of the winning opening 2016 will be reduced by the thickness of the flange portion 2043. If such a winning opening 2016 is provided with a changeable piece 2051 having a triangular side and a flat upper end surface (tip surface), the distance from the upper end of the opening 2043a to the changeable piece 2051 (guiding piece 2050) becomes shorter and then longer as it moves downward from the upper end of the changeable piece 2051, so that the size of the flow path of the game ball B becomes partially narrow, which inhibits the rapid flow of the game ball B, and there is a risk of the game ball B being stagnated or becoming clogged. In contrast, if the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece 2051 is a curved surface that is curved to be concave in an arc, the distance from the upper end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 to the changeable piece 2051 (guiding piece 2050) hardly changes even when moving downward from the upper end of the changeable piece 2051, and the size of the flow path of the game ball B can be kept approximately constant. This allows the circulation of game balls B that have entered (accepted) the winning port 2016 to be circulated quickly without restricting the circulation of game balls B, thereby making it possible to avoid the occurrence of stagnation or clogging of game balls B.

Note that, for the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning opening 2016 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined relative to the vertical direction as described above, a guide piece portion 2035 having a ball jamming prevention function as shown in FIG. 185 may be applied. This makes it possible to prevent ball jamming even in the winning opening 2016 in which the ball entry direction is inclined.

[12. Relationship between the front unit and the game panel on the game board]
Next, the relationship (attachment relationship) between the front unit 2000 and the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 190 to 192. Figure 190(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the starting hole unit and the center role in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the positioning pin and the mounting hole and the game panel in (a) in an enlarged cross section. Figure 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the positioning pin portion in the front unit of yet another embodiment in a cross section. Figure 192(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the positioning pin portion in the front unit of yet another embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cross section of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the portion of (b) is abutted against the game panel in a cross section. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration as those in the above-mentioned embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 190(a), the starting hole unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in this embodiment extends flatly to the left and right with the first starting hole 2004 in between, and has a flange portion 2103 that abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The starting hole unit 2100 also has a mounting hole 2106 for mounting the starting hole unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2107 for positioning the starting hole unit 2100 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100.

The mounting holes 2106 are countersunk holes (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrate the flange portion 2103 from front to rear. The positioning pin 2107 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2103 in a cylindrical shape, and has a conical tip. The mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 of the starting port unit 2100 are grouped together such that the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 5 mm to 8 mm). In the left and right flange portions 2103, the two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 are provided symmetrically on the left and right sides of the vertical center line CL that passes through the left-right center of the first starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, the center gadget 2500 of the front unit 2000 is formed in a frame shape as a whole, and has a flat flange portion 2502 that abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a mounting hole 2504 for mounting the center gadget 2500 to the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2505 for positioning the center gadget 2500 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100.

The mounting hole 2504 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2502 from front to rear. The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 in a cylindrical shape, and has a conical tip. The mounting hole 2504 and positioning pin 2505 of the center part 2500 are grouped together such that the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 5 mm to 8 mm).

The center device 2500 also has a stage 2513 at the bottom edge of the frame, which rolls the game ball B in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. This center device 2500 also has a flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, and two sets of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on both the left and right sides of the flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, with the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in between.

The two sets of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 provided below the stage 2513 in the center role 2500 are provided in positions symmetrical to the left and right center of the central release section 2513a, i.e., the center line CL passing through the left and right center of the first starting hole 2004. Although not shown in the figure, the center line CL passes through the center between two obstacle nails N (so-called navel nails) planted directly above the first starting hole 2004.

In this embodiment, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) are provided at symmetrical positions on the left and right sides of the center line CL that passes through the centers of parts that affect play, such as the first starting hole 2004, the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, and the navel nail. As a result, by inserting the positioning pins 2107 and positioning pins 2505 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the center gimmick 2500 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the first starting hole 2004 and the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 can be accurately positioned at a specific position (on the center line CL) within the play area 5a. This allows the probability that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 will be received by the first starting port 2004 below to be within a desired range, thereby reducing variation between game boards 5 (products) as much as possible.

In addition, because the positioning pins 2107 and 2505 are arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the center line CL, even if the game panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100, and the center device 2500, etc., expand and contract and deform due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the center of the first starting port 2004 and the center release section 2513a can be maintained on the center line CL, and it is possible to avoid changes in the probability of receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004.

In addition, since the center role 2500 has multiple positioning pins 2505, when the center role 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100 to position the center role 2500. This prevents the center role 2500 from moving or floating away from the game panel 1100 when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, making the installation work easier. In addition, even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened, the center role 2500 does not move slightly, and the center role 2500 can be reliably attached to a specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a member such as a front plate portion that is spaced forward from the flange portion 2502 is not provided in front of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 extends rearward. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided in the rear portion of the flange portion 2502 where the front plate portion that is spaced forward from the flange portion 2502 is provided. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, when inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the front plate portion does not get in the way, and the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably pushed into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 by pressing the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided. Note that in a portion where the operator's finger can be inserted between the flange portion 2502 and the front plate portion, the positioning pin 2505 may be provided in a portion that is rear of the front plate portion.

In the above embodiment, the two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) are applied to the first starting opening 2004 (central release section 2513a of stage 2513), but this is not limited to this, and they may also be applied to the general winning opening 2001, gate 2002, variable winning opening 2003, second starting opening 2005, first large winning opening 2006, second large winning opening 2007, and normal winning opening 2008, etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 191, an embodiment different from the above will be described in terms of the portion of the center part 2500 where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided. In this embodiment, the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center part 2500 has a groove portion 2506 that is recessed forward so as to surround the outer periphery of the positioning pin 2505 at the base portion of the positioning pin 2505 that protrudes rearward.

However, when the center role 2500 is formed by injection molding or the like, it becomes easy for the base of the positioning pin 2505 to have a radius, which makes the base of the positioning pin 2505 thicker. If an attempt is made to insert the positioning pin 2505 with a radius at its base into the positioning hole 2505 of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the thickened part at the base cannot enter the positioning hole 1117, and the insertion of the positioning pin 2505 stops halfway, which raises the risk of the center role 2500 being attached to the gaming panel 1100 with the positioning pin 2505 not being fully inserted (a gap between the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 and the front surface of the gaming panel 1100). In addition, a decorative or protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and when the positioning holes 1117, etc. are formed in the gaming panel 1100, burrs may occur on the front edge of the positioning holes 1117, etc. If the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 when burrs have occurred on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117, the burrs may be caught between the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, and the center gimmick 2500 may be attached to the gaming panel 1100 with the positioning pin 2505 not fully inserted. As described above, if the positioning pin 2505 is not fully inserted, the positioning effect may not be fully exerted, and the above-mentioned action and effect may not be obtained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange portion 2502, so that the base of the positioning pin 2505 becomes the bottom of the groove portion 2506 forward of the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 has an R, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 rearward of the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 does not become thicker, so that the thickness (diameter) of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be fully inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 abuts against the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. Furthermore, even if a burr occurs on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove portion 2506, so that it is possible to prevent the burr from being caught between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, and the positioning pin 2505 can be fully inserted into the positioning hole 1117. As a result, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be provided.

Even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 has an R, the thickened portion due to the R can be moved forward of the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 due to the presence of the groove portion 2506, so that the thickened portion of the base of the positioning pin 2505 does not cause incomplete insertion into the positioning hole 1117, resulting in no gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. Also, since the burrs on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 can be accommodated in the groove portion 2506, no gap is created between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 due to the burrs at the mounting hole 2504 of the flange portion 2502. Therefore, the center role 2500 will not be attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, and the center role 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 will not rattle.

Furthermore, a groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, so that during injection molding of the center part 2500, the occurrence of sink marks in the front side of the flange portion 2502 can be suppressed when the molten resin hardens due to differences in plate thickness caused by the presence of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange portion 2502.

In the above embodiment, the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 of the center gimmick 2500, but this is not limited to this. The groove may be provided on a member attached to the front of the game panel 1100, such as the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the gate member 2600, etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 192, an embodiment that is different from the above in the area where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided in the center part 2500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 192, this embodiment has a seat part 2507 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange part 2502 of the center part 2500. The rear surface of this seat part 2507 is formed as a flat surface that is parallel to the rear surface of the flange part 2502.

A pair of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided in the seating portion 2507. In other words, the seating portion 2507 is provided so as to surround the pair of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505. Therefore, the outer shape of the seating portion 2507 is teardrop-shaped. The seating portion 2507 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 by a predetermined length (for example, in the range of 0.2 mm to 1 mm).

According to this embodiment, when the center role 2500 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the seat portion 2507 comes into contact with the front of the game panel 1100, forming a predetermined gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. As a result, even if the flange portion 2502 is wavy when the center role 2500 is injection molded, the unevenness caused by the waving can be absorbed by the gap, and the center role 2500 can be securely attached to the front of the game panel 1100.

In addition, if the expansion rate of the center device 2500 differs from that of the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment, such as temperature or humidity, the seat portion 2507 can form a gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, which can absorb the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center device 2500, thereby suppressing distortion of the center device 2500.

Furthermore, since a seat portion 2507 is provided surrounding a set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505, if the center device 2500 is made transparent, for example, the teardrop-shaped seat portion 2507 can be seen from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center device 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the mounting holes 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat portion 2507, and the effort required for attachment can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the seating surface 2507 is provided on the center device 2500, but this is not limited to the above. The seating surface may be provided on a member attached to the front of the game panel 1100, such as the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, or the gate member 2600.

[13. Detailed configuration of the distribution passage having a game ball detection sensor]
Next, the detailed configuration of the circulation passage 2061 having the detection sensor 2060 for the game ball B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193(a) is an explanatory diagram showing one embodiment of the circulation passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a circulation passage of an embodiment different from (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a circulation passage having a conventional detection sensor. In this embodiment, a guide part 2062 for guiding the game ball B is provided in the circulation passage 2061 to prevent one game ball B from being detected by the detection sensor 2060 multiple times (so-called double count). Note that the "horizontal direction" in the following description may be a horizontal direction, and may be the left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1 or the front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1.

First, a conventional flow passage 2920 shown in FIG. 193(c) will be described. The conventional flow passage 2920 has a first horizontal portion 2920a extending horizontally so that the downstream side is lower, a first vertical portion 2920b extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2920a, a second horizontal portion 2920c extending horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b so that the downstream side is lower, and a second vertical portion 2920d extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c. A detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B is provided in the middle of the first vertical portion 2920b. The second horizontal portion 2920c is provided below the first horizontal portion 2920a. Therefore, downstream of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by the first vertical portion 2920b, the second horizontal portion 2920c, and the second vertical portion 2920d.

In the conventional flow passage 2920, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b and the upstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c are in contact is in a form where the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c are in contact. In addition, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the upstream end of the second vertical portion 2920d are in contact is in a form where the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d are in contact. For this reason, the conventional flow passage 2920 has two walls in different directions that the game ball B can contact at the same time. In other words, the conventional flow passage 2920 has a portion where walls in different directions contact the game ball B at the same time, which may hinder the flow of the game ball B.

To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 193(c), when a game ball B contacting the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2920b comes into contact with a game ball B contacting the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c from above, the center of the lower game ball B is located closer to the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b than the center of the upper game ball B, so that the load from the upper game ball B presses the lower game ball B toward the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b, that is, toward the upstream side of the second horizontal portion 2920c, and the lower game ball B cannot move downstream of the second horizontal portion 2920c.

Therefore, the upper game ball B bounces upward due to the reaction of hitting the lower game ball B from above, and the upper game ball B moves up and down inside the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060, and the upper game ball B is detected by the detection sensor 2060 multiple times. Therefore, there is a problem that the detection sensor 2060 detects (misdetects) more game balls B than actually circulated through the circulation passage 2920. If the detection sensor 2060 erroneously detects, the burden on the game hall increases due to the extra payout of game balls B, or the discrepancy with the separately counted number of game balls B may cause a malfunction such as ball clogging to be determined, causing the interruption of the game. In addition, as described above, the lower game ball B cannot move downstream of the second horizontal portion 2920c, and ball clogging occurs in the circulation passage 2920.

Although not shown in the figure, when a game ball B contacting the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c from the upstream side abuts against a game ball B that is in contact with the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d, since the center of the game ball B on the downstream side is located higher than the center of the game ball B on the upstream side, the game ball B on the downstream side is pressed upward (to the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c), and the game ball B on the downstream side is no longer able to flow down the second vertical portion 2920d, which may result in a ball jam. If game balls B that are stuck in that section due to ball clogging accumulate below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 (the downstream end of the first vertical section 2920b), game balls B that have flowed down from upstream may come into contact with game balls B below the detection hole 2060a and bounce back, moving up and down within the detection hole 2060a and may be detected multiple times, causing the same problems as above.

On the other hand, the flow passage 2061 of this embodiment has a first horizontal portion 2061a extending horizontally so that the downstream side is lower, a first vertical portion 2061b extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2061a, a second horizontal portion 2061c extending horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b so that the downstream side is lower, and a second vertical portion 2061d extending vertically downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c.

The first horizontal portion 2061a and the second horizontal portion 2061c are gently inclined at an angle of θ1 (for example, in the range of 2 degrees to 7 degrees, here 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal. The second horizontal portion 2061c is provided below the first horizontal portion 2061a. This flow passage 2061 has a detection sensor 2060 that detects the game ball B provided midway through the first vertical portion 2061b. Therefore, downstream of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by a part of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c, and the second vertical portion 2061d.

In addition, the first horizontal portion 2061a of the flow passage 2061 is provided above the detection sensor 2060, and the second horizontal portion 2061c is provided below the detection sensor 2060. As a result, the flow passage 2061 meanders around the detection sensor 2060 from top to bottom, so that the horizontal size of the flow passage 2061 can be made compact. In addition, the flow passage 2061 is formed such that the vertical length of the first vertical portion 2061b is the minimum length required to provide the detection sensor 2060 between the first horizontal portion 2061a and the second horizontal portion 2061c when they go around the detection sensor 2060 from top to bottom. The length of the first vertical portion 2061b (the distance from the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a to the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c) is within the range of 2.5 to 3.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the detection sensor 2060 to be provided in the first vertical portion 2061b, and also makes it possible to suppress an increase in the circulation speed (falling speed) of the game ball B in the first vertical portion 2061b.

As shown in Fig. 193(a) and Fig. 193(b), the flow passage 2061 of this embodiment has guide portions 2062 between the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b, between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. The guide portion 2062A in Fig. 193(a) is formed in an arc shape of radius r centered on the lower end of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b.

It is desirable that the radius r of the arc of the guiding portion 2062A is larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In more detail, it is desirable that the radius r of the arc of the guiding portion 2062A is within the range of 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm to 16 mm, preferably 11 mm to 13 mm). The reason for limiting the radius r of the arc-shaped guidance portion 2062A to within the above range is that if the radius r of the guidance portion 2062A is smaller than this range, the angle of the tangent of the part of the guidance portion 2062A where the game ball B comes into contact directly below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 will be closer to horizontal, and the force guiding the game ball B laterally will be weaker and the game ball B will no longer move downstream quickly. As a result, the repulsive force when the subsequent game ball B comes into contact with the earlier game ball B that is in contact with the guidance portion 2062A will be greater, and there is a risk that the subsequent game ball B will bounce upward and be detected again by the detection sensor 2060. Furthermore, if the radius r of the induction section 2062A is larger than this range, the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the flow passage 2061 will be unnecessarily large, which may reduce the freedom of arrangement of the flow passage 2061. In addition, if the height of the second horizontal section 2061c is increased, the speed of the game ball B flowing down from the first vertical section 2061b to the second horizontal section 2061c will increase, and the impact when it hits the induction section 2062A will become stronger, which may cause the flow passage 2061 to fatigue early and become more susceptible to breakage. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the radius r of the arc is 12 mm.

According to this embodiment, an arc-shaped guide portion 2062A is provided between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, so that two walls in different directions do not come into contact with the game ball B at the same time, and there is no portion that impedes the flow of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B that passes through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 can be quickly guided downstream from below the detection hole 2060a by the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A, so that even if a later (upper) game ball B comes into contact with a leading (lower) game ball B, the impact of the later game ball B causing the leading game ball B to move downstream (laterally) thereby minimizing the repulsive force acting on the later game ball B as much as possible, so that the later game ball B will not bounce upstream and will not be detected multiple times by the detection sensor. Therefore, since the number of game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), it is possible to prevent the payout of game balls B due to unnecessary detection, which reduces the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and there is no discrepancy with the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, which prevents interruptions to play due to such discrepancies and prevents players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to interruptions to play.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as described above, the arc-shaped guide portion 2062A can quickly guide the game ball B downstream, thereby preventing ball clogging in the flow passage 2061.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the flow passage 2061 is cranked, the vertical dimension of the flow passage 2061 can be made as small as possible, thereby increasing the freedom of arrangement of the flow passage 2061.

Although not shown in the figures, in the case of a conventional circulation passage 2920 in which the length of the first vertical portion 2920b is increased and a detection sensor 2060 is provided near the upper end of the first vertical portion 2920b, that is, in the case where the downstream portion of the detection hole 2060a in the detection sensor 2060 is extended straight downward, if a later game ball B having a faster circulation speed passes through the detection hole 2060a and collides with the earlier game ball B immediately after the earlier game ball B passes through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060, the later game ball B may bounce upward and be detected again (double counted) by the detection sensor 2060, resulting in the same problem as described above. In contrast, in this embodiment, the length of the first vertical portion 2061b is shortened, and the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor 2060, so that the leading game ball B can be quickly moved from the area below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 by the guide portion 2062. In other words, the guide portion 2062 directly below the detection sensor 2060 can quickly shift the centers of the leading game ball B and the following game ball B in the horizontal direction. This makes it difficult for the fast following game ball B to collide with the leading game ball B in the area directly below the detection hole 2060a, and even if it does collide, it is difficult for it to bounce back horizontally and upward, making it possible to avoid the following game ball B being detected again (double counted) by the detection sensor 2060, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Next, another embodiment of the flow passage 2061 shown in FIG. 193(b) will be described. The flow passage 2061 of this embodiment is the same as the flow passage 2061 of FIG. 193(a) except for the shape of the induction section 2062B, and the other configurations are the same, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted. The induction section 2062B of this flow passage 2061 is formed in a straight line inclined at an angle of θ2 with respect to the vertical line, and is formed so that the center of the lower game ball B in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal section 2061c and the induction section 2062 is separated by a distance L2 in the downstream direction of the second horizontal section 2061c from the center of the upper game ball B in contact with the inner surface on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical section 2061b in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060.

The inclination angle θ2 of the linearly inclined guide portion 2062B is preferably within the range of 40 degrees to 50 degrees. The reason for limiting the inclination angle of the guide portion 2062B to the above range is that if the inclination angle is smaller than the above range, when the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 comes into contact with the guide portion 2062B, the force that guides the game ball B in the lateral direction is weak, and the game ball B does not move downstream quickly, so that the repulsive force when the later game ball B comes into contact with the earlier game ball B that is in contact with the guide portion 2062B becomes large, and the later game ball B bounces upward and may be detected again by the detection sensor 2060. In addition, if the inclination angle is larger than the above range, the force that guides the game ball B downward when the game ball B comes into contact with the guide portion 2062B becomes strong, so the impact acting on the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c becomes relatively strong, and the flow passage 2061 may fatigue early and become easily damaged due to the impact. In this embodiment, θ2 is set to 45 degrees.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance L2 between the center of the lower game ball B and the center of the upper game ball B is within a range of 0 mm to 5.5 mm, preferably 3 mm to 4 mm. The reason for limiting the distance L2 to this range is that if the distance L2 is smaller than this range (the center of the lower game ball B is located upstream of the second horizontal portion 2061c relative to the tall body of the upper game ball B), the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 is likely to abut on the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c at approximately the same time as the induction portion 2062B, and if a subsequent game ball B abuts from above at that timing, the upward repulsive force of the game ball B becomes large, and it may bounce back toward the detection sensor 2060 and be detected again. Furthermore, if the distance L2 is greater than this range, the distance from the lower end of the inner circumferential surface of the detection sensor 2060 near the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b in the detection hole 2060a to the inclined guide portion 2062B becomes shorter, narrowing the flow path, making it easier for the game ball B to become stagnant, and if a later game ball B comes into contact with the earlier game ball B that is stagnating, the game ball B tends to bounce upward and may be detected again by the detection sensor. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the distance L2 is set to 3.5 mm.

According to this embodiment, linearly inclined guide portions 2062B are provided between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, and the guide portions 2062B are provided so that the center of a game ball B in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062 is spaced a distance L2 downstream of the second horizontal portion 2061c from the center of a game ball B in contact with the downstream portion of the second horizontal portion 2061c on the inner wall of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. As a result, when an upper game ball B that is in contact with the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b abuts against a lower game ball B that is in contact with both the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the induction portion 2062B at the same time, the load from the upper game ball B presses the lower game ball B downstream of the second horizontal portion 2061c, causing the downstream game ball B to move downstream away from the induction portion 2062B.

Therefore, even if the upstream game ball B hits the downstream game ball B, the impact of the upstream game ball B hitting the downstream game ball B causes the downstream game ball B to move downstream, so that the repulsive force acting on the upstream game ball B is as small as possible, so the upstream game ball B does not bounce upstream and the game ball B is not detected multiple times by the detection sensor. This makes it possible to accurately detect (count) the number of game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061, preventing the game balls B from being paid out due to unnecessary detection, reducing the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and preventing any discrepancy with the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, which prevents interruptions to play due to such discrepancies and prevents players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to interruptions to play.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as described above, the inclined guide portion 2062B can move the downstream game ball B downstream, thereby preventing ball clogging in the flow passage 2061.

As described above, according to the embodiment of Figures 193 (a) and (b), even if a later game ball B comes into contact with an earlier game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guiding section 2062 can suppress the rebound of the later game ball B, thereby preventing one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that can accurately detect (the number of) game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061.

In addition, the guide section 2062 provided between the top wall of the second horizontal section 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical section 2061d allows the game balls B that have circulated through the second horizontal section 2061c to be quickly moved downwards to the second vertical section 2061d. This makes it possible to prevent multiple game balls B, whose momentum has been weakened by circulating horizontally in the second horizontal section 2061c, from becoming jammed, and also makes it possible to prevent a later game ball B from coming into contact with a jammed game ball B and bouncing off towards the detection sensor 2060. This prevents one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and makes it possible to accurately detect (the number of) game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061.

As a result, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also called double counting, erroneous detection, etc.), and therefore it is possible to prevent the granting of a special privilege such as the payout of game ball B due to erroneous detection (unnecessary detection) of game ball B, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, it is possible to prevent double counting of game ball B, and therefore it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring with the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, and by avoiding interruptions to the game due to such discrepancies, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to interruptions to the game.

In addition, since the second horizontal portion 2061c extends horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c can suppress an increase in the flow speed of the game ball B, thereby weakening the flow speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060, and the game ball B can be delivered in a good condition (e.g., with little impact, in a rectified state, etc.) to a member provided downstream of the flow passage 2061.

Furthermore, in the flow passage 2601, a first horizontal portion 2061a extending horizontally is provided upstream of the first vertical portion 2061b in which the detection sensor 2060 is provided. This first horizontal portion 2061a can suppress an increase in the flow speed of the game ball B, and by weakening the momentum of the game ball B, when the game ball B flows through the first horizontal portion 2061a and comes into contact with the guiding portion 2602 between the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b, it is less likely to bounce upstream, and can be smoothly guided downward by the guiding portion 2062, and can be reliably detected one by one by the detection sensor 2060 directly below the guiding portion 2062.

In the above embodiment, the guide portion 2062 of the flow passage 2061 is shown as being wall-shaped, but this is not limited thereto, and the guide portion may also be rib-shaped.

In addition, examples of the detection sensors 2060 in the above embodiment include a general prize opening sensor 3001, a gate sensor 2601, a first start opening sensor 3002, a second start opening sensor 2401, a variable prize opening sensor 2526, a first large prize opening sensor 2525, a second large prize opening sensor 2561, a pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 used for the performance, an out sensor 664, etc.

[14. Preventive unit for preventing game ball from stopping on rolling surface]
Next, the stop prevention portion 2071 of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of the stop prevention portion of the game ball on the rolling surface, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of an embodiment different from (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface without a stop prevention portion. The rolling surface 2070 of this embodiment has a portion (horizontal portion 2070a) that contacts the horizontal line (horizontal surface) from below, and further has a stop prevention portion 2071 for preventing the game ball B from stopping at the horizontal portion 2070a.

First, as shown in FIG. 194(d), the conventional rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls has the highest part in the middle of the range in which the game ball B can roll, that is, the horizontal part 2070a that touches the horizontal line (or horizontal surface) from below. As a result, depending on the rolling direction (flow direction) and rolling speed (flow speed) of the game ball B, there is a risk that the game ball B will stop on the horizontal part 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, and the game will stagnate due to the game ball B stopping, which may reduce the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a stop prevention portion 2071 is provided on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, so that the stop prevention portion 2071 can prevent the game ball B from stopping at that portion.

More specifically, the stop prevention portion 2071A shown in FIG. 194(a) is a protrusion that protrudes upward in a semicircular arc shape with a predetermined width (e.g., 1 mm to 3 mm) in the left-right direction and also extends in the front-rear direction with the same cross-sectional shape. The stop prevention portion 2071B shown in FIG. 194(b) is a protrusion that protrudes upward in a triangle shape with a base of a predetermined length (e.g., 1 mm to 3 mm) and also extends in the front-rear direction with the same cross-sectional shape. The height of the stop prevention portion 2071 is a height that the game ball B can overcome, and is within the range of, for example, 1 mm to 3 mm (or 0.1 to 0.3 times the diameter of the game ball B).

According to this embodiment, the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070 is provided with a stop prevention portion 2071 that protrudes in a semicircular or triangular shape, so that the game ball B cannot stop on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. This makes it possible to prevent the game from coming to a halt due to the game ball B stopping on the rolling surface 2070, allowing the player to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the height of the stop prevention portion 2071 is set to a height that the game ball B can overcome, depending on the rolling speed of the game ball B, the game ball B can roll from one side of the rolling surface 2070 to the other side with the horizontal portion 2070a (stop prevention portion 2071) in between, so that the function of the rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls can be exerted, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070, preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the stop prevention portion 2071 is shown as a protrusion, but this is not limited to this, and the stop prevention portion 2071 may be a protrusion such as a hemispherical, conical, or polygonal pyramid shape.

The stop prevention portion 2071C shown in FIG. 194(c) is columnar and extends in the front-to-rear direction at a position directly above the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. This columnar stop prevention portion 2071C is provided within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm) above the rolling surface 2070, allowing the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 2070 to climb over it to the other side. This stop prevention portion 2071C can also achieve the same effect as above.

The columnar stop prevention portion 2071C may be a blocking nail N planted in the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or may extend forward from a flange portion for attaching the rolling surface 2070 to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The rolling surface 2070 in this embodiment may be provided on the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo-attacca unit), the center role 2500, the gate member 2600, etc. The rolling surface 2070 may also be movable (for example, a windmill, a movable shelf, a distribution member, an opening and closing door, etc.).

If there is a space in front of or behind the rolling surface 2070 (at least the horizontal portion 2070a) through which the game ball B can flow, the stop prevention portion 2071 may be configured to guide the game ball B toward that space (for example, a protrusion, a groove, etc.). In this case, the rolling surface 2070 may be the stage 2513 of the center gimmick 2500, and the stop prevention portion 2071 may be the central release portion 2513a.

[15. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the rear unit of the present invention, the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in this embodiment corresponds to the retaining body of the present invention, the functional surface portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 in this embodiment corresponds to the specific surface portion of the present invention, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in this embodiment corresponds to the decorative body of the present invention, and the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion recessed rearward in the rear box 3010 in this embodiment and the side wall of the rear box 3010 correspond to the regulating portion of the present invention.

[16. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, which can be seen through the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with the game area 5a provided in front of it on the game board 5, is held in a rear box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 protrudes forward of the rear box 3010, so that the distance from the player to the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be made shorter than before, making the decoration of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 easier to see. In this case, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 is provided behind the front surface of the rear box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 does not come into contact with the game panel 1100, and the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problems, and the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be made more noticeable than the functional surface portion 3011. In addition, since the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 protrudes forward from the front surface of the rear box 3010, the front-to-rear position of the front surface (decoration) of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be made as close as possible to the front-to-rear position of the game area 5a, so that when the game area 5a is focused on, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is also focused on, and the decoration of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be clearly seen while viewing the game area 5a, and the decoration of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be reliably shown to the player. As a result, the rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be made to stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention, and the decorative effect of the rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be fully and reliably exerted, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is capable of executing a predetermined effect (light-emitting effect) according to the progress of the game, when the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the effect can make the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 stand out, which can strongly attract the player's attention, allowing the player to enjoy the effect of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 and making the player think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided on the rear box 3010 which holds the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, for example, when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), when the rear box 3010 is held by the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 and the machine is placed face down with its front end facing downward on a specified member 3015 consisting of a mounting base such as a workbench, by interposing a column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member 3016 between the specified member 3015 and the functional surface portion 3011 which is higher than the distance from the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 to the functional surface portion 3011, it is possible to avoid contact of the specified member 3015 with the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201. In this case, the functional surface portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit 3000, so that when the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 is placed face down, the rear box 3010 does not tilt or swing, and the rear box 3010 can be placed face down in a stable state. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the front surface of the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 due to contact with the specified member 3015, and to maintain the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 in good condition, and to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to damage to the rear front peripheral decoration 3201, thereby suppressing the increase in costs of the pachinko machine 1.

As described above, the functional surface portion 3011 of the rear box 3010 can prevent contact between the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 and the specified component 3015, so that the rear box 3010 holding the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 can be placed face down and other components (e.g., the rear box rear unit 3030) can be attached or wiring can be performed on the rear side of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, since the rear box 3010 is provided with a functional surface portion 3011, compared to when a functional surface portion is provided on the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, the rear box 3010 can be placed face down even during assembly when the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is not being held, making it possible to accommodate a variety of work conditions.

In addition, the rear box 3010 has a regulating portion (here, the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion 3011 which is recessed toward the rear of the rear box 3010) which is capable of regulating the relative movement of the intermediate member 3016 which abuts against the functional surface portion 3011. Therefore, during assembly work, etc., when the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 is placed face down with the intermediate member 3016 interposed between a specified member 3015 such as a workbench and the functional surface portion 3011, the intermediate member 3016 abuts against the regulating portion, thereby regulating the movement of the rear box 3010 (rear unit 3000) in the direction along the surface of the specified member 3015. Therefore, the restricting portion of the rear box 3010 can prevent the functional surface portion 3011 from falling off the intermediate member 3016, causing the rear box 3010 or rear unit 3000 to tilt or fall, preventing the front surface of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 from coming into contact with the specified member 3015 due to tilting or falling, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

As described above, the restricting portion of the rear box 3010 can restrict the movement of the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 in the direction along the specified member 3015, making it difficult for the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 to move when placed face down. This makes it easier to assemble the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 when placed face down, and thus prevents an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided facing the rear of the rear unit 3000 (visible when viewed from the rear), when performing assembly work such as holding the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, etc. on the rear box 3010 from the front, by interposing a column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member 3017 longer than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 between the functional surface portion 3011 and the specified member 3015 with the front end side of the rear box 3010 facing upward (lying on its back), it is possible to prevent the specified member 3015 from contacting the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, so that the rear box 3010 or the rear unit 3000 can be stabilized in a state where it is lying on its back, making it easier to perform assembly work from the front end side of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B flows downward through the first vertical portion 2061b of the flow passage 2061, it is detected by the detection sensor 2060 by passing through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 near the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, and then enters the second horizontal portion 2061c from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b below the detection sensor 2060, and then flows horizontally toward the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and flows down the second vertical portion 2061d extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. At this time, the game ball B that has passed through the detection sensor 2060 abuts against the guide portion 2062 provided between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, so that its flow direction is changed from downward to horizontal, and it quickly flows toward the downstream side of the second horizontal portion 2061c. In such a circulation passage 2061, when a later game ball B (upper game ball B) comes into contact from above with a first game ball B (lower game ball B) that is in contact with the guide portion 2062, the impact presses the lower game ball B downstream and the arc-shaped or straight-line guide portion 2062 quickly moves it away from the position below the detection sensor 2060, thereby making the repulsive force acting on the upper game ball B as small as possible and suppressing the upper game ball B from bouncing upward as much as possible. Therefore, even if a later game ball B comes into contact with a leading game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guidance section 2062 can quickly shift the centers of the leading game ball B and the later game ball B laterally to prevent the later game ball B from bouncing upward. This prevents one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can accurately detect (the number of) game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061.

In addition, in this flow passage 2061, an arc-shaped or linear guide section 2062 is also provided between the top wall of the second horizontal section 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical section 2061d, so that after being detected by the detection sensor 2060 provided on the second vertical section 2061d, the game ball B, whose increase in flow speed has been suppressed by flowing through the second horizontal section 2061c extending in the horizontal direction, can be guided downward by the guide section 2062 provided between the top wall of the second horizontal section 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical section 2061d. Therefore, it can be quickly moved downward to the second vertical portion 2061d, and the multiple game balls B whose momentum has been weakened in the second horizontal portion 2061c can be prevented from becoming jammed. It is also possible to prevent a later game ball B from coming into contact with the jammed game ball B and bouncing back toward the detection sensor 2060. This prevents one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and allows accurate detection of the (number of) game balls B circulating through the circulation passage 2061.

As described above, therefore, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also called double counting, erroneous detection, etc.), and therefore it is possible to prevent the granting of a privilege such as the payout of game ball B due to erroneous detection (unnecessary detection) of game ball B, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, it is possible to prevent double counting of game ball B, and therefore it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring with the count number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, and by avoiding interruptions to the game due to such discrepancies, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to interruptions to the game.

In addition, as described above, the guidance section 2062 can quickly guide the game ball B downstream, which can prevent the game ball B from stagnating in the flow passage 2061, thereby preventing ball clogging (ball jamming) caused by the stagnating game ball B.

Furthermore, since a detection sensor 2060 is provided on the first vertical portion 2061b and a second horizontal portion 2061c extends horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c can suppress an increase in the flow speed of the game ball B, and the flow speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened, and the game ball B can be delivered to a member provided downstream of the flow passage 2061 in a good condition (e.g., with little impact, in a rectified state, etc.).

In addition, because the guide portion 2062A is arc-shaped with a radius larger than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B can be smoothly guided downstream, making it difficult for the game ball B that comes into contact with the guide portion 2062A to bounce, and suppressing the game ball B from meandering and becoming violent within the second horizontal portion 2061c and the second vertical portion 2061d, allowing the game ball B to circulate quickly and preventing ball clogging due to stagnation.

Furthermore, the effects of the guide piece portion 2210 of the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200, which has an inclined ball entry direction, and the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning port 2016 of the winning port unit 2040 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail. Note that, although the winning port unit 2040 will be used as an example here, the same effects can be achieved in the side unit 2200 as well. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning port unit 2040 is attached via a flange portion 2043 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) which has a game area 5a at the front of the game board 5, and the front plate portion 2041 and the receiving portion 2042 form a winning port 2016 whose ball entry direction (receiving direction) is inclined, and when a game ball B in the game area 5a enters the winning port 2016, it rolls on the upper end surface (rolling surface) of a rib-shaped guide piece portion 2050 provided in the receiving portion 2042, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The guide piece portion 2050 has a change piece portion 2051 that changes the flow direction of the game ball B that enters the winning hole 2016 whose ball entry direction is inclined, and since the change piece portion 2051 extends in a direction opposite to the ball entry direction, the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2051 (the rolling surface of the game ball B) includes a component in a direction perpendicular to the axis parallel to the ball entry direction. In detail, the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2051 is a surface that is like a surface perpendicular to the ball entry direction (a surface facing the ball entry direction) that is inclined. When the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 whose ball entry direction is inclined, it first abuts against the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the change piece portion 2051 of the guide piece portion 2050, and its flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction to the rear, and then it is guided to the downstream passage portion at the rear by the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rear piece portion 2052 of the guide piece portion 2050. At this time, the game ball B that enters the winning opening 2016 abuts against the upper end surface of the changeable piece portion 2051, so the impact of the abutment of the game ball B can be received on a surface. Therefore, unlike conventional methods, the game ball B does not abut against the corners or edges of the guide piece portion 2050 (changeable piece portion 2051). This reduces damage to the guide piece portion 2050 caused by the abutment of the game ball B as much as possible, reduces the occurrence of ball jamming caused by damage to the guide piece portion 2050, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable due to interruptions to play caused by ball jamming, suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the winning port unit 2040 has a guide piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B, which includes a change piece portion 2051 and a rear piece portion 2052. The change piece portion 2051 can change the flow direction of the game ball B from the ball entry direction to the rear, and the rear piece portion 2052 can guide the game ball B, whose flow direction has been changed to the rear, to the rear. As a result, the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 can be quickly guided to the rear, and the game ball B can be handed over to the downstream passage portion at the rear without any problems.

Furthermore, the guide piece portion 2050 has a rear piece portion 2052 that extends in a different direction from the changeable piece portion 2051 and guides the game ball B rearward, and at least the rear piece portion 2052 supports the game ball B being guided rearward. Therefore, compared to when the guide piece portion 2050 is composed of only the changeable piece portion 2051, the rear piece portion 2052 can reliably guide the game ball B rearward, and it is possible to prevent the circulation of the game ball B from stopping and becoming stagnant in the winning port unit 2040.

In addition, because the entry direction of the winning opening 2016 capable of receiving the game ball B is inclined relative to the vertical direction, the game ball B is received by its movement from side to side within the play area 5a. This provides variety to the movement of the game ball B within the play area 5a, making it less monotonous. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and also allows the player to enjoy receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2016, which has an inclined entry direction, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning port unit 2040, a low step is formed on the rear side (downstream side) between the receiving portion 2042 (guiding piece portion 2050) and the rear extension portion 2044 (rear guiding piece portion 2045), so that it is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing back from the rear extension portion 2044 side to the receiving portion 2042 side. Therefore, even if the ball entry direction of the winning port 2016 is inclined and the height difference of the flow of the game ball B within the receiving portion 2042 is small, the game ball B that enters the winning port 2016 will not flow back to the winning port 2016 due to the backflow. Therefore, it is possible to provide a winning port 2016 with an inclined ball entry direction within the game area 5a, and the winning port 2016 with an inclined ball entry direction can entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning port unit 2040, the guide piece 2050 is provided on the receiving portion 2042 that is open in the direction opposite to the ball entry direction and to the rear, so that the rear piece 2052 that supports the game ball B guided rearward from below extends in a rib-like manner from the bottom of the receiving portion 2042, and the thickness of the receiving portion 2042 can be increased by the amount of the rear piece 2052. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impact of receiving the game ball B into the winning port 2016 from directly acting on the receiving portion 2042, so that it is possible to prevent the receiving portion 2042 from becoming fatigued and easily damaged early, and it is possible to make the receiving portion 2042 (winning port unit 2040) less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game caused by the damage of the winning port unit 2040, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest by allowing the player to enjoy receiving the game ball B into the winning port 2016.

In addition, since the guide piece portion 2050 extends in a rib shape to guide the game ball B by its upper end surface, the thickness of the guide piece portion 2050 can be increased by the amount of extension of the guide piece portion 2050. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 with force, the guide piece portion 2050 can absorb the impact, and the guide piece portion 2050, etc., can be made less likely to be damaged. Therefore, the winning hole 2016 can be suitably used in areas where the game ball B enters with force or is frequently circulated (for example, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first large winning hole 2006, the second large winning hole 2007, etc.).

In addition, the winning port 2016 unit having the winning port 2016 and the guide piece portion 2050 is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) via the flange portion 2043, i.e., in the same position in the front-to-rear direction as the game area 5a. This makes it relatively easy to secure space behind the winning port 2016 unit, and by providing a performance device in this space, it is possible to create a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B enters the winning port 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031 of the winning port unit 2030, which is open to receive the game ball B within the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) on the game board 5, the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface (upper end surface) of the guide piece portion 2035, which protrudes upward in a rib-like manner, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 via the downstream passage portion 2032 connected to the rear downstream side. This guide piece portion 2035 has a steep piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b with different inclination angles, and each of the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear. Therefore, when a force including that toward the front is applied from above to the game ball B that is in contact with both the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b, depending on the strength of the force and the angle of the loose piece portion 2035b on the downstream side, the game ball B may be able to stop in its current position, and the position where the game ball B comes into contact with the two steep piece portions 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b is determined to be the specific position. At this time, the two steep pieces 2035a and the loose piece 2035b (guiding piece portion 2035) are formed so that the rear end of the game ball B located at the specific position is located behind the rear end of the winning opening 2015 (here, the front face of the game panel 1100). Therefore, when the game ball B (upper game ball B) that is in contact with the rear end of the winning opening 2015 (the front face of the game panel 1100) from above abuts against the game ball B at the specific position, the contact point is in a position forward of directly above the center of the game ball B at the specific position (lower), and therefore the game ball B at the upper side is moved forward by the game ball B at the lower side. A force with a backward vector acts on ball B, pushing the lower game ball B backward and pushing game ball B backward, so that game ball B does not get stuck in the winning opening 2015 (upstream passage section 2031) (ball jamming), and game ball B can be discharged smoothly to the rear and ball jamming at the winning opening 2015 can be prevented, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that does not cause discomfort to the player, entertains the player, and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the guide piece portion 2035 is composed of a steep piece portion 2035a and a gentle piece portion 2035b with different inclinations, the inclination of the slope portion becomes gentler (closer to horizontal) toward the rear end, so that the circulation speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B that enters the winning port 2015 can be prevented from increasing, and the momentum of the game ball B discharged (released) into the downstream passage portion 2032 at the rear can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into forceful contact with the downstream passage portion 2032 located behind (downstream side) the upstream passage portion 2031, making it difficult for the downstream passage portion 2032 to be damaged, and preventing interruption of play due to damage to the downstream passage portion 2032 (winning port unit 2030).

In addition, the guide piece portion 2035 is composed of a steep piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b with different inclinations. As described above, the momentum of the game ball B can be suppressed by the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b, so that the game ball B can flow in a stable state toward the rear downstream passage portion 2032 side. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging or stagnation on the downstream passage portion 2032 side, and allows the game ball B to be discharged smoothly from the winning port unit 2030.

In addition, since the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031 is protruded upward in a rib shape, the rear end of the guide piece portion 2035 is likely to be higher than the bottom of the downstream passage portion 2032 provided on the downstream side, and a step 2033 with a lower downstream side can be formed between the upper end face of the guide piece portion 2035 and the bottom of the downstream passage portion 2032. Therefore, when the game ball B attempts to flow back from the downstream passage portion 2032 side to the upstream passage portion 2031 side, it must overcome the step 2033 caused by the guide piece portion 2035, and the game ball B abuts against the end face of the guide piece portion 2035 facing the downstream side, thereby preventing the game ball B from flowing back. This makes it possible to avoid situations where a game ball B that once entered the winning port 2015 of the upstream passage section 2031 flows back to the winning port 2015 of the upstream passage section 2031 and is then visible, causing distrust among the player, or where circulation of the game ball B is halted within the winning port unit 2030, causing discomfort to the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received at the upstream end (winning port 2015) of the upstream passage section 2031 of the winning port unit 2030, which is arranged to be able to receive the game ball B within the game area 5a where the game is played, the game ball B rolls along the upper end surface of the guide piece section 2035 in the upstream passage section 2031, and then is handed over to the downstream passage section 2032 and circulated downstream. At this time, a backflow prevention section is provided at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, which is formed by making the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage section 2031. Therefore, when a subsequent (trailing) game ball B abuts against a preceding game ball B in the downstream passage section 2032, the subsequent game ball B bounces upstream, or when the game ball B abuts against a rear wall (not shown) provided behind the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032, Even if the game ball B bounces upstream, it can be bounced downstream by abutting against the step 2033 as a backflow prevention part, and can prevent the game ball B from flowing back to the upstream passage part 2031 side and returning to the upstream end of the upstream passage part 2031 (winning hole 2015). In addition, the game ball B can be prevented from being stagnated in the upstream passage part 2031 or the downstream passage part 2032 by the subsequent game ball B abutting against the game ball B that has bounced back. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B once wins at the winning hole 2015, flows back and returns to the winning hole 2015 at the upstream end of the upstream passage part 2031, causing the player to feel distrustful, or the flow of the game ball B is stagnated in the upstream passage part 2031 or the downstream passage part 2032, causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In other words, when the game ball B is received at the upstream end (winning hole 2015) of the upstream passage section 2031, as described above, the step 2033, which acts as a backflow prevention section provided at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, prevents the game ball B from flowing back. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B, once received (winning), will flow back and return to the winning hole 2015, causing the player to feel distrustful because the game ball B can be seen from the winning hole 2015, or that the flow of the game ball B will be stagnant in the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, causing the player to feel uncomfortable. This allows the player to enjoy receiving the game ball B at the winning hole 2015 with certainty, and makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the upstream passage section 2031 is provided with a guide piece section 2035 that protrudes in the shape of a rib and can guide the game ball B, the guide piece section 2035 of the upstream passage section 2031 is likely to be higher than the bottom of the downstream passage section 2032 at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, and a step 2033 in which the downstream passage section 2032 side is lower can be formed between the upper end face of the guide piece section 2035 and the bottom of the downstream passage section 2032. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow back from the downstream passage section 2032 side to the upstream passage section 2031 side, it must overcome the step 2033 caused by the guide piece section 2035 of the upstream passage section 2031, and the game ball B abuts against the end face facing the downstream side of the guide piece section 2035, which prevents the game ball B from flowing back. This makes it possible to further prevent the game ball B from flowing back, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since a step 2033 is provided as a backflow prevention section at the boundary between the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032, the dimension in the front-rear direction from the upstream end (entrance) of the downstream passage section 2032 to the rear wall can be made as small as possible, and the space behind the downstream passage section 2032 can be made relatively large. Therefore, it is easy to provide an effect device behind the downstream passage section 2032 that can execute a predetermined effect (e.g., light-emitting effect, moving effect, image effect including video, etc.) according to the progress of the game, so that the effect device can entertain the player more and suppress a decline in the interest of the player, and the effect device can make the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

Furthermore, since the backflow prevention section is a step 2033 formed by making the inner circumference of the downstream passage section 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the upstream passage section 2031, the configuration of the backflow prevention section can be simplified compared to when the backflow prevention section is a one-way opening and closing piece, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

The game ball B is guided by the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, which protrudes in a rib shape in the upstream passage portion 2031, and the thickness in the vertical direction is thicker than the bottom by the amount of the guide piece portion 2035. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the upstream passage portion 2031 with force, the guide piece portion 2035 can absorb the impact, making the upstream passage portion 2031 less likely to be damaged. Therefore, the upstream passage portion 2031 can be suitably used in areas where the game ball B enters with force or circulates frequently (for example, the first starting port 2004, the first large winning port 2006, the second large winning port 2007, etc.).

In addition, the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage section 2032 is made larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage section 2031, and a step 2033 is intentionally formed as a backflow prevention section where the downstream passage section 2302 side is lower. Therefore, even if the upstream passage section 2031 and the downstream passage section 2032 are separate and there are manufacturing errors or assembly errors, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse step where the downstream passage section 2032 side is higher, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by game ball B getting stuck due to the reverse step, and the backflow of game ball B causing distrust among players.

In addition, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031, for example, when a plating layer is provided (plating process is applied) on the surface of the upstream passage portion 2031, it is possible to prevent ball clogging due to plating pools. In more detail, when plating process is applied to the upstream passage portion 2031 for decoration or the like, plating pools are likely to form on the edge, and when plating pools form on the downstream end edge of the rolling surface (upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035), because the plating pools bulge upward, there is a risk that the game balls B will get caught in the plating pools and cause ball clogging. In response to this, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031, the plating (plating liquid) can be released downward during plating processing, making it difficult for plating pools to form, and even if a plating pool does form, it can be prevented from bulging upward beyond the upper end surface of the induction piece portion 2035, preventing ball clogging due to plating pools.

From here to the following paragraph [2016], the effects are described using the center role 2500 as an example, but the same effects are also achieved in the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the gate member 2600. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the center role 2500 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a flange portion 2502 along the game panel 1100 is provided with a plurality of mounting portions for mounting to the game panel 1100, and the plurality of mounting portions attached to the game panel 1100 have positioning pins 2505 inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, so that the center role 2500 can be positioned at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100 by the plurality of positioning pins 2505, and the center role can be accurately positioned at a desired position within the game area 5a. Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error of the center role 2500 or an assembly error of the pachinko machine 1, the center role 2500 can be attached with high accuracy to a desired position in the play area 5a. In the center role 2500, the two sets of attachment parts are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL of the advantageous part (here, the first starting hole 2004) where the player in the play area 5a is advantageous. Therefore, even if the game panel 1100 and the center role 2500 expand and contract and deform due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the centers of the two sets of attachment parts can be maintained on the center line CL of the first starting hole 2004. It is possible to reliably prevent the center release part 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center role 2500 from being misaligned with respect to the first starting hole 2004, and it is possible to avoid changes in the intended play due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, so that the player can enjoy the game without feeling uncomfortable and suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, since the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center device 2500 can be accurately positioned directly above the first starting hole 2004, the probability that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 will be accepted by the first starting hole 2004 can be set within an intended range, reducing variation between pachinko machines 1 (game boards 5) as much as possible, and the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 can be accepted by the first starting hole 2004 with the intended acceptance probability, allowing the player to be entertained as intended and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the flange portion 2502 of the center device 2500 aligned with the game panel 1100 is provided with a plurality of mounting portions consisting of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505, when the center device 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the front of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pins 2505 are provided can be pressed toward the game panel 1100, thereby making it possible to easily insert the positioning pins 2505 into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. In this case, the positioning pin 2505 is positioned so as to avoid the rear of the front plate portion (e.g., the center left front plate 2527) that is separated forward from the flange portion 2502. Therefore, when inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the gaming panel 1100 during assembly of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can press from the front the front side of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward. This allows the positioning pin 2505 to be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the gaming panel 1100, and also prevents strong force from acting on the front plate portion, thereby preventing damage to the front plate portion and suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the center role 2500 can be prevented from moving or floating up relative to the game panel 1100, which makes it easier to screw in the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2504, easing the labor required for assembly and suppressing increases in costs. In addition, even when the mounting screw is screwed in and tightened, the center role 2500 does not move slightly, and the center role 2500 can be securely attached to the specified position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Furthermore, since a groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 in the center device 2500, the base of the positioning pin 2505 becomes the bottom of the groove portion 2506 forward of the rear surface of the center device 2500 (flange portion 2502). Even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 has an R, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 rearward of the rear surface of the center device 2500 does not become thicker, so the thickness (diameter) of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be fully inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 abuts against the rear surface of the center device 2500. Furthermore, even if a burr occurs on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove portion 2506, so that it is possible to prevent the burr from being caught between the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the center role 2500 (flange portion 2502), and the positioning pin 2505 can be fully inserted into the positioning hole 1117. As a result, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exerted, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be provided.

As described above, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 has an R, the presence of the groove 2506 allows the thickened portion due to the R to be moved forward of the rear surface of the center gadget 2500 (flange portion 2502), so that the thickened portion at the base of the positioning pin 2505 will not cause incomplete insertion into the positioning hole 1117, resulting in no gap between the game panel 1100 and the center gadget 2500. Also, since the groove 2506 can accommodate burrs that occur on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, no gap will occur between the game panel 1100 and the center gadget 2500 due to the burrs at the portion having the mounting hole 2504 and positioning pin 2505 of the center gadget 2500. Therefore, when a gap occurs between the game panel 1100 and the center role 2500, the center role 2500 will not be attached to the game panel 1100, and the center role 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 will not wobble.

Furthermore, a groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505, so that during injection molding of the center part 2500, the occurrence of sink marks in the front side in front of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange part 2502 of the center part 2500 can be suppressed due to the difference in plate thickness caused by the presence of the positioning pin 2505 when the molten resin hardens at the position of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange part 2502 of the center part 2500.

In addition, since the multiple mounting parts consisting of the mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pins 2505 are provided on the seating surface 2507 that protrudes rearward in a stepped manner from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, when the center role 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the seating surface 2507 abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100, forming a predetermined amount of gap between the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the center role 2500 excluding the seating surface 2507. Therefore, even if the rear surface (flange portion 2502) of the center role 2500 is wavy when the center role 2500 is injection molded, the unevenness caused by the waving can be absorbed by the gap, and the center role 2500 can be attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 via the seating surface 2507 in a good condition.

Furthermore, since the seat portion 2507 is provided with mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505, even if the expansion rate of the center device 2500 differs from that of the game panel 1100 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the gap between the game panel 1100 and the center device 2500 provided by the seat portion 2507 can absorb (contain) the distortion of the center device 2500 caused by the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center device 2500, and the center device 2500 can be securely attached to the game panel 1100.

In addition, since the seat portion 2507 is provided with an attachment portion consisting of the attachment hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505, if the center device 2500 is made transparent, the teardrop-shaped outer shape of the seat portion 2507 can be seen from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center device 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by using the seat portion 2507, and the effort required for attachment can be simplified.

In addition, since the flange portion 2502 of the center role 2500 is provided with mounting holes 2504, the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 can be abutted against the front surface of the game panel 1100 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2504 into the game panel 1100 (the screw hole 1116) and tightening it, so that the frictional resistance between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 is higher, making it difficult for the center role 2500 to move in a direction along the surface of the game panel 1100, and the center role 2500 can be attached to the game panel 1100 more firmly. In addition, since the flange portion 2502 is provided along the game panel 1100, the strength and rigidity of the center role 2500 can be further increased by the peripheral wall portion 2501 extending in a direction intersecting with the flange portion 2502 in the center role 2500. For this reason, even if the game ball B hits the center role 2500 installed in the play area 5a, the center role 2500 can be prevented from moving or deforming, so the intended play can be reliably performed using the center role 2500, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

[17. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 203 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 195 to 197. Fig. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 196 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 195, and Fig. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[17-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will be generated, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will be generated when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot game pattern or small jackpot game pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and pattern initial value determination random numbers used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2005 to accept a gaming ball, initial value determination random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the random numbers, and random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery drawing, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU as numerical values and calculating their sum during the main control side power-on processing described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off), etc., the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number based on the retrieved ID code. In other words, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and a two-stage security measure is taken to prevent analysis: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU' equipped in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if momentary interruptions are generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are allowed to pass through gate 2002 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece to create a game state in which game balls can be received by second starting port 2005.

[17-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 195 and 196. When this main control side power-on processing starts, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU sets the initial value and starts the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT, which monitors whether the main control MPU's operation (system) is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU, and the main control built-in WDT is started to start timing until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU (system) is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S16). In this determination, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not being operated, and determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, and determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated.

In the judgment of step S16, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S16, when the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU (i.e., the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, including game information related to the game such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the wait time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control MPU judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The judgment of step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment of step S24, when the main control MPU judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment of step S24 again, and repeats the judgment of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be explained in detail later.

If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. In step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 0, that is, if it is determined that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S28, the main control MPU judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU judges that they match, it judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power cut processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a predetermined memory area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from a fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of a fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., when it determines that various information should be erased, or when the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., when it determines that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). Here, the main control MPU does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. In addition, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern hit determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the normal pattern hit determination initial value determination random number to be used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal pattern hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When the main control MPU obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed explanation of how step S50 schedules the commands to be sent when the power is turned on will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining initial values for patterns, and the random numbers for determining initial values for small win patterns, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (win determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern win determination, the random numbers for determining initial values for normal pattern win determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and other information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2632, the first attacca solenoid 2642, the second attacca solenoid 2652, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT that was started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the judgment of step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is performed again. In other words, since the main control side power off processing is not performed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on the time immediately before the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is performed at the previous power off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit is forced to reset and restarted cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the main control side performs power-on processing.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of approximately 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) and starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, it is set to 2.5 seconds). If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on processing is started again when power is restored.

When this happens, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game parlor, and the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the staff member or other attendant of the game parlor to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time counting cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU can be forced to reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and restarting the main control board 1310. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing and to prevent various information, including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output), from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation result. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculated and stored value in step S64, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs from being initialized when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output) due to the progress of the game are output. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power cut process, which is comprised of the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the force determination counter, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms as before, which is determined by hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or interrupted power interruption occurs during the main control side power-on processing upon power recovery, and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the interruption or interruption. Therefore, if the main control side power cut processing cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, In step S24, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and if a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated. By setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start counting again, so that the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

A mechanism is adopted in which the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT using such software, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attack solenoid 2642 and the second attack solenoid 2652. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632 and information indicating the drive state of the first attack solenoid 2642 and the second attack solenoid 2652; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 or the second attacca solenoid 2652 to open the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 or the second attacca solenoid 2652, causing the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns to normal when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal based on the game state (whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, etc.) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is restored afterwards, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen during the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 based on the game state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a game ball enters the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007 and is detected by the first main winning port sensor 2525 or the second main winning port sensor 2602, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large winning port 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of game balls that have entered the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of game balls that have entered the first main winning port 2006 or the second main winning port 2007 on the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the game status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game status (i.e., which round).

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the big win game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652, and transmits a large win port 1 closing display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1310, which instructs the first large win port 2006 and the second large win port 2007 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening and closing member (i.e., the start of closing the first large win port 2006 and the second large win port 2007 of the attacca unit between rounds). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big win game state, the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 are started to be driven, and the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 are switched from a closed state to an open state by the opening and closing member (i.e., the opening of the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 for the fifth round begins), and a display command for the fifth large prize opening is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the game state described above to a screen indicating the start of the fifth round of the big win game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece is open) on the display area of the performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2005, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a state in which it is driving the starting port solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece and open the second starting port 2005, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and transitions to a state in which it starts driving the starting port solenoid 2632 to close the movable piece and close the second starting port 2005.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary interruption or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2005, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen showing the jackpot gaming state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 based on the gaming state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has now become advantageous to the player, in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2005. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting hole 2005. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting hole 2005, a screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 2005) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 starts driving the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 transition from a state in which they are closed by the opening/closing members to a state in which they are open. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit this information to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but can display a screen indicating that it is a jackpot game state, that the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 have started to be driven, and that the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 have been opened by the opening and closing members (for example, a screen indicating "It's a jackpot. The large prize openings are open. A screen conveying the message to the player, "Play the game so that the game balls enter the large prize opening." can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play the game so that the game balls enter the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2005 and which is advantageous to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control As the return destination of the board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the start port solenoid 2632 has started to be driven to open the movable piece and open the second start port 2005 (for example, a screen conveying the message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play so that the game ball will enter the second start port."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second start port 2005 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and then power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the system of the pachinko machine has frozen, which can prevent the player from mistaking this for a malfunction.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption), information that instructs the player to return to either the time-saving state or the non-time-saving state when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption), and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it refers to and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, game specifications in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times (for example, 30 or 70 times) for the special pattern (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, the workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (such as a game specification in which if a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for the special symbol to change (such as an ST machine), and the game specification code that specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for the special symbol to change, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, work copyright, and game specifications of the main control boards 1310, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control boards 1310 that correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game boards 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to the game boards 5 for the work copyrights to the game boards 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[17-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 195 and Fig. 196.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 197 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in this routine, which is the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in this routine, which is the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time for which the payout control board 633 receives the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) and the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payout owner ACK signal has been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU reads, for example, detection signals from the gate sensor 2601, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first large winning port sensor 2525 and the second large winning port sensor 2602, the V winning port sensor 2603, the losing port sensor 2604, the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1030, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received, and stores these as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. The result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those for which empty terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and then the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore, the detection signals from the gate sensor 2501, the general winning port sensor 3001, and the first starting port sensor 3002 are read twice. It is possible to improve the reliability of the detection signal, the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the first large prize opening sensor 2525 and the second large prize opening sensor 2602, the detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 2603, the detection signal from the losing opening sensor 2604, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1030, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal processing, so that its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether or not the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is LOW is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that has been subjected to vacant terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU that a malfunction has occurred as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a win/lose random number update process (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 196, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a win or lose and the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern is also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the patterns and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small winning patterns are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. 196, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the patterns and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small winning patterns may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first main winning slot 2006 or the second main winning slot 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, and the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 (hereinafter referred to as the ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5'').The value is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning ball is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheat") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave cheat counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a radio wave irradiation cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the first large prize opening sensor 2525 or the second large prize opening sensor 2602 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007), a prize abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU, and this obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) matches the big win determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determines whether a big win game state is generated (referred to as a "special lottery")), or the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and it is determined whether it matches any of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the big win type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first start hole sensor 3002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) are due to the second start hole sensor 2401, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 open Nth time display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 to open and close the opening and closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 are changed from a closed state to an open state. When the number of times (rounds) is two, a lighting signal is output to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when the number of rounds is fifteen, a lighting signal is output to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and a lighting signal is output to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 to light a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal winning slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit described above is extracted and stored as normal winning slot winning information in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize slot winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins from this read-out normal winning port winning information is extracted to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece. If the decision is made to open or close the movable piece, the movable piece will be in an open state, creating a game state in which game balls can be received into the variable winning port 2003, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

For example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2632 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU has normally received various commands from the payout control board 633, it outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the first attacca solenoid 2642 and the second attacca solenoid 2652 that perform the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing members of the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 when the game is in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2632 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small winning information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circuit serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots (for example, a large prize port 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize port count command based on a detection signal from the first large prize port sensor 2525 or the second large prize port sensor 2602 when a game ball entering the first large prize port 2006 or the second large prize port 2007 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, and various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance. Various commands classified as related to electric effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, a main prize ball number information output command that instructs the main control board 1310 to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer as main prize ball number information every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes provided on the game board 5 reaches 10 balls) are stored. The main serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 196, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control power-on processing. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2632, first attacker solenoid 2642, and second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 196, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 195, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after it is manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 195. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in FIG. 196, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M's transmission information memory area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[18. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in Fig. 203 will be described with reference to Figs. 198 to 201. Fig. 198 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 199 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in Fig. 198, Fig. 200 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 199, and Fig. 201 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[18-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Fig. 198 to Fig. 200. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU interrupt. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. When the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that the signal does not command the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is not operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is LOW, it is determined that the signal commands the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payer ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, the payout control MPU outputs a payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described below have been normally received by the main control board 1310, and the like are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the ball of the game ball taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time management unit 100 also manages the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which is used to monitor whether inconsistent game balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a mismatch between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information to be used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not altered by the effects of the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit is, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, and this is stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal that notifies the CR unit that the payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and it is possible to inform the CR unit that the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting a useless loaned ball request signal, BRDY, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, the full tank and ball out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of stored game balls, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the values A, B and C are set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in that order, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control built-in RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to values A, B, and C in that order. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[18-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 198 to 200.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 201, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[19. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power-on process, FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control board power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt processes is set to the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip.

[19-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 202. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 202. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game presentations and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating such determinations, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below is started, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors whether or not the touch operation unit 302 is touched and whether or not the press operation unit 303 is operated, based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which various information (for example, contact history information for the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information for the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the press detection sensor 373, and the lift detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as the "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") is set, which acquires contact with the touch operation unit 302 and operation of the press operation unit 303, based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as the "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300"), and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the contact with the touch operation unit 302 and the operation of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the performance operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting process is executed while a performance is in progress and a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 brightness designation values ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 to set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness.

For example, when a player (or an attendant such as a game parlor clerk) operates the "+" side of light intensity adjustment button 228 and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player operates the "-" side of light intensity adjustment button 228 and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness to the first brightness designated value. When a player (or a staff member of a game hall or other such staff) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to select a desired brightness, the selected desired brightness is confirmed (the desired brightness may be confirmed by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 after selecting the desired brightness). In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member of a game hall or other such staff) can set the brightness during the progress of the performance, and at this time, the player (or a staff member of a game hall or other such staff) can set the desired brightness by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation unit 303). In addition, when a player (or a staff member of a game hall or other such staff) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 during the progress of the performance, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member of a game hall or other such staff) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the lowest luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 (and pressing operation unit 303), while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 (and pressing operation unit 303). As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation unit 303) to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (light intensity adjustment button 228 (and pressing operation unit 303)) to set a specified brightness value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the specified brightness value is set for a specific decorative board, while a maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the specified brightness value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process described below, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen's worth (one frame's worth) is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a mechanism that allows the sound data output process described below to prioritize the use of music, sound effects, and other sound effects that are tailored to each type of performance from various speakers (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), such as the vibration speaker, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main frame speaker 622.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in the sound data creation processing described below, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, music, sound effects, and other sounds that match the various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

The scheduler update process also updates the pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alert sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order to make up the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM, and executes the lamp palette setting process. When a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value that is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable performance such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the first large prize port 2006 or the second large prize port 2007, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission mode of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for indicating which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to use, and a track number for indicating which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the VDP of the peripheral control IC receives screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to the volume set to board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and then serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume of the sound coming from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound, the sound data of the sound embedded in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound embedded in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume coming from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and recorded. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume that is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, to briefly explain the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the special sound is being played from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the special sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this special sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined special sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, and the amplified special sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4, but the sound effects are proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound that is being played according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (at this time, if the volume of the sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted sound), and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, when an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started, but start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the point where the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, and other performance sounds played from the various speakers will be low, but the notification sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sounds is low, it is possible to prevent staff members of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sounds.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, the CPU waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, the routine starts by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and then in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed, and then in step S1036, the routine is performed, and finally in step S1038, the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control unit's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the CPU of the peripheral control IC. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[19-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to receive screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, as shown in Fig. 203 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 202 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 202, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 202 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) in FIG. 202, the steady-state process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 202 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 202, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[19-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 202, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 204 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 202 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit routine process is repeatedly executed every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 202, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, contact history information on the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information on the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the presence or absence of contact with the touch operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the vibration speaker, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 202, various processing related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[19-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the CPU to take in 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this taking is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 205. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, takes a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, when it judges that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main loop serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main loop serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it ends this routine.

[19-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 206, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, the timer started in step S1300 judges whether 2 microseconds have passed. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, and other processes are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the CPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process for the command (step S1310). In the backup process for this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 202 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, so that such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 207 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first start gate 2004) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2005) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that control is being performed in the jackpot game state is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) for controlling the jackpot game state is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state suggesting a "15R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 15R jackpot game state. Also, when the result is a state suggesting a "5R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 5R jackpot game state, and when the result is a state suggesting a "2R jackpot", a process for controlling the opening and closing of the first large prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the first large winning port 2006, each of the setting processes of the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot game state based on the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops during the time-saving state is in a state suggesting a "2R jackpot", when the 5R jackpot game state based on the result of the lottery process being in a state suggesting a "5R jackpot", when the 15R jackpot game state is in the time-saving state and in the non-time-saving state is ended. Then, the time-saving flag is reset at the next jackpot or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0" by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 218 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown.

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue as the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a jackpot game state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0", but if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 218 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (returning the counter value to "0").

If the jackpot in progress flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being performed in the small jackpot game state, is set (step S236), and if the small jackpot in progress flag is set, a small jackpot control process (step S236A) is executed to control the small jackpot game state. In addition, in the small jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state that suggests a "small jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second large prize winning port 2007 according to the small jackpot game state, and when the game ball received in the second large prize winning port 2007 is distributed to the V prize winning port 2008 and detected by the V prize winning port sensor 2603, a transition to the 15R jackpot game state is controlled.

In addition, if neither the big win in progress flag nor the small win in progress flag is set, a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S238) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S237), and a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops is executed (step S239) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S237). In this way, in this example, it is configured to execute the variable display of the second special pattern preferentially when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0".

Figure 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in the process of this step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of the step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in the step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates the process.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-judgment process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-judgment process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S241 or the random numbers acquired in step S251 described later, specifically the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second special random number), the reach random number, and the variable random number, with a pre-judgment table (not shown) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and if so, the type of jackpot, and if not, whether or not a reach performance will be executed as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of game performance to be executed (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a jackpot will be obtained, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is obtained, whether or not a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if a jackpot is not obtained, the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the reserved memory number (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (the value of the first special reserved number counter), and in the effect pre-determination process for the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second start port passing process described later, a second special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the second special random number has been obtained, and the second reserved memory number (the value of the second special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 where the start winning has occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special pattern based on the start winning that has occurred is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of mode of the game effect to be executed before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved memory area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The reserved memory area (first reserved memory area, second reserved memory area) has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order, starting from the first (first) memory area. Then, when the pre-determination command is received in a case where the pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is received, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the reserved memory area (first reserved memory area, second reserved memory area) is discarded in accordance with the received variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command), and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (shifting the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area). This allows the pre-determination information for the first special pattern to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurred to be identified, and the pre-determination information is discarded in order starting from the earliest.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2005, as shown in FIG. 210, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S252). If it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in the above step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S251, whether the display result of the variable display of the second special pattern is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach performance as the game performance executed on the display device 851, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S255), and then terminates the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first start port 2004 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second start port 2005 is set to "4". Note that the second start port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time-saving state, and the change time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. Therefore, even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "4", a long period will continue in which the change display of the second special symbol is not performed, or a long period will continue in which the second reserved memory number is at the upper limit, preventing a disadvantageous state for the player in which the player does not get a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second start port 2005.

Figure 211 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process operations will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special symbol normal process (step S280) in which a first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol's variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

Figure 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 212, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S301. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the reserved state as the processing of step S302, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the same RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservation of variable display control is released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S305, a winning determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

Figure 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in FIG. 214(A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special pattern normal processing is being performed, and the second special random number read in the second special pattern normal processing when the second special pattern normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in Figure 214 (A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low probability hit determination table used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)), and a high probability hit determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability time-saving state). In the low probability hit determination table which is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and match the miss determination value indicating that any other first special random number is a miss. In addition, in this example, in the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special random number within the second special pattern process processing, the second special random number is associated with the above-mentioned second special random number so that it matches the big hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a big hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, matches the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, and matches the miss determination value indicating that any other second special random number is a miss. That is, the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, and the player is placed in a more favorable state when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second start port 2005 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning at the first start port 2004 is executed. Also, the hit determination table for high probability is configured to increase the probability of a jackpot for each setting value by 10 times compared to the hit determination table for low probability. Note that for the setting values 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, the hall manager can change the setting value by performing a specified setting change operation using the setting key when the power is turned on.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

In addition, if a comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special pattern) determines that a small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag is set indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a small hit (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined that the win has been a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach judgment table for the time-saving state used when the game state is in the time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for the non-time-saving state used when the game state is not in the time-saving state. In the reach judgment table for the time-saving state, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match a reach judgment value indicating a non-reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-saving state, are associated with the above-mentioned reach random numbers so that they match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state, the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur are higher than in the time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is a miss (step S317) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S318).

Figure 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 215, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The lottery process result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in FIG. 214 (B), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R sure-variable jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which a lottery for a special lottery result is executed with a higher probability than normal. 2. 2. A 5R time-saving jackpot in which the first large prize opening 2006 is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 2006 after the first large prize opening 2006 has been left open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period after the jackpot game state ends until the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) has been executed 77 times. The opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling the state to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006; if the state was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved before 77 executions of the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the state was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second symbol random number read in the second special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214 (B), and the mode (stopping symbol of the second special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable control of the second special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.

in particular,
1. A 15R sure-variable jackpot in which an opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state in which a lottery for a special lottery result is executed with a higher probability than normal. 2. 2. A 5R time-saving jackpot in which the first large prize opening 2006 is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 2006 after the first large prize opening 2006 has been left open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006, and the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened from the normal period after the jackpot game state ends until the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) has been executed 77 times. The opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the first large winning opening 2006 after the first large winning opening 2006 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, thereby controlling the state to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 2006; if the state was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved before 77 executions of the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the state was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number is assigned 8 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, 100 judgment values in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 92 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 4% probability of a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is assigned 92 judgment values in the case of a 15R sure jackpot, a 100 judgment value in the case of a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 8 judgment values in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a jackpot, there is a 46% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the second symbol random number has a higher probability of determining a 15R jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared to the first symbol random number, and the player is in a more favorable state when the second special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the second start opening 2005 is executed than the first special symbol variable display based on the start winning entry into the first start opening 2004.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern according to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, if a 5R jackpot is determined, the 5R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131, but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in FIG. 214 (C), and determines the state when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win is stopped (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern for opening the second large winning opening 2007 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closing it is executed twice to control the state to a small winning game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second large winning opening 2007, and when the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2007 is distributed to the V winning opening 2008 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 2603, the first large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first large winning opening 2006, 2. A first small win, which controls the game state to a 15R big win state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the first large win port 2006 by repeating an opening and closing pattern 14 times when detected by the first large win port sensor 2525, and after the big win game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns has been executed 77 times, and controls the game state to a high probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening/closing pattern is executed twice to open the second large prize opening 2007 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then close it, thereby controlling to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the second large prize opening 2007, and when a game ball received in the second large prize opening 2007 is distributed to the V prize opening 2008 and detected by the V prize opening sensor 2603, an opening/closing pattern is executed to close the first large prize opening 2006 after opening it for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006. By repeating this 14 times, the game state is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the first large winning hole 2006, and if the game state was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved before the varying display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed 77 times after the jackpot game state ends, and if the game state was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends, and one of the two types of small wins is determined to be a second small win.

The small win pattern determination table compared to the first pattern random number has 200 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% chance of a first small win, and no chance of a second small win. On the other hand, the small win pattern determination table compared to the second pattern random number has 20 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a first small win, and 180 judgment values allocated to it in the case of a second small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, and a 90% chance of a second small win.

In addition, when the type of small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the state of the first special pattern when it stops. Specifically, if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol (step S327). After the determination process for the stop symbol has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the form of the stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328. Then, as the process of step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), and this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and change pattern command (changingly displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and displayed stationary at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the state (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation stops to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if a small win or 2R jackpot is identified from the received judgment result notification command, a 5R time-saving jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 5R time-saving jackpot is identified, and a 15R time-saving jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9") if a 15R special jackpot is identified. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and the display of the determined stop pattern is controlled on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time-saving state can be controlled after the jackpot game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times, but the time-saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the transition to the time-saving state is controlled. Specifically, if the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the state may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot game states. Also, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the state may be controlled to the non-time-saving state during the jackpot game state, and the time-saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot game state.

Figure 216 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 216, if the big win flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the big win type determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small win flag is set (step S343), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the small win type determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the reach (step S346); if neither the big win flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss that does not execute the reach performance), the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for the miss (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game state increases.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the next step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0". If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set (step S354) to indicate that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to be ended.

If the process in step S351 determines that the time-saving counter has a counter value of "0," or if the process in step S353 determines that the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol change process (step S283), the process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 1 second in the time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), while the fluctuation time information of the special pattern, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special pattern random numbers (first special pattern, second special pattern), so that the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern is set. In other words, the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the time-saving state has the fluctuation time information of the special pattern set so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special pattern is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs selected in the non-time-saving state.

Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 217, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process (step S284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 218, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time-saving flag (step S385). This ends the time-saving control (control of the time-saving state) and starts non-time-saving control (control of the normal state) when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has been performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example).

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to start (step S387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (the time to display the jackpot game start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed to set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one for each round executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process (step S401) and the during-opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot count counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the during-opening process (step S402), the jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the jackpot count reaching "0", the process moves to the post-opening process (step S403) to end the jackpot game.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is being executed (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R sure-win jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R sure-win jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process also sets a jackpot start command (15R special jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R special jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot).

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the first large prize opening 2006 according to the type of jackpot in the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has ended (for all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game) (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern two, five, or fifteen times to close the first large prize opening 2006 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 2525 detects that ten game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is prevented from being executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric device control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, when the big win flag is not set (step S386), if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating that a small win game is to be started (step S391), and sets the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time to display the fact that a small win game is to be started, etc.) in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that a small win game is being executed is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set. As a result, the presentation of the small win game according to the type of small win specified by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) according to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set.

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is being played, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 2007 according to the type of small win is completed in the small win in progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described later (for example, the opening and closing control in which the second large winning opening 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is repeated twice). By resetting the small win in progress flag, the small win control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are made executable.

In addition, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends this processing when it updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S395).

Figure 219 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process (step S401) for waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will move to the jackpot game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops has become a jackpot symbol, or until the next round starts.
2. A process for controlling the first large prize opening 2006 to an open state based on the fact that the mode of the special symbol when the variable display stops becomes a big win symbol, or based on the fact that the next round is about to start, and closing the first large prize opening 2006 after the first large prize opening 2006 has been open for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the first large prize opening sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2006 (step S402).
3. A post-opening process of waiting until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game state has ended when all rounds have ended (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process (step S401) of the jackpot opening should be performed. In addition, in the processing during opening of the jackpot opening (step S402), at the start of a round in which the first jackpot opening 2006 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of a round in which the first jackpot opening 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

[20. Pachinko machine 1 with small win rush]
[20-1. Specifications of the Pachinko Machine 1 in this Chapter]
The following is an explanation of the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter. Hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as special symbol 1, and the second special symbol will be referred to as special symbol 2. In addition, the first special symbol variation will be referred to as variation of special symbol 1, the second special symbol variation will be referred to as variation of special symbol 2, and the variations of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 will be collectively referred to as simply variation.

Figures 220 and 221 are examples of tables showing the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter and the allocation of winning symbols to special symbols 1 and 2. Both of these tables are stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310.

Figure 220(a) is a table showing the probability of winning in the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing. According to Figure 220(a), in both the variations of Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, the probability of a big win in the high probability state is 2048/65536, and the probability of a big win in the low probability state is 1600/65536. In addition, in both the variations of Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, the probability of a small win in the high probability state and the low probability state is 63488/65536. In addition, in both the variations of Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, the probability of a loss in the high probability state is 0/65536 (i.e., there is no loss in the high probability state), and the probability of a loss in the low probability state is 448/65536.

Figure 220(b) is an example of a jackpot random number pattern table for special pattern 1, and Figure 221(c) is an example of a jackpot random number pattern table for special pattern 2. When a normal pattern in Figure 220(b) and Figure 221(c) is won, a jackpot game begins, and when the jackpot game ends, the state is controlled to a low probability state. Also, when a specific pattern is won and the jackpot game ends, the state is controlled to a high probability state. Hereinafter, a jackpot resulting from winning a normal pattern is also called a normal jackpot, and a jackpot resulting from winning a specific pattern is also called a guaranteed jackpot. According to Figures 220(b) and 221(c), in both Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2, 40% of the jackpots won are normal patterns, and 60% are specific patterns.

Also, according to Fig. 220(b) and Fig. 221(c), all the jackpots on Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are two-round jackpots, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, even if you win a jackpot, you will only get a small amount of balls. As will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the high probability non-time-saving game state is the so-called small hit rush state, and the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter can mainly increase the number of balls in this state. In other words, the high probability non-time-saving game state (if you play with a so-called right hit, as will be described in detail later) is a favorable state (the most expected balls per fluctuation) in which it is easy to get game ball B because the frequency of small hits on Special Chart 2 per unit time is high compared to other game states.

Figure 221 (d) is an example of a small win random number pattern table for special chart 1, and Figure 221 (e) is an example of a small win random number pattern table for special chart 2. When the small win pattern of special chart 1 or special chart 2 is won, the small win game starts, and even if the small win game ends, the game state before the small win game starts is maintained (i.e., if a small win is won in a low probability state, the game state is controlled to a low probability state even after the small win game ends, and if a small win is won in a high probability state, the game state is controlled to a high probability state even after the small win game ends). According to Figures 221 (d) and 221 (e), there is only one type of small win pattern for both special chart 1 and special chart 2.

Figure 222 is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transitions of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter. Figure 222 shows an example of state transitions when playing using the normal game method, and detailed state transitions are omitted.

In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, a player hits the ball from the left to enter the first starting hole 2004, and plays a game based on a special lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first special lottery) according to special chart 1. In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, if a special jackpot (without ceiling), which is part of a special jackpot, is won, the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state with no ceiling after the jackpot game ends. The high-probability time-saving game state with no ceiling is a state in which the time-saving game state continues unless a jackpot is won.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, if a special jackpot (ceiling set), which is part of a special jackpot, is won, the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving play state with a ceiling after the jackpot play ends. The high-probability time-saving play state with a ceiling is a state in which the time-saving play state ends when a specified number of fluctuations or a specified number of small jackpot plays end, even if a jackpot is not won, and the game transitions to a high-probability non-time-saving play state. Although not shown in the figure, even if a normal jackpot (without time-saving), which is part of a normal jackpot, is won during the first special pattern fluctuation in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, the low-probability non-time-saving play state will be maintained after the jackpot play ends.

In the small hit and big hit games of Special Chart 1, the first big winning hole 2006 opens, so the game is played by hitting from the left. However, although there is an extremely high probability of winning the small hit of Special Chart 1, as will be described in detail later, in the small hit game of Special Chart 1, the opening time of the first big winning hole 2006 is extremely short, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball B in, so essentially no winning balls can be obtained.

In the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) and the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the player hits the ball from the left to enter the first starting hole 2004, and the first special lottery is drawn to play. In the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) and the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), even if the player hits the ball from the left to enter the gate 2002, the player has an extremely low probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery (for example, 1/256), just like in the low probability non-time-saving game state, and the variable winning hole door 2521 has a short opening time (for example, 0.076 seconds), just like in the low probability non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the difficulty of getting the ball B to enter the first starting hole 2004 (ball entry rate) does not decrease significantly compared to the non-time-saving game state, and is almost the same.

When you win a regular jackpot (no time-saving) in the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), you will transition to a low-probability non-time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends. Also, when you win a special jackpot (ceiling set) in the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), you will transition to a high-probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) after the jackpot play ends. Although not shown in the figure, even if you win a special jackpot (no ceiling) in the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling) will be maintained after the jackpot play ends.

When in the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), if you win a normal jackpot (without time-saving), you will transition to a low probability non-time-saving play state. Also, when in the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), if you win a special jackpot (without ceiling), you will transition to the high probability time-saving play state (without ceiling) after the jackpot play ends. Although not shown in the figure, even if you win a special jackpot (ceiling set) in the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) will be maintained.

In addition, if a special jackpot (ceiling set) is won in a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the ceiling number of times will be reset according to the winning symbol of the special jackpot. Also, if a special jackpot (ceiling set) is won in a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) starts again, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the ceiling and the remaining number of small jackpot fluctuations may be inherited from the state immediately before the special jackpot (ceiling set) game started.

In the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), when a predetermined number of fluctuations ends or a predetermined number of small win fluctuations ends (hereinafter also referred to as reaching the ceiling), the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to a high-probability non-time-saving game state. As mentioned above, the high-probability non-time-saving game state is a so-called small win rush state, and the player can win a lot of balls.

In addition, in the low probability non-time-saving play state, high probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), and high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), if you win a special jackpot (direct rush), which is part of a special jackpot, you will transition to the high probability non-time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends, but the percentage of jackpots that are special jackpots (direct rush) is extremely low (for example, 0.5% of jackpots in the low probability state and 5% of jackpots in the high probability state).

The details will be described later, but a special jackpot (direct rush) is a jackpot pattern that transitions to a high probability non-time-saving state even if it is won in a low probability non-time-saving state, a high probability non-time-saving state (no ceiling), or a high probability non-time-saving state (with ceiling). For example, there are jackpot patterns that transition to a high probability non-time-saving state when won in a low probability non-time-saving state, but transition to a high probability non-time-saving state when won in a high probability non-time-saving state (no ceiling) or a high probability non-time-saving state (with ceiling) (i.e., the jackpot pattern is a special jackpot that is not a direct rush in a low probability non-time-saving state, but is a special jackpot (direct rush) in a high probability non-time-saving state (no ceiling) or a high probability non-time-saving state (with ceiling)).

Therefore, in order to transition to a high-probability non-time-saving play state and obtain a large number of balls, the main transition route is to transition to a high-probability time-saving play state (with a ceiling) and reach the ceiling in the high-probability play state without hitting a jackpot.

Also, as mentioned above, all jackpot games are two rounds long, so a player can only win a small number of balls depending on the jackpot game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter can provide a new gameplay in which the player hopes to win a guaranteed jackpot (with a ceiling) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), but hopes not to win a jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling).

In the low-probability non-time-saving play state, the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), and the high-probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), if you win a regular jackpot (with time-saving), which is part of a regular jackpot, you will transition to the low-probability time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends; however, this is not shown in the diagram because the percentage of such wins is extremely low (for example, 1% of jackpots).

In the high probability non-time-saving game state (small win rush state), the player hits the right side to place the game ball in the second starting hole 2005, which is always open, and plays a special lottery based on the special chart 2 (hereinafter also referred to as the second special lottery). As explained in FIG. 220(a), in the high probability state, a small win is won with an extremely high probability (63488/655536), and in the small win game won by the fluctuation of the special chart 2, it is easy for the game ball B to enter the second large winning hole 2007. Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the player can increase the number of balls by playing the small win game with an extremely high probability.

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if a special jackpot is won, the high-probability non-time-saving game state will be maintained even after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if a normal jackpot is won, the game will transition to a low-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends. Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the gameplay is such that the player hopes not to win a jackpot, and even if they do win, it will not be a normal jackpot.

In the low probability time-saving game state, if a player hits from the left and causes game ball B to enter gate 2002, there is an extremely high probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery (e.g., 255/256. It may be 100%, such as 256/256), and the variable winning gate 2521 opens for a long period of time (e.g., 5.5 seconds), making it easier to get game ball B into the first starting gate 2004 compared to the non-time-saving game state.

The low-probability time-saving play state is the so-called pull-back mode, and when a special jackpot is won in the low-probability time-saving play state, regardless of the type of jackpot, the game will transition to a high-probability non-time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends. When a normal jackpot (no time-saving play) is won in the low-probability time-saving play state, the game will transition to a low-probability non-time-saving play state after the jackpot play ends.

In addition, if a normal jackpot (with time-saving) is won in the low-probability time-saving play state, the ceiling number of times will be reset. Also, if a normal jackpot (with time-saving) is won in the low-probability time-saving play state and the low-probability time-saving play state starts again, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the ceiling and the remaining number of fluctuations of small jackpots may be inherited from the state immediately before the normal jackpot (with time-saving) play started.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when a predetermined number of fluctuations is completed or a predetermined number of small win fluctuations is completed, the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Although not shown in the figure, even if a normal jackpot (with time saving) is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state is maintained.

The control for realizing the small win rush state is explained below. In the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the variation of special pattern 1 and the variation of special pattern 2 are each started individually in response to the extraction of a special random number, and the variation display of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 can be executed simultaneously (simultaneous variation of special patterns). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (reserved), the reserved special random numbers are consumed individually according to the progress of the variation display of each special random number.

In other words, when the first special pattern that is changing stops, the first special pattern reserved in the first special pattern memory display starts changing, and when the second special pattern that is changing stops, the second special pattern reserved in the second special pattern memory display starts changing. Also, since special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 can change simultaneously, the decorative patterns are displayed in the performance display device 1600 so as to change simultaneously in response to the change of each special pattern.

When either Special Chart 1 or Special Chart 2 stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot, one of the following processes is carried out for the other special chart that is fluctuating simultaneously. As a first processing example, the jackpot game using one special chart is controlled, and the fluctuation of the other special chart is deleted (forced to stop with a miss). In this case, even after the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation of the deleted other special chart does not resume, and the game starts with the next fluctuation of the other special chart.

As a second processing example, a jackpot game using one special symbol is controlled, and the passage of the time fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily suspended while the jackpot game is being played. During the jackpot game, the special symbol whose fluctuation has been suspended is displayed, for example, in a flashing manner (displayed in a manner different from when it is not paused (so that the player can recognize that it is paused)) on the special symbol display. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the display of the fluctuation of the other special symbol that was paused is resumed from the remaining time fluctuation. As a third processing example, a jackpot game using one special symbol is controlled, and the time fluctuation of the other special symbol is reset, and the fluctuation of the other special symbol begins again after the jackpot game ends.

As mentioned above, in this chapter, the high probability non-time-saving play state is a state in which it is easy to get small winning balls (the so-called small winning rush). Below, we will explain an example of the specifications for realizing a small winning rush only in the high probability non-time-saving play state.

Since the second starting hole 2005 is not provided with any opening/closing member, the second starting hole 2005 is always open, and by performing a so-called right hit in all game states, game ball B can be placed in the second starting hole 2005 and the second special lottery can be entered. Also, in all game states, the probability of winning a small jackpot due to the change in special chart 2 is extremely high.

However, in game states other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the special chart 2 is very long compared to the fluctuation time of the special chart 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time of the special chart 2 (for example, about 5 minutes) is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special chart 1 (for example, about 3 minutes). Therefore, in the small hit game of the special chart 2, the second large winning hole 2007 opens, but the time from when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 to when the second large winning hole 2007 opens in the small hit game corresponding to the ball entry is also very long. Furthermore, since the opening and closing time of the second large winning hole 2007 in the small hit game is short (for example, 0.1 seconds, which is shorter than the opening time of the first large winning hole 2006 in the big hit game) and the number of openings and closings is small (for example, 1 round), even if the fluctuation of the special chart 2 is executed, it is difficult to make the game ball B enter the second large winning hole 2007 at the right time during the small hit game.

Even if it were possible to timely get game ball B into the second large winning hole 2007 during a small win game on special chart 2, the fluctuation time of special chart 2 is very long, so the number of balls obtained per unit time is small and the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in game states other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the player should generally hit from the left and proceed with the game in such a way that game ball B enters the first starting hole 2004.

On the other hand, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the special chart 2 is set to be short. Specifically, for example, the fluctuation time (e.g., about 1 second) of the shortened small win fluctuation of the special chart 2 (a fluctuation in which the reach performance is not executed) is set to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the special chart 1 (e.g., about 4 seconds), and when a small win fluctuation starts with the special chart 2 reserved in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the shortened small win fluctuation is selected at a high rate (e.g., about 90%). Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the player can perform a so-called right hit and progress the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, and the game can be progressed smoothly without reducing the number of balls.

In this way, in the high-probability non-time-saving play state, the player can frequently win small wins by placing game ball B in the second starting hole 2005, and can obtain balls from small win play. On the other hand, in play states other than the high-probability non-time-saving play state, the player cannot efficiently obtain balls even if he places game ball B in the second starting hole 2005. This makes it possible to realize a small win rush state in which it is easier to obtain balls from small wins only in the high-probability non-time-saving play state.

Figure 223 is an example of a table (time-saving number table) of the number of time-saving times awarded when a hit (including a big hit and a small hit) is won in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Figure 224 is an example of a time-saving number table in a high-probability time-saving game state. Figure 225 is an example of a time-saving number table in a low-probability time-saving game state. Figure 226 is an example of a time-saving number table in a high-probability non-time-saving game state.

The time-saving count table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The time-saving count table defines the number of times the time-saving game state will occur for each combination of the game state when a jackpot is won in the special lottery and the type of winning symbol. The time-saving count table also defines the type of variation pattern for each combination of the game state when a jackpot is won in the special lottery and the type of winning symbol.

For example, row 2231 of the time-saving count table in FIG. 223 indicates the termination triggers for the time-saving game state of the low-probability time-saving game state that is entered after the end of the jackpot game that occurs after the jackpot fluctuation of "Special pattern 1_2R normal pattern 2" in the low-probability non-time-saving game state (the time-saving game state ends when even one of the termination triggers is satisfied).

As line 2231 shows, the termination triggers include the start of the 31st Special Chart 1 fluctuation since the start of the time-saving game state, the start of the 6th Special Chart 2 fluctuation, the start of the 100th special pattern fluctuation since the start of the time-saving game state (i.e., the total number of fluctuations of Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 is 100), and the end of 31 small win fluctuations (the time-saving game state may end at the end of a small win fluctuation, or the time-saving game state may end at the start of a small win game corresponding to the small win fluctuation). In other words, "Special Chart 1_2R Normal Pattern 2" is a normal pattern (with time-saving).

In the termination trigger shown in line 2231, the total number of fluctuations of special chart 1 and special chart 2 is defined as 100, but if playing in the normal way in a low-probability time-saving game state, the special chart 1 fluctuation will be executed and played, so in order to prevent the time-saving game state from being extended by the special chart 2 fluctuation, the termination trigger based on the total number of fluctuations of special chart 1 and special chart 2 fluctuations only needs to be 31 or more, which is the termination trigger based on the number of fluctuations of special chart 1.

However, in order to provide a margin, it is preferable that the number of times is, for example, 31 plus a predetermined number (for example, 35 times). Also, since the number of times that special chart 2 changes is set to 6 times in the termination trigger shown in row 2231, the termination trigger due to the total number of times that special chart 1 changes and special chart 2 changes may be a value smaller than the sum of 31 times, which is the termination trigger due to the number of times that special chart 1 changes, and 6 times, which is the termination trigger due to the number of times that special chart 2 changes.

Also, line 2232 indicates the timing for ending the high probability time-saving game state that is entered after the end of the jackpot game that occurs after the jackpot variation of "Special pattern 1_2R specific pattern 13" in the low probability non-time-saving game state. After the jackpot game with the specific pattern ends, the high probability time-saving game state is set, but as line 2232 indicates, if any of the following is achieved: the 100th variation of Special pattern 1 has started since the start of the time-saving game state, the 100th variation of Special pattern 2 has started, the 100th variation of Special pattern 2 has started, or the 100th variation of the special pattern has started since the start of the time-saving game state, or 48 small jackpot variations have ended, the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the high probability non-time-saving game state (i.e., small jackpot rush state).

Therefore, in the low probability non-time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 13" is the pattern for a guaranteed jackpot (ceiling set). Similarly, in the low probability non-time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 2" to "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 12" are also the patterns for a guaranteed jackpot (ceiling set).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high probability time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 18" and "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 19" are the patterns for the special jackpot (ceiling set). According to FIG. 2220(b), the distribution rate of "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 18" and "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 19" is only 8/200 in total, so the probability of winning a special jackpot (ceiling set) in the high probability time-saving play state is low.

As mentioned above, in the high probability game state fluctuation, there is no winning a miss, and all fluctuations other than the big win are small wins, so the only end trigger shown in row 2232 that can actually be achieved is the end trigger due to a small win (because the number of times that Special Chart 1 fluctuates, the number of times that Special Chart 2 fluctuates, and the number of times that Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 fluctuate combined are all greater than the number of end triggers due to small wins). Therefore, if the 48th fluctuation starts without a big win, the 48th small win fluctuation will actually start, and the time-saving game state shown in row 2231 will end, so it can be said that the ceiling of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) to which the player enters by winning the "Special Chart 1_2R specific pattern 13" is 48 times.

As mentioned above, in the low probability time-saving game state, although the probability is low, the time-saving game state may end due to the termination trigger caused by the number of changes in special chart 1, the number of changes in special chart 2, or the total number of changes in special chart 1 and special chart 2, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 needs to count the number of changes in special chart 1 and the number of changes in special chart 2 since the time-saving game state started in order to check the remaining number of time-saving times. On the other hand, in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the time-saving game state does not end due to the termination trigger caused by the number of changes in special chart 1, the number of changes in special chart 2, or the total number of changes in special chart 1 and special chart 2, so the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may or may not count the number of changes in special chart 1 and the number of changes in special chart 2 since the time-saving game state started in order to check the remaining number of time-saving times.

Also, by referring to Figures 223 and 224, it can be seen that there are multiple types of ceiling lengths for the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) that is entered upon winning the symbol for a sure-variable jackpot (ceiling set). Details will be described later, but immediately after entering the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), there are cases where a performance that does not announce the number of small jackpot fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is not executed, allowing the player to tensely wait to see when the ceiling will be reached.

In addition, in the high probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation of special chart 1 and special chart 2 may result in a losing win. In this case, the time-saving game state may also end due to an ending trigger based on the number of times special chart 1 changes, the number of times special chart 2 changes, and the total number of times special chart 1 and special chart 2 change.

Line 2233 also indicates the trigger for ending the high probability time-saving game state that is entered after the end of the jackpot game that occurs after the jackpot game that occurs after the jackpot game of the "Special Chart 1_2R Specific Symbol 20" jackpot variation occurs in the low probability non-time-saving game state. After the jackpot game with the specific symbol ends, the high probability time-saving game state is set, and the "next time" indicated in line 2233 indicates the end of the next jackpot game.

Therefore, in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 20" is a special pattern for a guaranteed jackpot (no ceiling). Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 14" to "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 19" are also special patterns for a guaranteed jackpot (no ceiling). Similarly, "Special chart 2_2R special pattern 1" to "Special chart 2_2R special pattern 2" are also special patterns for a guaranteed jackpot (no ceiling).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high probability time-saving play state, "Special 1_2R special pattern 18" and "Special 1_2R special pattern 19" are the patterns for a guaranteed jackpot (ceiling set). According to FIG. 2220(b), the distribution of "Special 1_2R special pattern 18" and "Special 1_2R special pattern 19" is only 8/200 in total, so the probability of winning a guaranteed jackpot (ceiling set) in the high probability time-saving play state is low compared to the probability of winning a guaranteed jackpot (no ceiling) described below.

Also, according to Figure 223, the jackpot patterns for Special Chart 2 are only "Special Chart 2_2R Specific Pattern 1" to "Special Chart 2_2R Specific Pattern 2", which are patterns for a sure jackpot (no ceiling), and "Special Chart 2_2R Normal Pattern 1", which is a pattern for a normal jackpot (no time-saving). Therefore, even if you play with the so-called right-hand stroke in a low-probability, non-time-saving play state (even if a lottery is held based on Special Chart 2 and you win a jackpot), you will not be able to transition to the high-probability, non-time-saving play state which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is recommended that you play with the so-called left-hand stroke in a low-probability, non-time-saving play state (a play method in which a lottery is held based on Special Chart 1). Similarly, according to Figures 224 and 225, even if you play with the so-called right hand in a high probability time-saving game state and a low probability time-saving game state, you cannot transition to the most advantageous high probability non-time-saving game state, so it is recommended to play with the so-called left hand even in a high probability time-saving game state and a low probability time-saving game state.

Line 2234 indicates that in the low probability non-time-saving game state, when a jackpot variation of "Special pattern 1_2R special pattern 1" occurs, a transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game that follows the jackpot variation. The "0" indicated by line 2234 indicates that the non-time-saving game state starts (high probability) even if the variation of special pattern 1, the variation of special pattern 2, the combined variation of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and the small jackpot variation are not executed even once.

In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, "Special Chart 1_2R Specific Pattern 1" is the pattern for a sure-win jackpot (direct rush). According to Figure 220, since the allocation of "Special Chart 1_2R Specific Pattern 1" is only 1/200, the probability of winning a sure-win jackpot (direct rush) in the low-probability non-time-saving play state is low compared to the probability of winning a sure-win jackpot (no ceiling) or a sure-win jackpot (ceiling set).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving play state, "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 1" and "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 16" are the patterns for a guaranteed jackpot (direct rush). According to FIG. 220, the ratio allocated to "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 1" or "Special chart 1_2R special pattern 16" is 10/200, and the probability of winning a guaranteed jackpot (direct rush) in the high-probability time-saving play state is higher than the probability of winning a guaranteed jackpot (direct rush) in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, but is lower than the probability of winning a guaranteed jackpot (no ceiling) in the high-probability time-saving play state.

Also, as shown in row 2231, when a jackpot fluctuation of "Special Chart 1_2R Normal Pattern 2" occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, in the (low-probability) time-saving game state that is entered after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation of the table A indicated in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table described below is executed for the fluctuations up to the 29th time of special chart 1, the fluctuation of the table B indicated in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is executed for the next fluctuation of special chart 1 (i.e., the 30th time), the fluctuation of the table B indicated in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is executed for the next fluctuation of special chart 1 (i.e., the 31st time), and the fluctuation of the table C indicated in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is executed for all fluctuations of special chart 1 from the next time onwards (i.e., all from the 32nd time onwards) (∞ means all fluctuations thereafter), the fluctuation of the table A indicated in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is executed.

Also, as shown in row 2231, when a jackpot fluctuation of "Special pattern 1_2R normal pattern 2" occurs in a low probability non-time-saving game state, the (low probability) time-saving game state that is entered after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation of the special pattern 2 in the fluctuation from the first fluctuation onwards (i.e. all fluctuations) is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of table A shown in the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table. Details will be described later, but the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table is defined for each combination of the game state and whether or not the time-saving function is activated.

As mentioned above, the game state does not change as a result of winning a small jackpot, so the number of times the time is reduced and the type of change pattern after winning a small jackpot are not defined in the time reduction number of times table.

According to FIG. 225, in the low-probability time-saving game state, regardless of which jackpot symbol is won, the game will transition to a non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (because the values in the time-saving count column are all 0). Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving game state, if a normal symbol is won, the game will transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, and if a specific symbol is won, the game will transition to a high-probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

According to FIG. 226, if a specific symbol is selected in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the game will transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. Also, if a normal symbol is selected in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the game will transition to a low probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the jackpot probability and the allocation of normal symbols and specific symbols do not change regardless of whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 changes, but as mentioned above, if you hit from the right, you can easily put game ball B into the second starting hole 2005, which is always open, and you can win balls in the small jackpot game of special symbol 2, so it is recommended to hit from the right.

In addition, in game states other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, playing with a left-handed shot is an advantageous game method for the player, but the second starting hole 2005 is always open, and there is no gate for receiving a normal lottery on the right side of the game board 5. Therefore, a performance gate is provided on each of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542. In game states other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if the player plays with a right-handed shot and game ball B passes through the performance gate, a left-handed shot warning performance is executed to warn the player to play with a left-handed shot.

If a gate for effect is not provided, the sensor that can most easily detect the game ball B provided on the right side of the game board 5 is the sensor provided in the second starting hole 2005. In this case, for example, in a high probability non-time-saving game state, if a player mistakenly hits the ball to the right and plays the game, the left-hit warning effect can be executed when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005. However, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, the next game ball B has already been hit with enough strength to reach the right side of the game board 5, so even if the rotation angle of the handle 192 is adjusted after the left-hit warning effect appears, there is a risk that multiple game balls B will enter the second starting hole 2005.

Also, according to FIG. 224, when in the high probability time-saving game state, if a normal jackpot on Special Chart 2 is won, the game will transition to a low probability non-time-saving game state, and if a special jackpot on Special Chart 2 is won, the game will transition to a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling). Therefore, a jackpot on Special Chart 2 is disadvantageous to the player compared to a jackpot on Special Chart 1, which can transition to a low probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). Also, since the odds of winning a jackpot on Special Chart 2 are 2048/65536, if multiple game balls B enter the second starting hole 2005, there is a good chance that a jackpot on Special Chart 2 will be won.

Therefore, since it is highly likely that the player would be at a disadvantage if a warning effect were to be performed when the sensor of the second starting hole 2005 detects game ball B, a performance gate is provided on the game board 5. The performance gate is preferably located at a position where, when game ball B hit to the right passes through the performance gate, the game ball B can adjust the rotation angle of the handle 192 until the next time game ball B is shot (if the handle 192 is kept twisted, the game ball B will be shot 0.6 seconds after the previous shot). Specifically, for example, if the performance gate is located at a position where game ball B passes through the performance gate 0.2 seconds after it is shot, there is a period of 0.4 seconds between the start of the display of the left-hit warning effect and the next time game ball B is shot, so the player can adjust the rotation angle of the handle 192.

Figures 227 and 228 are examples of a variation pattern auxiliary table. Figure 272(a) is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table used in a low-probability non-time-shortened game state, and Figure 227(b) is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table used in a low-probability time-shortened game state. Figure 228(a) is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table used in a high-probability non-time-shortened game state, and Figure 228(b) is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table used in a high-probability time-shortened game state. The variation pattern auxiliary table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310.

Below, we will explain the types of fluctuation patterns shown in the fluctuation time auxiliary tables in Figures 227 and 228. First, we will explain the types of fluctuation patterns in the low-probability non-time-saving game state in Figure 227 (a). "Normal time" is the normal fluctuation pattern of special chart 1 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state.

According to Figures 223, 224, and 226, "normal times (irregular times only)" is the variation pattern used in the 30th and 31st variations of special chart 1 after transition to the low-probability time-saving game state. However, in order for the 30th and 31st variations after transition to the low-probability time-saving game state to be in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the 6th variation of special chart 2 after transition to the low-probability time-saving game state must have started and the time-saving game state must have ended before these variations are reached.

"Strategic countermeasure length fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern of the special chart 2 in a low probability non-time-saving game state. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter has a small hit rush, so the fluctuation time of the special chart 2 is long except in a high probability non-time-saving game state. The fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation and small hit fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of "Strategic countermeasure length fluctuation" is, for example, about 4 minutes, and no performance is performed in the performance display device 1600. The fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of "Strategic countermeasure length fluctuation" is, for example, about 3 minutes, and in order to prevent the player from leaving the seat without noticing the big hit fluctuation, it is desirable to perform a performance indicating that a big hit fluctuation will occur at the start of the fluctuation in the performance display device 1600. Also, for the same reason, a performance indicating that a big hit fluctuation will occur at the time of winning corresponding to the big hit fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of "Strategic countermeasure length fluctuation" may be performed.

The types of fluctuation patterns of the low-probability time-saving game state in Fig. 227(b) are explained. "Time-saving fluctuation" is the normal fluctuation pattern of special chart 1 in the low-probability time-saving game state. "Forced showdown" is a fluctuation pattern used in the 30th fluctuation of special chart 1 after the transition to the low-probability time-saving game state according to Figs. 223, 224, and 226 (i.e., the fluctuation of special chart 1 immediately before the fluctuation of special chart 1 immediately before the end of the low-probability time-saving game state, unless the time-saving game state is ended by the ending trigger caused by the fluctuation of special chart 2). In the fluctuation of "forced showdown", the showdown performance described below is forcibly executed.

According to Figs. 223, 224, and 226, the "low probability time-saving result" is a variation pattern used in the 31st variation of special chart 1 after transition to the low probability time-saving game state (i.e., the variation of special chart 1 immediately before the end of the low probability time-saving game state, unless the variation of special chart 2 is executed to end the time-saving game state). In the variation of the "low probability time-saving result", a performance is executed to display a result screen showing the obtained balls without transitioning to the low probability non-time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), and the high probability time-saving game state (without ceiling) after transitioning to the high probability non-time-saving game state. Note that, if the variation of the "low probability time-saving result" is performed without passing through the high probability non-time-saving game state, the result screen does not need to be displayed, and instead, for example, the performance used in the "time-saving variation" of table A may be displayed.

If the change in the "low probability time-saving result" is a change in a sure-win jackpot, the game will transition back to a high probability non-time-saving game state, so a revival effect may be displayed after the result screen is displayed, or a performance may be displayed indicating that a sure-win jackpot has been won (transitioning to a high probability non-time-saving game state) without displaying the result screen. Also, to prevent the player from misunderstanding that they are transitioning to a high probability non-time-saving game state, a performance may be displayed indicating that a normal jackpot has been won (transitioning to a low probability non-time-saving game state) without displaying the result screen.

"Strategic countermeasure length variation (for time-saving)" is a variation pattern of special chart 2 in a low-probability time-saving game state, and is the same variation pattern as "Strategic countermeasure length variation" in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, if a normal jackpot is won in a high-probability non-time-saving game state and the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state, there is a possibility that up to four reserved special charts 2 remain due to right-hitting in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, when the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state, for example, if a small jackpot game of special chart 1 is executed, the miss variation and small jackpot variation of special chart 2 may be forcibly (for example, in an extremely short variation time of about 1 second) determined as a miss variation. However, even in such a case, if the reserved special chart 2 is a jackpot variation, it is desirable not to forcibly determine the reserved special chart 2 as a losing variation so as not to put the player at a disadvantage (if the reserved special chart 2 is a normal jackpot variation, it will transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state (the most disadvantageous state for the player), so it may be forcibly determined as a losing variation).

The types of fluctuation patterns in the high probability non-time-saving game state (small win rush state) in Figure 228 (a) are explained. "Special chart 1 fluctuation during RUSH" is a fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. As mentioned above, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the game progresses by hitting the right, so it is an irregular state for the fluctuation of special chart 1 to be executed. If the "special chart 1 fluctuation during RUSH" is a small win fluctuation (no misses are won during the high probability), it is desirable for the fluctuation time to be long (for example, about 4 minutes, which is longer than all fluctuation times of special chart 1 executed in game states other than the high probability non-time-saving game state).

In addition, if the "Special Chart 1 Change during RUSH" is a small win change, it is desirable not to execute the effect on the effect display device 1600 in order to make the player aware that executing the Special Chart 1 change in a high probability non-time-saving game state will not result in a favorable result.

When "Special chart 1 change during RUSH" is a big hit change, the change time is shorter than when it is a small hit change, for example, about 30 seconds. For example, when "Special chart 1 change during RUSH" is a big hit change, the change of special chart 2 that is won while this big hit change is being executed may be forced to a small hit change, in which case it is possible to obtain balls due to a small hit rush even during the big hit change of special chart 1.

"For RUSH" is the normal variation of special chart 2 in a high probability non-time-saving play state, and an effect exclusive to the small win rush state is executed. The variation time of the "for RUSH" variation is selected from, for example, 1 second, 4 seconds, and 10 seconds. In particular, a variation time of 1 second is selected for small win variations with reserved special chart 2, which allows for a speedy win in the small win play state, increasing the ball output increase speed.

The types of fluctuation patterns of the high probability time-saving game state in FIG. 228(b) are explained. "Normal" is a fluctuation pattern selected in the normal fluctuation of special chart 1 in the high probability time-saving game state. "Counter activated (next training)" is a fluctuation pattern that can be executed in the specified number of fluctuations of special chart 1 after the high probability time-saving game state starts, according to FIG. 223 and FIG. 224. In the "Counter activated (next training)" fluctuation, a performance is performed that suggests that a preparation performance for a showdown performance will be performed in the next fluctuation (a showdown performance is performed in the fluctuation of reaching the ceiling in the time-saving high probability game state (with ceiling), for example, if the next fluctuation is performed in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the showdown performance will be won, and if the next fluctuation is performed in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the showdown performance will be lost).

The counter referred to here is a counter indicating the remaining number of small win fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving play state is reached, and is displayed on the performance display device 1600, as will be described in detail later. However, the counter may display the true remaining number of small win fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until the ceiling is reached in the high-probability time-saving play state (with ceiling), or may display a false remaining number of small win fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until the ceiling is reached in the high-probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) (for example, a value greater or less than the number of small win fluctuations remaining until the ceiling), or may display a false remaining number of small win fluctuations (number of fluctuations) even though the ceiling will never be reached in the high-probability time-saving play state (no ceiling). In other words, when the counter is displayed, the player expects the counter value to become zero.

According to Figs. 223 and 224, "counter activated (next reach ceiling)" is a variation pattern that can be executed when special chart 1 varies a predetermined number of times after the high probability time-saving game state begins. In the variation of "counter activated (next reach ceiling)", an effect is produced that suggests that a reach effect will be produced in the next variation. According to Figs. 223 and 224, "counter activated (next reach ceiling)" can also be executed when special chart 1 varies a predetermined number of times in the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) (i.e., a miss-like announcement is made in the reach effect, and the game does not transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state even when the small win variation ends).

According to Figures 223 and 224, "Training Transition" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the next (or subsequent) variation of Special Chart 1 following the "Counter Activated (Next Training)" variation in the high probability time-saving game state. In the "Training Transition" variation, a presentation is executed that suggests that a training presentation will begin. Note that the "Training Transition" variation can also be executed in the variation of Special Chart 1 from the beginning of the transition to the high probability state up to a specified number of times.

According to Figures 223 and 224, "In Training" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special chart 1 from the next variation of "Training Transition" onwards in the high probability time-saving game state. In the variation of "In Training", a training performance is executed. Note that the variation of "In Training" can also be executed in the variation of special chart 1 from the beginning of the transition to the high probability state up to a predetermined number of times.

According to Figures 223 and 224, the "training reach ceiling" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special chart 1 from the next time onwards after the "training" variation in the high probability time-saving game state. In the variation of the "training reach ceiling", a reach is formed in the training performance. The variation of the "training reach ceiling" can also be executed in the first variation of special chart 1 when transitioning to the high probability state.

According to Fig. 223 and Fig. 224, the "normal background reach ceiling" is a variation pattern that can be executed in the high probability time-saving game state when the special chart 1 changes the next time after the "counter is activated (next reach ceiling)" variation. In the "normal background reach ceiling" variation, the normal background (different from the training performance) in the high probability time-saving game state is displayed and then a reach performance is executed.

"Attack countermeasure length fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern that is executed in all Special Chart 2 fluctuations in a high-probability time-saving play state, and is the same fluctuation pattern as "Attack countermeasure length fluctuation" in a low-probability non-time-saving play state.

The basic changes in the fluctuation pattern of Special Chart 1 in the high probability time-saving game state described above are summarized below. In the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the "normal" fluctuation pattern is executed first, and then the "counter activated (next training)" or "counter activated (next reach ceiling)" fluctuation pattern, in which the counter is displayed, is executed.

When the "Counter Activated (Next Training)" variation pattern is executed after the "Normal" variation pattern, as in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) entered by winning "Special Chart 1 - Specific Pattern 7" in the low-probability non-time-saving game state in Figure 223, the "Training Transition" variation pattern is executed and the training presentation begins, and then the "Training" variation pattern is executed, after which the reach presentation is executed by the "Training Reach Ceiling" variation pattern in the final variation of the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). In this variation of the "Training Reach Ceiling", it is announced that the ceiling in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) has been reached, and the game transitions to the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

When the "counter activated (next reach ceiling)" fluctuation pattern is executed after the "normal" fluctuation pattern, as in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) entered by winning "Special symbol 1 - specific symbol 4" in the low probability non-time-saving game state in Figure 223, a reach performance is executed by the "normal background reach ceiling" fluctuation pattern in the final fluctuation of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). In this "normal background reach ceiling" fluctuation, it is announced that the ceiling in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) has been reached, and the game transitions to the high probability non-time-saving game state.

For the high probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), the change in the fluctuation pattern until the "training reach ceiling" or "normal background reach ceiling" is reached is the same as above, but since the ceiling is never reached in the high probability time-saving play state (no ceiling), a notice is displayed that it is not possible to transition to the high probability non-time-saving play state when the "training reach ceiling" or "normal background reach ceiling" changes, and the "normal" fluctuation pattern is selected for the next and subsequent fluctuations.

In addition, there are also patterns in which "Training Reach Ceiling" is selected as the initial fluctuation pattern, such as the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) entered by winning "Special Chart 1_Specific Pattern 2" in the low probability non-time-saving game state of Figure 223, and patterns in which "Training" is selected as the initial fluctuation pattern, such as the high probability time-saving game state (without ceiling) entered by winning "Special Chart 1_Specific Pattern 3" in the low probability non-time-saving game state of Figure 223.

In addition, there are also patterns in which "normal time" is selected for all fluctuations of Special Chart 1, such as the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) entered by winning "Special Chart 1 - Specific Pattern 16" in the low probability non-time-saving game state in Figure 223.

As described above, in both the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) and the high probability time-saving play state (without ceiling), a variation pattern in which a counter appears is executed, so that the player cannot tell whether he or she is in the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) or the high probability time-saving play state (without ceiling) until the counter reaches zero, creating a sense of tension.

In addition, in order to increase the expectation of transitioning to a high-probability non-time-saving game state when a counter appears, a variation pattern in which a counter appears may be executed in a high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), but a variation pattern in which a counter appears may not be executed in a high-probability time-saving game state (without a ceiling).

Also, for example, it is better that the counter display is less likely to start when there are many small win fluctuations remaining until the ceiling, and the counter display is more likely to start the fewer the remaining small win fluctuations (for example, when the number of remaining small win fluctuations until the ceiling is 10 or less, or when it is less than half the ceiling set when transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling)). If the counter is displayed too early, the possibility of reaching the ceiling is low, which can disappoint the player after getting their hopes up.

Also, for example, the counter may be displayed and then erased, and then redisplayed when the number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling becomes small (for example, the number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling is 10 or less, or less than half the ceiling set when the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling)). This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation when the counter is displayed once, and a sense of tension after the counter is erased because it is difficult to know the number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling, and when the counter is redisplayed, the number of small win variations remaining is small, creating an even stronger sense of anticipation. Also, in order to create a stronger sense of tension for the player, it is not necessary to display the counter again after it has been displayed and then erased.

For example, when the counter is first displayed, the exact number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling may be displayed so that the player cannot know the exact number (for example, "remaining?" or "less than 30 remaining" is displayed), and then when the number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling becomes small (for example, the number of small win variations remaining until the ceiling is 10 or less, or less than half the ceiling set when the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is entered), the exact number of small wins remaining may be displayed. This allows the player to feel a sense of expectation even though he does not know the number of small win variations remaining because the counter is displayed, and when the exact number of small win variations remaining is displayed, the number of small win variations remaining is small, so the player can feel even stronger expectation. Also, in order to give the player a sense of surprise, the exact number of small win variations remaining does not have to be displayed until the ceiling is reached.

In addition, in both the high probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) and the high probability time-saving play state (without ceiling), the player can feel a sense of tension as the counter appears and the fluctuation pattern changes as the player goes through training, hoping that the counter value will decrease quickly, and the player can feel elated as the fluctuation pattern changes as the counter appears and the reach ceiling is reached immediately.

Figure 229 is an example of a winning time table. The winning time table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The winning time table in Figure 229 (a) defines the winning presentation time j, which is the time from the start of the small winning game and the big winning game to the first opening of the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 (until the opening in the first round starts). The winning time table in Figure 229 (b) defines the final winning presentation time y, which is the time from the last closing of the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 in the small winning game and the big winning game to the end of the big winning game (after the closing in the last round ends).

As shown in FIG. 229, the winning start presentation time j and the final winning presentation time y differ depending on the game state when the winning is won, even for the same pattern, but for a big winning game, the game state immediately before the start of the big winning game is referenced, and for a small winning game, the game state immediately after the end of the small winning game is referenced. In other words, for example, if a small winning is won in the final fluctuation (fluctuation that reaches the ceiling) of a high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), the winning start presentation time j and final winning presentation time y of the small winning game are referenced from the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

Figure 230 is an example of a large prize opening time table. The large prize opening time table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The large prize opening time table is a table for defining the opening times in rounds of small prize play and large prize play. Patterns A and B are opening times that are mainly used in rounds during large prize play, and patterns C and D are opening times that are mainly used in rounds during small prize play.

231, 232, and 233 are examples of the large prize opening pattern table. The large prize opening pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The large prize opening pattern table of FIG. 231 shows the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 2006 (the value "left" in the table indicates the first large prize opening 2006) in the big prize game of special chart 1, the large prize opening pattern table of FIG. 232 shows the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 (the value "right" in the table indicates the second large prize opening 2007) in the big prize game of special chart 2, and the large prize opening pattern table of FIG. 233 shows the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007 in the small prize game.

The start j column in the large prize opening pattern table stores one of the patterns in the winning time table in FIG. 229(a), the round column stores one of the patterns in the large prize opening time table in FIG. 230, and the final y column stores one of the patterns in the winning time table in FIG. 229(b).

First, the schedule for small win play will be explained. According to FIG. 233, pattern e is selected as the winning presentation time j for small win play on special chart 1, and pattern f is selected as the winning presentation time j for small win play on special chart 2. Patterns e and f are 0.992 seconds in pattern e of the high probability non-time-saving play state, but are all 0.3 seconds in other play states. In other words, by taking a longer time until the start of the round for small wins on special chart 1 in the high probability non-time-saving play state (small win rush state), it can be suggested that the game will proceed more smoothly and to the player's advantage by hitting to the right in the small win rush state.

In addition, in the small win game of Special Chart 1, pattern C is selected as the opening time of the large prize opening, and in the small win game of Special Chart 2, pattern D is selected as the opening time of the large prize opening. The opening time of Pattern D is 0.1 seconds. Since the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, it may seem difficult to win at the large prize opening, but since the structure is such that the game ball rolls on the opening and closing member of the second large prize opening, it is not difficult to win at the second large prize opening.

Therefore, by playing with a right-handed shot during the small win rush, the game ball can enter the second large winning port 2007 and a prize ball can be obtained. On the other hand, the opening time of pattern D is 0.06 seconds. Therefore, although there is an extremely high probability of winning a small win in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, even if a left-handed shot is performed, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the first large winning port 2006 and obtain a prize ball (for example, only about 0.2 balls per minute will enter).

In addition, pattern "K" is selected as the winning final performance time y of the small winning game of special chart 1, and pattern "K" is selected as the winning final performance time y of the small winning game of special chart 2. In pattern "K", an extremely short time (0.008 seconds) is selected in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, so that the game can proceed smoothly even though the small winning game is won with an extremely high probability in the fluctuation of special chart 1. In pattern "K", a longer time (17 seconds) than other game states is selected in the high probability non-time-saving game state, which suggests that the game will proceed more smoothly and advantageously for the player by hitting to the right in the small winning rush state. On the other hand, in pattern "K", a short time (0.008 seconds) is selected even in the high probability non-time-saving game state, so that the small winning game can be ended early in the small winning rush state, and the ball output speed is increased.

The schedule for big win play will be explained below. According to FIG. 229(a), in the low probability non-time-saving play state, the win start presentation time j is long (33 seconds) in patterns a and c, and short (0.2 seconds) in patterns b and d (patterns e and f are used only for small win play). Similarly, in the high probability time-saving play state, the win start presentation time j is long (33 seconds) in pattern a, and short (0.2 seconds) in patterns b, c, and d.

231 and 232, in the low probability non-time-saving game state and the high probability time-saving game state, a pattern with a short winning start presentation time j (0.2 seconds) is assigned to a sure-win jackpot (direct rush) or a normal jackpot (with time-saving), and a pattern with a long winning start presentation time j (33 seconds) is assigned to other jackpots. As mentioned above, the winning rate of a sure-win jackpot (direct rush) and a normal jackpot (with time-saving) is lower than other jackpots, and they are jackpots that are advantageous to the player, so the winning start presentation time j is different to make the presentation style different. For example, if the screen of the performance display device 1600 suddenly goes black when the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) and normal jackpot (with time reduction) start to fluctuate, and immediately after the blackout (for example, after 1 second), it is announced whether the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) or normal jackpot (with time reduction) has been won, it will be confirmed that either jackpot has been won immediately after the fluctuation starts, so the start performance time j for the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) and normal jackpot (with time reduction) may be shorter than other jackpots.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a normal jackpot, a special jackpot (no ceiling), or a special jackpot (ceiling set) that is won in the low probability non-time-saving play state and the high probability time-saving play state, the winning effect start time j is set long in order to execute an effect that indicates which of these jackpots was won (it is not announced which of these jackpots was won when the jackpot fluctuation ends).

According to FIG. 229(a), in the low probability time-saving game state, the winning start presentation time j in all patterns is shorter than the jackpot start presentation time j in other game states (0.2 seconds).

In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving game state (small win rush state), the winning start presentation time j is long (11 seconds) in patterns a, b, and c, and short (0.2 seconds) in pattern d. According to Figs. 231 and 232, patterns a, b, and c are selected for a jackpot on special chart 1, and pattern d is selected for a jackpot on special chart 2. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the normal game method involves hitting to the right to execute the fluctuation of special chart 2, so that the short winning start presentation time j in pattern d allows the game to proceed smoothly and the ball output speed to increase.

According to Fig. 231 and Fig. 232, in all rounds of the jackpot on Special Chart 1 and the normal jackpot on Special Chart 2, pattern A is selected as the large prize opening time and the first large prize opening 2006 is opened, and in all rounds of the special jackpot on Special Chart 2, pattern B is selected as the large prize opening time and the second large prize opening 2007 is opened. Both pattern A and pattern B are set to a longer opening time (about 20 seconds) compared to the rounds of the small prize game.

According to Figure 231, for the jackpot on Special Chart 1, the final jackpot performance time y is selected as pattern "I" for "Special Chart 1_2R Normal Pattern 2" (normal jackpot (with time reduction)), pattern "C" for "Special Chart 1_2R Specific Pattern 1" (probable jackpot (direct rush)), pattern "D" for "Special Chart 1_2R Specific Pattern 16" (probable jackpot (no ceiling) in low probability state, but probable jackpot (direct rush) in high probability state), and pattern "A" for other jackpot patterns (patterns "O" and "Ka" are only used for jackpot play on Special Chart 2, and patterns "Ki" and "K" are only used for small jackpot play).

According to FIG. 229(b), in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the duration of patterns "A" and "D" (i.e., jackpots other than normal jackpots (time-saving) and special jackpots (direct rush)) is the longest (22.5 seconds) compared to other patterns in Special Chart 1, followed by pattern "B" (normal jackpots (time-saving)) which is the next longest (10.5 seconds), and pattern "C" (special jackpots (direct rush)) which is the shortest (4 seconds). In this way, the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the shorter the final jackpot presentation time y, allowing for a quicker transition to a game state that is more likely to lead directly to ball payouts, and increasing the player's sense of excitement.

For the same reason, in the high probability time-saving game state, the duration of pattern "A" (i.e., a normal jackpot (with time-saving) and a jackpot other than a special jackpot (direct rush)) is the longest (22.5 seconds) compared to other patterns in Special Chart 1, followed by pattern "B" (a normal jackpot (with time-saving)) at 7.5 seconds, and pattern "C" and pattern "D" (special jackpot (direct rush)) at 4 seconds, the shortest.

In the low probability time-saving game state, the time for patterns "A" and "B" is shorter (0.5 seconds) than the other patterns in Special Chart 1, and the time for patterns "C" and "D" is longer (4 seconds) than the other patterns in Special Chart 1. Note that in the low probability time-saving game state, the times for patterns "A" to "D" may all be the same (for example, 4 seconds).

In the high probability non-time shortened game state, the normal gameplay method involves hitting the right side to execute the variation of special chart 2, so in order to make the player aware that it is better to execute the variation of special chart 2 when a jackpot occurs with the variation of special chart 1, a time longer than the final jackpot presentation time y of special chart 2 (41.5 seconds) is adopted for all jackpots on special chart 1.

According to FIG. 232, for the jackpot of Special Chart 2, the final winning performance time y is selected as pattern "O" for normal symbols and pattern "Ka" for specific symbols. According to FIG. 229(b), in the low probability non-time-saving game state and the high probability time-saving game state, both patterns "O" and "Ka" have the same length of time (3 seconds), but that time is shorter than all the patterns of Special Chart 1.

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the time for pattern "Ka" (specific symbol) is longer (4 seconds) than the time for pattern "O" (normal symbol) (0.5 seconds). In the low-probability time-saving game state, if a specific symbol is won, the game transitions to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (i.e. a state advantageous to the player), and if a normal symbol is won, the game transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving game state (i.e. a state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, by setting a longer time for pattern "Ka", more time can be spent on the presentation for transitioning to a state advantageous to the player, which in turn gives the player a sense of elation.

In the high-probability non-time-saving play state, the time for pattern "Ka" (specific symbol) is shorter (2 seconds) than the time for pattern "O" (normal symbol) (7.5 seconds). In the high-probability non-time-saving play state, if a specific symbol is won, the high-probability non-time-saving play state (i.e. a state advantageous to the player) continues, and if a normal symbol is won, the game moves to a low-probability non-time-saving play state (i.e. a state unfavorable to the player). Therefore, by keeping the time for pattern "Ka" short, it is possible to continue playing in the high-probability non-time-saving play state without slowing down the ball dispense speed.

Figures 234 and 235 are examples of a simultaneous change rule table. The simultaneous change rule table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. The simultaneous change rule table defines rules for when a change in special chart 1 and a change in special chart 2 are executed simultaneously. The simultaneous change rule table in Figure 234 defines rules for when a change in special chart 2 starts while a change in special chart 1 is being executed, and the simultaneous change rule table in Figure 235 defines rules for when a change in special chart 2 starts while a change in special chart 2 is being executed.

According to FIG. 234, if a change in special chart 2 starts while a change in special chart 1 is being executed, then, in principle, the change in special chart 1 will continue as is, and the change in special chart 2 will start at the same time. Also, if a change in special chart 2 stops while a change in special chart 1 is being executed, then, in principle, the change in special chart 1 will continue as is, and the change in special chart 2 will stop. Exceptions are explained below.

When the small win fluctuation of special chart 2 stops while the miss fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed, the miss fluctuation of special chart 1 is interrupted and the small win game of special chart 2 is executed, and when the small win game of special chart 2 ends, the interrupted miss fluctuation of special chart 1 resumes (i.e. the time from the start to the end of the miss fluctuation of special chart 1 is extended by the time of the small win game of special chart 2).

Similarly, when the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 stops while the small hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed, the small hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is interrupted and the small hit game of special chart 2 is executed, and when the small hit game of special chart 2 ends, the interrupted small hit fluctuation of special chart 1 resumes (i.e., the time from the start to the end of the small hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is extended by the time of the small hit game of special chart 2). Similarly, when the big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed, the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 stops, the big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is interrupted and the small hit game of special chart 2 is executed, and when the small hit game of special chart 2 ends, the interrupted big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 resumes (i.e., the time from the start to the end of the big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 is extended by the time of the small hit game of special chart 2).

When the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 stops while the miss fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed, the fluctuation of special chart 1 is also confirmed and stopped, and the big win game of special chart 2 is executed. As a result, after the big win game of special chart 2 ends, the confirmed fluctuation of special chart 1 is not executed. Similarly, when the small win fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed and the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 stops, the small win fluctuation of special chart 1 is rewritten as a miss fluctuation, and then confirmed and stopped, and the big win game of special chart 2 is executed. As a result, after the big win game of special chart 2 ends, the confirmed fluctuation of special chart 1 is not executed.

When the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 1 is being executed, the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 2 will not start. However, if the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 1 and the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 2 start at the same time, the jackpot fluctuation of one (e.g. special chart 2) will start, and the jackpot fluctuation of the other (e.g. special chart 1) will start after being rewritten as a miss fluctuation.

According to FIG. 235, if a change in special chart 1 starts while a change in special chart 2 is being executed, then, in principle, the change in special chart 2 will continue as is, and the change in special chart 1 will also start at the same time. Also, if a change in special chart 1 stops while a change in special chart 2 is being executed, then, in principle, the change in special chart 2 will continue as is, and the change in special chart 1 will stop. Exceptions are explained below.

When the small win fluctuation of special chart 1 stops while the miss fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed, the miss fluctuation of special chart 2 is also forcibly stopped. For example, in a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), if the fluctuation of special chart 2 starts just before the ceiling is reached due to the fluctuation of special chart 1 (small win), an extremely long time is selected as the fluctuation time of special chart 2, and if the fluctuation of special chart 2 is not forcibly stopped, the game cannot proceed until the long time of the fluctuation of special chart 2 that started just before the ceiling is reached ends, even after the high probability non-time-saving game state begins in which the fluctuation of special chart 2 is executed by hitting the right side and played, so the miss fluctuation of special chart 2 is forcibly stopped.

For the same reason, when the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed and the small hit fluctuation of special chart 1 stops, the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 is rewritten to a miss fluctuation and is forcibly stopped. Also, for the same reason, when the big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 stops while the miss fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed (because there is a possibility that the big hit of special chart 1 is a big hit that transitions to a high probability non-time-saving play state), the miss fluctuation of special chart 2 is also forcibly stopped. Also, for the same reason, when the big hit fluctuation of special chart 1 stops while the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed (because there is a possibility that the big hit of special chart 1 is a big hit that transitions to a high probability non-time-saving play state), the small hit fluctuation of special chart 2 is rewritten to a miss fluctuation and is forcibly stopped.

When the small win fluctuation of special chart 1 stops while the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed, the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 is interrupted and the small win game of special chart 1 is executed, and when the small win game of special chart 1 ends, the interrupted big win fluctuation of special chart 2 resumes (i.e. the time from the start to the end of the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 is extended by the time of the small win game of special chart 1).

When the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 2 is being executed, the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 1 will not start. However, if the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 1 and the jackpot fluctuation of special chart 2 start at the same time, the jackpot fluctuation of one (e.g. special chart 2) will start, and the jackpot fluctuation of the other (e.g. special chart 1) will start after being rewritten as a miss fluctuation.

Below, we will explain the signals (external information 1 to 8) output from the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter to the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 1. Note that although the signals are explained below in the on and off states, it is also possible to distinguish the state by outputting signals of different values, such as "1" and "0". First, we will explain external information 1 to 3 and external information 7 to 8.

External information 1 is a signal indicating that the fluctuation of special chart 1 and the fluctuation of special chart 2 have stopped. External information 1 is in the ON state for 0.128 seconds after the fluctuation of special chart 1 or the fluctuation of special chart has stopped, and is in the OFF state at other times. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, when the fluctuation of special chart 1 and the fluctuation of special chart 2 stop within an interval of 0.128 seconds because simultaneous fluctuations are performed, external information 1 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state in response to the fluctuation that stopped first, and then, after an interval of 0.128 seconds, external information 1 is changed to the ON state in response to the fluctuation that stopped later, so that the hall equipment can detect two fluctuations.

External information 2 is a signal indicating that game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2004. When game ball B enters the first starting hole 2004, external information 2 is turned on for 0.128 seconds, and is turned off at other times. However, if game ball B enters the first starting hole 2004 within an interval of 0.128 seconds, external information 2 is changed from on to off in response to the first ball entry, and then changed to on in response to the second ball entry after an interval of 0.128 seconds, so that the hall equipment can detect two ball entries.

External information 3 is a signal indicating that a jackpot game has been played. External information 3 is turned on when a jackpot game starts, and is turned off when the jackpot game ends. Note that external information 3 does not have to be on for the entire period during a jackpot game, and may be on for only a portion of the period.

The external information 7 is a signal indicating the number of prize balls. The payout control MPU adds up the prize balls in all recognized winning slots, and whenever the number of prize balls becomes 10 or more, it sends a command to the external terminal board 558 to subtract 10 from the added number of prize balls. The external information 7 is turned on for 0.128 seconds each time the external terminal board 558 receives the command, and is off at other times. However, if the external terminal board 558 receives the command within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the external information 7 is changed from on to off in response to the previous command, and then changed to on in response to the subsequent command after an interval of 0.128 seconds, so that the hall equipment can detect the prize balls corresponding to the two commands.

The external information 8 is a signal indicating a security abnormality. The external information 8 is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when any of the following errors occurs: a large prize entry abnormality (a game ball B enters the large prize entry at a time other than when the large prize entry is opened (during a winning game)), RAM clear, after the setting change is completed, after the setting is confirmed, after power is restored, or a variable prize entry door abnormality (a game ball B enters the variable prize entry door 2521 at a time other than when the variable prize entry door 2521 is opened (after a winning game is won in a regular lottery)). However, if the external information 8 is turned on due to the above-mentioned cause and another of the above-mentioned causes occurs, the external information 8 will remain on for another 30 seconds from the time when the additional cause occurred.

In addition, if any of the following errors occurs, such as a safe switch abnormality, an RWM error, a magnetic abnormality, a setting check, or a setting change error, the external information 8 remains on until the error is resolved. The external signal 8 is off at times other than those mentioned above.

Figure 236 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 4. External information 4 is a signal indicating that the player is in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and that a jackpot game that was won during the high-probability non-time-saving game state is being played.

At timing 2361, the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is reached, so the time-saving function stops while the special function remains on, and the game transitions to a high-probability non-time-saving game state, causing external information 4 to change to the ON state. Timing 2362 is the timing when a normal jackpot is won in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the normal jackpot ends, and is also the timing when the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, at timing 2362, external information 4 changes to the OFF state.

In addition, since the low-probability time-saving game state is a state (pull-back zone) in which the transition rate to the high-probability non-time-saving game state is higher than the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) as described above, the external information 4 may be kept on at the timing 2362 when the low-probability time-saving game state is transitioned to, and the external information 4 may be changed to the off state when the low-probability time-saving game state is transitioned to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, if a guaranteed jackpot (i.e., a jackpot that transitions to the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, the external information 4 may be turned off during the jackpot game, or may be kept on.

Timing 2363 is the timing when a special jackpot is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, the special jackpot ends, and the game transitions back to the high-probability non-time-saving game state. Therefore, at timing 2363, external information 4 changes to the ON state.

Period 2364 is the period during which a special jackpot is won during the high-probability non-time-saving game state and the special jackpot is being played. During period 2364, external information 4 is turned off, and after the special jackpot ends, external information 4 is turned on again.

The hall equipment can recognize from the external information 4 that the player is in the high-probability non-time-saving play state, in which the player is most likely to win balls, and the number of times the player has transitioned to this state (including the number of times the high-probability non-time-saving play state has continued due to a winning jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving play state).

In addition, in order to have the hall machine recognize the high-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability non-time-saving game state that continues due to a winning jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving game state as a single high-probability non-time-saving game state, the external information 4 may be kept on during period 2364. This also applies to external information 6, which will be described later.

When the on/off state of external information 4 changes due to a transition in game state after a jackpot game, the on/off state of external information 4 changes at the end of the jackpot game, but the timing of the on/off state change of external information 4 may be any timing during the jackpot game (however, it is preferable that the timing is after the start of the jackpot game ending so that balls dispensed during the jackpot game can be counted as balls dispensed during a high probability non-time-saving game state or a low probability non-time-saving game state). This also applies to other external information.

Figure 237 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 5. External information 5 is a signal indicating a transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state and a transition to a low probability time-saving game state.

At timing 2371, the high probability function changes to the OFF state and the time-saving function continues to operate, i.e., a transition is made to a low probability time-saving game state, so external information 5 is turned ON for 0.128 seconds and then returns to the OFF state. At timing 2372, the high probability function changes to the ON state and the time-saving function stops operating, i.e., a transition is made to a high probability non-time-saving game state, so external information 5 is turned ON for 0.128 seconds and then returns to the OFF state.

When a transition to a high-probability non-time-saving game state and a transition to a low-probability time-saving game state occur within an interval of 0.128 seconds, as in period 2373, external information 5 is changed from the on state to the off state in response to the previous transition, and then, after an interval of 0.128 seconds, external information 5 is changed to the on state in response to the subsequent transition, so that the hall equipment can detect two transitions.

The hall equipment can recognize the number of transitions to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, in which the player is most likely to win balls, and the number of transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state, in which the probability of transitioning to the high-probability non-time-saving game state is high, using the external information 5.

Figure 238 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 6. External information 6 is a signal indicating that the player is currently in either a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state, a normal jackpot game played during a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a jackpot game played during a low-probability time-saving game state.

At timing 2381, the ceiling of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is reached, the time-saving function is stopped while the probability bonus function remains on, and the game transitions to a high probability non-time-saving game state, so external information 6 changes to the on state.

Period 2382 is the period during which a special jackpot that was won during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (i.e., the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues after the special jackpot game ends), and external information 6 is in the OFF state. After the special jackpot game of period 2382 ends, the game transitions back to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and external information 6 changes back to the ON state.

Period 2383 is the period during which a normal jackpot is won during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (i.e., the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state after the normal jackpot game ends), and external information 6 continues to be in the ON state. External information 6 also continues to be in the ON state during the low-probability time-saving game state.

At timing 2384, the final change in the low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the game moves to a low-probability non-time-saving game state, so external information 6 changes to the OFF state. Note that if the final change in the low-probability time-saving game state is a small win change, external information 6 changes to the OFF state after the small win game ends.

The hall equipment can recognize from the external information 6 that the player is in a high-probability non-time-shortened game state in which it is most likely that the player will win balls, and that the player is in a low-probability time-shortened game state, which has a high transition rate to a high-probability non-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the external information 6 allows the hall equipment to recognize the number of game state transitions from a transition to a high-probability non-time-shortened game state to a transition to a low-probability time-shortened game state (however, if a player wins a special jackpot in the high-probability non-time-shortened game state and transitions back to the high-probability time-shortened game state, this transition is also counted as one transition).

In addition, since simultaneous fluctuations are performed in the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter, when the low-probability time-saving game state ends due to an end trigger based on the number of fluctuations (as mentioned above, the high-probability time-saving game state cannot end due to an end trigger based on the number of fluctuations), the time-saving game state ends at the start of the number of fluctuations that satisfies the end trigger (also called the final time-saving fluctuation), but it is desirable for the external information 6 to change from the ON state to the OFF state when the final time-saving fluctuation stops. This is because if the external information 6 is turned OFF at the start of the final time-saving fluctuation in the low-probability time-saving game state, it will appear to the player that the hall equipment has detected a transition to the time-saving game state before the performance of the performance display device 1600.

However, if the final time-saving fluctuation in the low-probability time-saving game state is the fluctuation of special chart 2, the fluctuation time is very long because it is a "countermeasure long fluctuation" fluctuation pattern, so it takes a long time for the external information 6 to turn off, and even if the first special chart 1 fluctuation starts after the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the external information 6 will be output. However, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, hitting the left side to execute the special chart 1 fluctuation is an advantageous game method for the player, so if you hit the left side, this situation will not occur. Also, according to Figure 235, even if the fluctuation of special chart 2 is executed as a small hit fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation (miss fluctuation is not executed in the low-probability time-saving game state) as the final time-saving fluctuation, when the fluctuation of special chart 1 (miss fluctuation or small hit fluctuation) that started in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is confirmed, the fluctuation of the special chart 2 is confirmed as a miss fluctuation, so the probability of a situation occurring in which the external information 6 remains on for a long time after the low-probability time-saving game state ends is low.

[20-2. Production of Pachinko Machine 1 in this Chapter]
239, 240, and 241 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the performance from the low probability non-time-saving game state to the high probability non-time-saving game state via the high probability non-time-saving game state (with ceiling). In the following, unless otherwise specified, the fluctuation of special chart 1 in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation of special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state are explained.

In addition, unless otherwise specified, in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the reserved on the pedestal displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicates the reserved variation of special chart 1, and in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the reserved on the pedestal displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicates the reserved variation of special chart 2. In addition, of the pedestals displayed on the performance display device 1600, the rightmost pedestal displays the reserved corresponding to the variation being executed, the second pedestal from the right displays the reserved corresponding to the variation to be executed next, the third pedestal from the right displays the reserved corresponding to the variation to be executed next, the fourth pedestal from the right displays the reserved corresponding to the variation to be executed third, and the fifth pedestal from the right displays the reserved corresponding to the variation to be executed fourth.

In addition, in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), a transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state occurs when a predetermined number of fluctuations ends or a predetermined number of small win fluctuations end, and this predetermined number of fluctuations is also called the fluctuation ceiling, and this predetermined number of small win fluctuations is also called the small win ceiling.

In Fig. 239(A), in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special chart 1's guaranteed jackpot is selected and the reach effect is being executed, and the decorative symbols are in the reach state. Fig. 239(B) shows the reach effect being performed, and a display prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Fig. 239(C) shows the state in Fig. 239(B) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, suggesting that a jackpot has been won by the combination of decorative symbols "7-chance-7". Note that the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is a machine that increases the number of balls only by small wins, so the same combination of decorative symbols (for example, 7-7-7) that is displayed when a jackpot is won on a general pachinko machine is not displayed.

Figure 239 (D) shows the state during the guaranteed jackpot game state won in Figure 239 (C). In the guaranteed jackpot game of Special Diagram 1, the first large prize opening 2006 opens, so the performance display device 1600 suggests that the player should aim for the first large prize opening 2006. In addition, an aura is displayed during the jackpot game, and when game ball B enters the first large prize opening 2006, a lottery for aura color promotion can be held. The final aura color after promotion may suggest the expectation of whether the jackpot in progress is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot, or the expectation of the number of small jackpot ceilings in the high probability time-saving game state entered by the guaranteed jackpot (ceiling set).

Specifically, for example, the final aura color at the end of a jackpot game can be determined so that if the final aura color is upgraded to rainbow, a special jackpot (direct rush) is confirmed; if it is upgraded to red, a special jackpot (direct rush) or a special jackpot (with ceiling) with a ceiling of 10 or less small jackpots is confirmed; if it is upgraded to green, a special jackpot (direct rush) or a special jackpot (ceiling set) is confirmed; if it is upgraded to blue, a special jackpot (direct rush), special jackpot (with ceiling), or normal jackpot (with time reduction) is confirmed.

Figure 239 (E) shows the ending of the jackpot game, the aura is displayed in the final aura color, and a display prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Figure 239 (F) shows the state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in Figure 239 (E), indicating that the chance mode will be entered. The chance mode is a state in which the player is in either a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) or a high probability time-saving game state (without ceiling). In other words, it is shown that a sure-win jackpot (ceiling set) or a sure-win jackpot (without ceiling) has been won. In this way, the player cannot recognize whether the state will transition to a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) or a high probability time-saving game state (without ceiling), which can create a sense of tension for the player in the performance in the high probability state.

If a normal jackpot (without time-saving) is won, a message (such as "Too bad...") will be displayed in FIG. 239(F) indicating that the game will transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. If a normal jackpot (with time-saving) is won, a message (such as "High probability jackpot mode" (when in the low-probability time-saving game state, if you win a high probability jackpot, you will transition to a high-probability non-time-saving game state) will be displayed in FIG. 239(F). If a high probability jackpot (straight rush) is won, a message (such as "Small win rush begins!") will be displayed in FIG. 239(F) indicating that the game will transition to a high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In addition, if a normal jackpot (with time-saving) or a guaranteed jackpot (direct rush) is won in the low-probability non-time-saving play state, a transition to a more advantageous state than the high-probability time-saving play state may occur, and a special SP reach presentation different from the presentation shown in Figures 239 (A) to (C) may be performed.

Hereinafter, the pattern determined in Fig. 239(C) is assumed to be "Special pattern 1_2R special pattern 9". According to Fig. 223 and Fig. 228, the small win ceiling of the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) starting from Fig. 239(G) is 15 times, the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern 1 from entering the high probability time-saving game state until the 7th time is "normal", the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern 1 at the 8th time is "training transition", the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern 1 from the 9th time to the 14th time is "training", and the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern 1 at the 15th time (i.e. small win ceiling) is "training reach ceiling". In the fluctuation of the "training reach ceiling", a battle scene between the main character and the enemy character is performed, as will be described in detail later.

In addition, below, we will explain an example where in a high probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), all fluctuations of Special Chart 1 are small hit fluctuations (as mentioned above, in a high probability state, the fluctuations of Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are always large hit fluctuations or small hit fluctuations), and the ceiling is reached.

Figure 239 (G) shows the state in which the first fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "normal") of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In Figure 239 (G), a counter is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the examples of Figures 239 and 240, the counter shows the number of remaining small hit fluctuations of special chart 1 until the small hit fluctuation just before the small hit ceiling ends, but it may also show the number of remaining small hit fluctuations of special chart 1 until the small hit ceiling is reached.

In FIG. 239(G), the counter is displayed from the first change in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), but the counter may be displayed from a predetermined number of changes after transitioning to the high-probability time-saving game state. The predetermined number of changes may differ depending on the small win ceiling number, for example, in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) (for example, the larger the small win ceiling number, the higher the predetermined number of changes). If the counter is displayed from a predetermined number of changes after transitioning to the high-probability time-saving game state, it is preferable to perform an effect indicating that the counter will be displayed at the change before the predetermined number of changes (for example, displaying a message saying "Counter activated next time!").

The counter may also be displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling). However, in order to increase the rate of entering the high-probability non-time-saving game state when the counter is displayed compared to when the counter is not displayed, it is desirable that the rate at which the counter is displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is higher than the rate at which the counter is displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). Also, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation when the counter is displayed, the game may transition to a special presentation stage that is used when the counter is displayed.

Figure 239 (H) shows the state in which the eighth fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training transition") in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In Figure 239 (H), a message is displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicating that the training performance will start with the next fluctuation. Figure 239 (I) shows the state in which the ninth fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training in progress") in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed. In Figure 239 (I), a message is displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicating that the training performance has started.

Figure 240 (J) shows the state in which the 10th fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training") is being executed in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). In the training performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a performance in which the main character (white character) is training.

Figure 240 (K) shows the state in which the 11th fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training") in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and two reserved special charts 1 are stored. An effect is generated on the pedestal corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 1 (i.e., the reserve indicating the 15th fluctuation). In the example of Figure 240, the 15th fluctuation in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is the fluctuation in which the battle performance is performed (in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the 15th small win fluctuation is the small win ceiling), so the effect of the pedestal can suggest the possibility that the small win fluctuation, which is the fourth fluctuation, is the small win ceiling. In addition, in order to make the player more easily recognize the small win ceiling, instead of or in addition to the display of the effect on the pedestal, a semi-transparent display of the battle reserved displayed in Figure 240 (M) described later may be displayed on the pedestal.

Figure 240 (L) shows the state in which the 12th fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training") in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and one reserved special chart 1 has been accumulated. When the fluctuation in Figure 240 (L) is being executed, the small win fluctuation, which is the third fluctuation of special chart 1, is the small win ceiling, so an effect is generated on the third reserved pedestal.

Figure 240 (M) shows the continuation of the 12th variation in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), with three reserved special figures 1 accumulated. When a reserved figure corresponding to a pedestal on which an effect is displayed wins, the effect is erased and a battle reserved figure (a cylinder with the word "battle" displayed) is displayed on the pedestal.

Figure 240 (N) shows the state in which the 15th fluctuation (fluctuation pattern is "training reach ceiling") of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is being executed, and the battle pending is displayed on the base corresponding to the executing fluctuation. When the "training reach ceiling" fluctuation occurs, a battle effect, which is an example of a reach effect, is executed. Figure 240 (N) notifies that a battle effect will start.

Figure 240 (O) shows the state following the 15th fluctuation in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), where a battle scene between the main character and the enemy character (black character) has begun. Figure 240 (P) shows the state at the end of the 15th fluctuation in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), where a scene is being played in which the main character has won the battle scene. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols "7 - Fate - 7" suggests that the small win ceiling has been reached.

When the small win ceiling is reached, the game moves to a high probability non-time-saving game state, but if the first change in the high probability non-time-saving game state is a normal big win change, the game moves to a low probability time-saving game state without increasing the number of balls by playing small wins in the small win rush state. If a direct indication of a transition to a small win rush state (high probability non-time-saving game state) were to occur when the small win change at the small win ceiling ended, the player would be deeply disappointed. Therefore, although the combination of decorative symbols "7-destiny-7" suggests that the small win ceiling has been reached, it does not directly indicate a transition to a small win rush state.

Figure 240 (Q) shows the state in which the ending presentation of the small win game that transitioned from the small win fluctuation that ended in Figure 240 (P) is being performed. As described in the explanations of Figures 229 and 231, the presentation time of the small win game corresponding to the small win fluctuation that reached the small win ceiling is selected from the high probability non-time-saving game state, so 17 seconds (pattern "Ki"), which is long enough to perform the presentation, is selected as the ending time of the small win game (final win presentation time y).

Figure 240 (Q) shows the state where the ending of the small win game has started, and a display indicating the possibility of transitioning to a small win rush state is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the small win ceiling has been reached, to be precise, a transition to a small win rush state (high probability non-time-saving game state) is always made, but as mentioned above, if the first fluctuation in the small win rush state (high probability non-time-saving game state) is a normal big win fluctuation, this type of effect is made to transition to a low probability time-saving game state without increasing the number of balls produced by the small win game of special chart 2.

Figure 240 (R) shows the state following the ending of the small win game, where the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into two, and one display area shows a display indicating that the ball output can be increased by a small win on special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state ("RUSH!"), while the other display area shows a display indicating that the ball output cannot be increased by a small win on special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state and that the game will transition to a low probability time-saving game state (i.e., the first fluctuation on special chart 2 is a normal big win fluctuation) ("Chance mode" (the low probability time-saving game state is the so-called pull-back mode, but since no balls are obtained by playing with a small win on special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state, it is not called pull-back mode but chance mode here)).

In FIG. 241(S), an instruction is displayed on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to hit the ball to the right and place the game ball B in the second starting hole 2005. In FIG. 241(T), in addition to the display in FIG. 240(R), the performance display device 1600 displays the message displayed in FIG. 241(S) and an arrow encouraging the player to operate the handle 192 to aim at the second starting hole 2005.

At the end of the small win game, the CPU of the peripheral control IC refers to a pre-determination command regarding the reservation of the first change in the special chart 2 after the end of the small win game, and determines whether the first change in the special chart 2 is a normal big win (i.e., whether the game will transition to a low-probability time-saving game state). For example, in FIG. 241 (S), an aura may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the aura color may indicate the expectation that the first change in the special chart 2 is not a normal big win.

The first change in the special chart 2 after the small win game ends is considered to be a small win change. In this case, you can win balls by playing the small win game on the special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

Figure 241 (R) shows a state where the ending of the small win game has ended and the high probability non-time-saving game state has started, and a display indicating that the small win rush state has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600. An image imitating the pseudo large prize winning hole 2402 and a message indicating that the pseudo large prize winning hole 2402 can be opened are displayed on the performance display device 1600. The pseudo large prize winning hole 2402 may be openable in all states, or may be openable only in the high probability non-time-saving game state in which the game ball B can be easily acquired in the small win game of the special chart 2, or may be openable only during the small win game of the special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state in which the game ball B can be easily acquired. In addition, a display indicating that the game is executed by right-hitting (right-hit display) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. The right-hit display is assumed to be always displayed during the high probability non-time-saving game state.

If the first change in the special chart 2 after the small win game is a normal big win change, it is not possible to win balls by playing the small win on the special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, even if the high probability non-time-saving game state starts, the display as in FIG. 241 (R) is not displayed, and a display indicating a transition to chance mode (low probability time-saving game state) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. However, even if the first change in the special chart 2 after the small win game is a normal big win change, the performance of FIG. 241 (R) may be executed to give the player a sense of accomplishment for reaching the ceiling of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling).

For example, in FIG. 240 (S), even if the second, third, or fourth fluctuation of the special chart 2 after the end of the small win game is a normal jackpot, and all fluctuations before the normal jackpot fluctuation are guaranteed jackpot fluctuations, the player cannot win balls due to the small win of the special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, since the player cannot win balls due to the small win of the special chart 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state of the special chart 2, in order not to give the player excessive expectations, even if the high probability non-time-saving game state starts, a display such as FIG. 241 (R) is not displayed, and a display indicating a transition to a chance mode (low probability non-time-saving game state) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and since the player can win balls due to the guaranteed jackpot, the display of FIG. 241 (R) may be displayed.

In addition, if the small win game of FIG. 241(T) ends with no pending change in special chart 2, for example, the display of FIG. 241(T) may continue, and if game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005 and the change in special chart 2 corresponding to said winning is other than a normal big win change, the display of FIG. 241(R) may be made, and if the change in special chart 2 corresponding to said winning is a normal big win change, a display may be made indicating a transition to chance mode (low probability non-time-saving game state).

In addition, when the small win game of FIG. 241 (T) ends with no pending change in special chart 2, for example, a presentation during the high probability non-time-saving game state described below may be performed, or the display of FIG. 241 (R) may be continued or a display indicating a transition to chance mode (low probability non-time-saving game state) may be displayed, and when game ball B enters second starting hole 2005, a presentation during the high probability non-time-saving game state described below may be performed.

The control for displaying the pedestal effects will be described below in Figures 240 (K) and (L) etc. When the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 refers to a time-saving count table, for example, to set the number of fluctuations and the number of small win fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and subtracts one from the set number of fluctuations or the number of small win fluctuations each time a fluctuation or small win fluctuation ends.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the small win ceiling will be reached due to the small win variation, which is the variation of special chart 1 after four times, in step S245, the main control MPU 1310a includes information indicating that the small win ceiling will be reached due to the small win variation, which is the variation of special chart 1 after four times, in the pre-determination command. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to display the pedestal effect in Figure 240 (K) by referring to the pre-determination command. The same control is also performed for the display of the pedestal effect in Figure 240 (L).

In addition, even if the number of remaining variations of the special chart 1 until the variation corresponding to the small win ceiling is within 4 times, if the variation of the special chart 1 (including the variation in progress) before reaching the small win ceiling contains a big win variation, the small win ceiling cannot be reached (excluding cases where the big win variation is a sure-win (with time reduction), and after the big win play, the game moves to a high-probability time-saving play state (without ceiling), and the variation of the special chart 1 corresponding to the small win ceiling in the previous high-probability time-saving play state (with ceiling) happens to be the "training reach ceiling"). In such a case, if the effect of the pedestal is displayed, the player may misunderstand that a battle performance will be performed with the variation corresponding to the effect of the pedestal after the big win play. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC does not need to display the pedestal effect when it determines that the variation of the special chart 1 before reaching the small win ceiling (including the variation in progress) contains a big win variation, even if the number of remaining variations of the special chart 1 until the variation corresponding to the small win ceiling is within 4 times, by referring to the advance judgment command.

In addition, if the change in Special Chart 1 that was won before the reserved one corresponding to the pedestal after the effect of the pedestal is a jackpot change, the battle effect will not be performed in the change in Special Chart 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal (except when the jackpot change is a guaranteed jackpot (with time reduction), and after the jackpot play, the game transitions again to a high probability time reduction play state (no ceiling), and the change in Special Chart 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal happens to be the "training reach ceiling").

In such a case, it is advisable to erase the pedestal effect after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot variation of special chart 1 has ended (if it has changed to a battle reserve, erase the battle reserve). Also, if the pedestal effect is displayed and the variation of special chart 1 that was won before the reserve corresponding to that pedestal is a jackpot variation, if the pedestal effect remains displayed, the player may mistakenly believe that a battle performance will be performed with the variation corresponding to the pedestal effect after the jackpot game. Therefore, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the pedestal effect but determines by referring to the advance determination command that the variation of special chart 1 that was won before the reserve corresponding to that pedestal is a jackpot variation, it may erase the displayed pedestal effect.

In addition, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the effect of the base, but refers to the advance judgment command and judges that the variation of the special chart 1 that was won before the reserved corresponding to the base is a jackpot variation, for example, a battle presentation may be performed with the jackpot variation, and the displayed pedestal effect may be erased, or the pedestal effect may be displayed on the pedestal of the variation (displayed suddenly, moved, etc.), and the reserved corresponding to the jackpot variation may be changed to a battle reserve. At this time, the counter value may also be decremented so that a battle presentation is performed with the jackpot variation. Then, if the jackpot variation is a probability jackpot (direct rush) variation, a presentation in which the main character wins in the battle presentation may be performed, and if the jackpot variation is other than a probability jackpot (direct rush) variation, a presentation in which the main character loses in the battle presentation may be performed.

For example, if an effect is displayed on the base corresponding to the small win ceiling, and the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling is a big win fluctuation, a battle hold may be displayed as in FIG. 240 (M). In this case, for example, if the big win fluctuation is a high probability big win (straight rush) fluctuation, a battle presentation may be performed in which the main character wins, and if the big win fluctuation is other than a high probability big win (straight rush) fluctuation, a battle presentation may be performed in which the main character is defeated.

In addition, after changing the base effect while the number of remaining fluctuations of special chart 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling is within 4, if there is a win corresponding to the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 and this big win fluctuation of special chart 2 ends before the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling, for example, a special performance (a performance indicating that the big win of special chart 2 has been won) is performed in this big win fluctuation of special chart 2, and after the big win game corresponding to this big win fluctuation of special chart 2 ends, the game state transitions to a stage corresponding to the game state (if the big win of special chart 2 is a normal big win, it is a low probability non-time-saving game state, and if the big win of special chart 2 is a probability-variable big win, it is a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling)), the base effect is erased, and the reserved special chart 1 is displayed in the normal manner.

In addition, after changing the pedestal effect while the number of remaining fluctuations of special chart 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling is 4 or less, if there is a win corresponding to the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 and this big win fluctuation of special chart 2 ends before the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling, a performance in which the battle performance is defeated by this big win fluctuation of special chart 2 is performed, and after the big win game corresponding to this big win fluctuation of special chart 2 ends, the game state transitions to a stage corresponding to the game state (if the big win of special chart 2 is a normal big win, it is a low probability non-time-saving game state, and if the big win of special chart 2 is a sure-win big win, it is a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling)), the pedestal effect is erased, and the reserved special chart 1 is displayed in the normal manner.

In addition, although the fluctuations of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are executed simultaneously, the fluctuation time of one "countermeasure long fluctuation" of special chart 2 may be set to be longer than the total time of the remaining four fluctuations until the small win ceiling of special chart 1. In this way, even if there is a win corresponding to the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 when the number of remaining fluctuations of special chart 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling is four or less, the fluctuation corresponding to the small win ceiling of special chart 1 will end before the big win fluctuation of special chart 2 ends, so there is no need to perform a special performance even if the pedestal effect is displayed.

In the example of FIG. 240, the display of the base effect started during a variation that was being executed when the variation four steps ahead was the small win ceiling, but the display of the base effect may also start during a variation that was being executed when the number of remaining variations until the small win ceiling is three or less. In this case, however, if the pending variation that corresponds to the small win ceiling has already won by the time the display of the base effect starts, for example, a pending change performance may be executed at that timing to change the pending display of the variation that corresponds to the small win ceiling to a battle pending.

In addition, even in the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), effects may be displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the change in the "training reach ceiling" (in this case, if the change in the "training reach ceiling" is not a guaranteed big win (direct rush), the main character will be defeated in the battle performance described below). In addition, in both the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) and the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), effects may be displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the change in a change pattern that is not selected in the change corresponding to a small win ceiling such as "training" (a change pattern in which a battle performance cannot be executed) (in this case, if the reserved corresponding to the pedestal wins, a battle reserved is not displayed and a normal reserved is displayed). With these performances, even if an effect is displayed on the pedestal, the player does not know whether the game will transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state after the change corresponding to the pedestal ends, so the tension can be maintained.

In addition, according to the hit determination table in FIG. 220(a), in a high probability game state, no miss variations are executed, and all variations other than big hit variations are small hit variations, so the value of the counter shown in FIG. 239 and FIG. 240 (indicating the remaining number of times until the battle performance variations that can be executed at the small hit ceiling) is decremented by 1 each time a variation of Special Chart 1 is executed, unless that variation is a big hit variation.

Here, for example, it may be possible to win a losing variation even in a high probability game state. In this case, even if a variation of special chart 1 is executed, if that variation is a losing variation, the counter value will not be decremented. Also, even if a variation of special chart 1 is executed when the effect of the pedestal is displayed, the effect of the pedestal will not move to the pedestal one to the right, but will be displayed on the same pedestal.

When a losing variation is won even in a high probability game state, there is a possibility that the variable ceiling will be reached and the game will transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state, so in addition to or instead of the counters shown in Figures 239 and 240, a counter indicating the remaining number of losing variations that are expected to reach the variable ceiling may be displayed. Also, when a losing variation is won even in a high probability game state, in addition to or instead of the pedestal effect shown in Figure 240, an effect may be displayed on the pedestal at the reserved position that is expected to reach the variable ceiling.

There may also be a presentation stage or background image that gives the expectation that the number of remaining small win fluctuations until the small win ceiling is small. For example, the background images are in the order of daytime < evening < night, which increases the expectation that the number of remaining small win fluctuations until the small win ceiling is small. For example, assume that a daytime background image is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and when the next small win fluctuation ends, it changes to an evening background image. If a losing fluctuation is won even in a high probability game state, if a losing fluctuation is won in this state, the number of remaining small win fluctuations until the small win ceiling does not decrease, so the evening background image is maintained.

In addition, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the pedestal effect is being displayed, if the volume adjustment display or light adjustment display is displayed, or if no winning occurs corresponding to the pedestal effect and the game is stopped and the display switches to a demo screen, etc., and the pedestal effect becomes unsightly (or is not displayed at all), the player will feel uneasy if the pedestal effect is erased when the game returns from such a state, so it is desirable for the pedestal effect to be displayed.

Specifically, for example, the pedestal effect information may be stored as game backup information, and the pedestal effect may be displayed at the same time as returning from that state. Also, even if the pedestal effect information is not stored in the game backup information, when returning from that state, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may generate the above-mentioned advance judgment command and send it again to the peripheral control IC, thereby redisplaying the pedestal effect.

In addition, since some players do not want other players to know that the pedestal effects are displayed and that there is a high probability of transitioning to a high-probability non-time-saving play state, if the pedestal effects described above become unnoticeable (or are not displayed at all), it is not necessary to display the pedestal effects again when returning from such a state.

Figure 242 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in a high-probability non-time-saving game state. The high-probability non-time-saving game state is a small win rush state, in which the player can easily win balls by playing the small wins shown in Special Chart 2. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, right-hitting is an advantageous game method for the player, so in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, a right-hit display (a right-facing arrow with "Right Hit!!" inside it) is always displayed in the upper right corner of the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 242 (A) shows the state where the small win fluctuation of special chart 2 has ended in the high probability non-time-saving play state. At the end of the small win fluctuation of special chart 2 (i.e., immediately before the start of the small win play), an effect is displayed. Also, during the small win play in the high probability non-time-saving play state and the high probability non-time-saving play state, while the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 provided inside the second large prize opening 2007 opens (i.e., pressing the pressing operation unit 303 opens the pseudo large prize opening 2402, but it closes again when the pressing is stopped). Although no new prize balls are obtained when game ball B enters the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the presentation mode changes.

In Figure 242 (A), an image of the main character uttering the line "Try erasing me!" (encouraging the player to erase the character image) and a display encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 303 (collectively referred to as the first instruction display) are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition, the number displayed in the lower left corner of the performance display device 1600 is an acquired ball display indicating the total number of prize balls obtained by game ball B that entered the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and previously entered the second large prize opening 2007 in a small prize game and a large prize game in a single high-probability non-time-shortened game state (if a special jackpot is won in a high-probability non-time-shortened game state and the high-probability non-time-shortened game state continues, it is treated as if one high-probability non-time-shortened game state has not ended. Also, if a normal jackpot is won in a high-probability non-time-shortened game state and the game transitions to a low-probability time-shortened game state, but a special jackpot is won in the low-probability time-shortened game state and the game returns to the high-probability non-time-shortened game state, it may also be treated as if one high-probability game state has not ended). Also, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (even in a small win game won in the high-probability non-time-saving game state), the display "RUSH IN!!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, indicating that the player is in a small win rush state, which is an advantageous state for the player. However, as will be described in detail later, it is desirable that this "RUSH IN!!" display be erased midway through the big win fluctuation in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and not be displayed even in a big win game.

Figure 242 (B) shows the state during the small win game that was won in Figure 242 (A). In Figure 242 (B), the player does not follow the instructions of the first instruction display and does not press the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., the sensor installed in the pressing operation unit 303 does not detect the operation), which means that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is not open. Since the player does not follow the instructions of the first instruction display, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is closed. Therefore, although game ball B is caused to enter the second large prize opening 2007 during the small win game, game ball B does not enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402. In this case, a prize ball is obtained by entering the second large prize opening 2007, but the value of the won ball display does not increase.

Figure 242 (C) shows a state in which a small win fluctuation is taking place in a high probability non-time-saving game state. In Figure 242 (C), the player is pressing the press operation unit 303 in accordance with the instructions of the first instruction display (i.e., the sensor provided on the press operation unit 303 detects the operation), meaning that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is open. When the press operation unit 303 is pressed, the first instruction display is not displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, the first instruction display may be erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened as soon as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (i.e. as soon as a sensor provided in the pressing operation unit 303 detects the operation), or the first instruction display may be erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (i.e. after a predetermined time has elapsed since a sensor provided in the pressing operation unit 303 detects the operation (there may be multiple values for this predetermined time, in which case one value is selected from the multiple values by a predetermined allocation)).

Similarly, the first instruction display may be displayed a predetermined time after pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped (i.e., a predetermined time after a sensor provided in the pressing operation unit 303 no longer detects the operation (there may be multiple values for this predetermined time, in which case one value is selected from the multiple values by a predetermined allocation)).

Figure 242 (D) shows a state in which a small win game is being played with the pressing operation unit 303 pressed down. Since the player is following the instructions of the first instruction display, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is open. Therefore, when game ball B enters the second large prize opening 2007 during a small win game, the majority (e.g., 95%) of the game balls also enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402. Each time game ball B enters the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (i.e., when the sensor installed in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 detects game ball B), the display "+15" (i.e., the prize ball obtained by game ball B entering the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and then entering the second large prize opening 2007 before that) is displayed for a predetermined time, and the value of the winning ball display is also increased by 15.

In this way, the display showing the number of balls won is only made by operating the pressing operation unit 303 to open the pseudo large prize opening 2402, providing a game with high operability in which the player constantly operates the handle 192 and the pressing operation unit 303 with each hand.

Moreover, as will be described in detail later, the exact number of balls won (i.e., the value including the balls won by game ball B that won the second large winning port 2007 but did not enter the pseudo large winning port 2402) is displayed on the result screen at the end of the high probability non-time-saving game state, but for example, the player can deliberately not operate the pressing operation unit 303, so that the exact number of balls won is not known until the result screen is displayed, which can increase the sense of tension. In this way, once there is a discrepancy between the exact number of balls won and the value of the winning ball display, the discrepancy cannot be corrected by the player's will (operation), and the player must wait for the result screen to be displayed. However, since it may happen that the high probability non-time-saving game state continues for a long time and the result screen is not displayed for a long time, the discrepancy may be corrected (i.e., the value of the winning ball display matches the exact number of balls won) by the player operating a specified operation unit.

The position and size of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 are preferably determined so that most (e.g., 95% or more) or all of the game balls B that enter the second large prize opening 2007 enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402 when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is open. This is because if the proportion of game balls B that enter the second large prize opening 2007 that enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is low, even though the player opens the pseudo large prize opening 2402 in order to know the number of balls won, the player may feel stressed.

In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving play state, the first instruction display may not be displayed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed. This allows the player to have fun thinking about how to increase the value of the acquired ball output display (in the first place, the player does not know that it is an acquired ball output display and does not know what the value is).

In addition, contrary to the above example, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 may be open when the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed, and closed when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed. In other words, the game is such that a player who does not want to know the number of balls won until the result screen is displayed presses the pressing operation unit 303.

Figure 243 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the presentation of a high probability non-time-saving game state. In Figure 243 (A), the special chart 2 is fluctuating, and the first instruction display is displayed because the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated. In the example of Figure 243, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in accordance with the first instruction display to open the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the first angle) is shallow, so the game ball B that has entered the second large prize opening 2007 cannot enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (or only a portion of the game balls (approximately 10% of the game balls B that have entered the second large prize opening 2007) enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402).

In Figure 243 (B), the variation in special chart 2 in Figure 243 (A) continues, and in addition to the main character, a chance character (a character displayed larger than the main character) uttering the line "Erase meeeeee!!" (displayed larger than the main character's line "Try erasing me!" encouraging the player to erase the character image) and a display encouraging the player to press the pressing operation unit 303 twice (these three displays together are also called the double instruction display) are displayed.

When the push operation unit 303 is pressed twice in accordance with the two-indication display in FIG. 243(B), the state described in FIG. 243(C1)-(C4) is reached (for example, according to a predetermined allocation). In all of FIG. 243(C1)-(C4), the push operation unit 303 is pressed twice in accordance with the two-indication display, and a small win is being played, and the image encouraging the user to press the push operation unit 303 has been erased.

In FIG. 243 (C1), the main character and chance character have been erased. In this case, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens at a deep angle (hereinafter also referred to as the second angle) that allows game ball B to enter, and game ball B enters the pseudo large prize opening 2402. Therefore, the same display as in FIG. 243 (D1) is performed.

In FIG. 243 (C2), the main character has been erased, but a chance character is displayed. In this case, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens, but the opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the third angle) is deeper than when the first instruction display is followed, but is shallow enough that game ball B that has entered the second large prize opening 2007 cannot enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (or only a portion of the game balls (approximately 30% of the game balls B that have entered the second large prize opening 2007) can enter). Therefore, the value of the won ball display does not increase, and the "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C3), the chance character has been erased, but the main character is still displayed. In this case, because the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is open at the first angle, game ball B does not enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402. Therefore, the value of the winning ball display does not increase, and the message "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C4), neither the main character nor the chance character is erased and remains displayed. In this case, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is not opened, and game ball B does not enter the pseudo big prize opening 2402. Therefore, the value of the winning ball display does not increase, and the "+15!" is not displayed.

In addition, only the chance character and a display prompting the user to press the contact operation unit 302 different from the pressing operation unit 303 (these two displays together are also referred to as the second instruction display) may be displayed. In this case, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated according to the second instruction display, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens at a third angle.

The double indication in FIG. 243(B) may also be in a state in which both the first indication and the second indication are displayed. In this case, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated first according to the first indication, the first indication is erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened at a first angle, and if the touch operation unit 302 is operated first according to the second indication, the second indication is erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened at a third angle. Then, once the operation of both the pressing operation unit 303 and the touch operation unit 302 is completed, both the first indication and the second indication are erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened at the third angle.

In the double instruction display, the display areas of the main character or the main character's lines and the chance character or the chance character's lines may overlap, but since the opening angle of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger when the chance character is erased, the chance character or the chance character's lines are displayed in priority over the main character or the main character's lines in the overlapping display areas.

Although there may be a transition from a state in which the first instruction display is displayed to a state in which the double instruction display is displayed, it is preferable that there is no transition from a state in which the second instruction display is displayed to a state in which the double instruction display is displayed. This is because if a main character, which has a lower display priority and a smaller display size than the chance character, is displayed after the chance character, this may actually dampen the player's expectations. Also, there may be a transition from a state in which the first instruction display is displayed to a state in which only the second instruction display is displayed instead of the double instruction display. In this case, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated in accordance with the second instruction display, the second instruction display is erased and the first instruction display is displayed.

When the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display are displayed on the performance display device 1600, sounds corresponding to these instruction displays (for example, the lines of each instruction, or "Press the button!", etc.) may be output. However, if a transition is made to either the second instruction display or the double instruction display while the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is being displayed, it is preferable that the output of the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is stopped and the sound corresponding to the one of them is output preferentially. Also, if a transition is made to the first instruction display while a sound corresponding to the double instruction display or the second instruction display is being output, it is preferable that the output of the sound corresponding to the one of them is stopped and the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is output.

Also, when the first, second or double instruction display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the lamp may emit light in a manner corresponding to these instruction displays. However, if the lamp is emitting light in a manner corresponding to the first instruction display and then transitions to either the second or double instruction display, the lamp may stop emitting the lamp sound in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display and the lamp may preferentially emit light in the manner corresponding to the one of the two. Also, if the lamp is emitting light in a manner corresponding to the second or double instruction display and then transitions to the first instruction display, the lamp may stop emitting light in the manner corresponding to the one of the two, and the lamp may emit light in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display.

The timing of paying out game balls B may also be timed to coincide with the timing of the increase in the acquired ball display. In other words, when the first instruction display, second instruction display, or double instruction display is displayed, the acquired ball display does not increase, so game balls B are not paid out at that time. In this case, the number of game balls B that entered the second large prize opening 2007 but did not enter the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is stored, and, for example, when the result screen is displayed (i.e., when the display of the first instruction display, second instruction display, or double instruction display has ended), balls corresponding to the stored number of game balls B are paid out.

The chance character may be a character that appears only in the high probability non-time-saving play state. In this case, since the player has few opportunities to see the chance character, for example, in the high probability non-time-saving play state, there may be a mode in which the chance character is always displayed (in this mode, even if the pressing operation unit 303 or the performance operation unit 304 that can be operated by the player is operated, the display of the chance character is not erased and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 remains closed rather than opened). Since this mode in which the chance character is always displayed is an extremely special mode, it is desirable that the transition between the normal mode and the mode in which the chance character is always displayed cannot be performed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can only be performed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the hall staff with the door frame 5 open, for example.

In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial state may be set to a high probability non-time-saving game state so that the player can easily win balls. As a result, for example, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the first instruction display, second instruction display, or double instruction display is displayed, the first instruction display, second instruction display, or double instruction display will be displayed at the same time as the game becomes executable, or after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Figure 244 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation that takes place when transitioning from a high-probability non-time-saving game state to a low-probability time-saving game state. As mentioned above, when a normal jackpot on Special Chart 2 is won in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, and when a special chart 2 special jackpot is won, the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues even after the jackpot game ends.

Figure 244 (A) shows a state in which a normal jackpot fluctuation (i.e., a jackpot fluctuation that transitions to a low-probability time-saving play state) is occurring in a high-probability non-time-saving play state. From here on, up to Figure 244 (F), the normal jackpot fluctuation is occurring. In Figure 244 (B), the performance display device 1600 goes black, suggesting that a jackpot has been won. The "RUSH IN PROGRESS!!" display has been erased, suggesting that a jackpot has been won, and since there is a possibility that the high-probability non-time-saving play state may end. In Figure 244 (C), a result screen is displayed, and the number of balls counted in the won ball display (i.e., only balls counted by balls entering the pseudo large prize opening 2402) in the high-probability non-time-saving play state is displayed.

Figure 244 (D) is a continuation of the result screen, and the value of the ball win display has changed to the number of balls actually won in the high-probability non-time-saving play state (i.e. all balls won as a result of winning the second large prize opening 2007 (including those that did not enter the pseudo large prize opening 2420)). This allows the player to check the number of balls actually won. Note that if all game balls B that won the second large prize opening 2007 in the high-probability non-time-saving play state have entered the pseudo large prize opening 2420, the display of the number of balls won will not change.

In FIG. 244 (E), the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into two, with one display area displaying a message indicating that the small win rush will continue (i.e., the jackpot that has been won is a guaranteed jackpot), and the other display area displaying a message indicating that the mode will shift to a pull-back mode (i.e., the jackpot that has been won is a normal jackpot). In addition, a message is displayed encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 303.

Figure 244 (F) shows the state in which the pressing operation unit 303 in Figure 244 (E) has been operated. In the example of Figure 244, since a normal jackpot has been won, the display area showing the indication of transitioning to the pull-back mode continues to be displayed, and the other display area goes black, indicating that the mode will be transitioned to the pull-back mode.

Figure 244 (G) shows the state where a normal jackpot game has started. In the jackpot game of Special Figure 2, the second large prize winning hole 2007 opens, so the performance display device 1600 suggests that the player should aim for the second large prize winning hole 2007 when playing. Figure 244 (H) shows the state where the game has transitioned to a low-probability time-saving game state. A display showing the number of time-saving games in the low-probability time-saving game state is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition, the low-probability time-saving game state is different from the high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the player was playing until just before, and playing with a left-handed hit is an advantageous game method for the player, so a left-handed hit display (a left-facing arrow with "LEFT HITTING!!" written inside it) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

In the above example, the number of newly acquired balls in a small win game during the high probability non-time-saving game state is always equal to or greater than the acquired ball display displayed during the high probability non-time-saving game state. Conversely, for example, the maximum number of balls that can be acquired in one small win game in a small win game (for example, the number of balls when one game ball B enters the second large winning hole 2007 in one small win game) may be added to the value of the acquired ball display before the small win game of the special chart 2 starts. Also, for example, the number of prize balls obtained when one game ball B enters the second large winning hole 2007, or balls that exceed the maximum number of balls that can be acquired in one small win game (for example, the number of balls when two game balls B enter the second large winning hole 2007 in one small win game) may be added to the value of the acquired ball display.

Specifically, for example, when the peripheral control IC receives a pre-determination command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicating that the fluctuation corresponding to the winning is a small win fluctuation when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2005, the maximum number of balls is added to the value of the winning ball display by the time the small win fluctuation corresponding to the winning starts (for example, at the time of the winning or at the start or end of the small win fluctuation corresponding to the winning). Therefore, the number of balls newly acquired in a small win game during a high probability non-time-saving play state is always equal to or less than the value of the winning ball display. However, for the fluctuation of the special chart 2 after a normal big win fluctuation, the value of the winning ball display does not need to be added before the start of the small win game (because the game will transition to a low probability time-saving play state and balls cannot be acquired from the small win game of the special chart 2).

When the result screen is displayed, the value of the ball win display shown on the result screen changes to the number of balls actually won in the high-probability non-time-saving play state (i.e., the balls that could not be won because they could not win the second large winning slot 2007 during the small win play of Special Chart 2 are subtracted). This allows the player to know the difference between the maximum number of balls that can be won and the balls actually won in the small win play during the high-probability non-time-saving play state, and to check his/her own playing skill.

In addition, the value displayed in the acquired ball display on the result screen may be adjusted each time a small win game starts or ends, rather than being adjusted all at once to the number of balls actually acquired. Specifically, for example, if the value of the acquired ball display is increased before a small win game starts, but game ball B does not enter the second large winning hole 2007 during that small win game, the value of the acquired ball display is decreased when that small win game ends, or the value of the acquired ball display is increased during the next small win game.

The comment selection effect will be explained below. In the following, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is provided with a cross key consisting of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button that can be operated by the player. The comment selection effect is an effect that can appear in any of the following play states: low-probability non-time-saving play state, high-probability non-time-saving play state, high-probability non-time-saving play state, and low-probability time-saving play state, and further, it is an effect that can appear during small win play and big win play. An example of the comment selection effect being executed in the low-probability non-time-saving play state will be explained below.

Figure 245 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a comment selection performance. Figure 245 (A) shows a state in which the variation of special chart 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display encouraging the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the comment selection performance has begun. In the comment box, multiple comments are displayed. When the up button or down button is operated, a black arrow for selecting a comment moves up and down. In Figure 245 (A), the comment "Yum" has been selected. Note that the display encouraging the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 does not have to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 245 (B) shows the state shown in Figure 245 (A) with the down button pressed. As the down button was operated, the black arrow for selecting comments moves downward, and the comment "What is this lol" is selected.

Figure 245 (C) is an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of Figure 245 (B). The image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment indicated by the black arrow in Figure 245 (B) is displayed, moving in a flowing manner from the right end within the performance display device 1600. Hereinafter, the comments that are displayed and move in this flowing manner are also referred to as "flowing comments." The flowing comments are erased in order, starting with the characters that reach the left end of the performance display device 1600.

If all comments of different categories were displayed in one box, it would take a long time for the player to find the comment they want to select from all the comments by only operating the up or down button. Therefore, when the left or right button is operated while a comment box is displayed, comments of a different category than the comment currently being displayed in the comment box are displayed.

By displaying the flow comment selected by the player in the comment selection performance, the player can select which performance to display, allowing the player to enjoy the performance even more. Note that, as will be described in more detail later, the comment selection performance may be executable while the fluctuations are stopped.

Figure 246 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection performance. Figure 246 (A) shows a state in which the variation of special chart 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display encouraging the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the comment selection performance has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. Note that the display encouraging the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 does not have to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the state shown in Figure 246 (A), when the left or right button is operated, comments of a different category than the comment currently being displayed in the comment box are displayed, and when the up button is operated, the number of comments displayed in the comment box increases (however, there is a limit to the number of comments that can be displayed in a comment box, and the display in the comment box does not change even if the up button is operated when the maximum number of comments are displayed), and when the down button is operated, the number of comments displayed in the comment box decreases (however, as in the example of Figure 246 (A), when only one comment is displayed, the display in the comment box does not change even if the down button is operated).

Figure 246 (B1) is an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of Figure 246 (A). The image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment that was displayed in the comment box of Figure 246 (A) is displayed by moving in a flowing manner from the right end within the performance display device 1600.

Figure 246 (B2) is an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of Figure 246 (A). The image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment that was displayed in the comment box of Figure 246 (A) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a running comment, and the character's dialogue performance is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, when the comment selection performance and the dialogue performance can be executed with the same change, both performances can be progressed with a single operation of the pressing operation unit 303, thereby reducing the effort of the player's operation.

Figure 246 (B3) is an example of the state when the up button is operated in the state of Figure 246 (A). One comment is added above the comment that was displayed in Figure 246 (A). Figure 246 (C3) is an example of the state when the up button is further operated in the state of Figure 246 (B3). One more comment is added above the comment that was displayed in Figure 246 (B3).

In this way, each time the Up button is operated, one comment is added to the top row, allowing the player to look forward to seeing what comments are available as options. However, because a comment is added to the comment box each time the Up button is operated, other effects are hidden by the added comment, reducing their visibility. Therefore, for players who wish to restore visibility to other effects, the number of comments displayed in the comment box is reduced when the Down button is operated (comments displayed at the top row are erased).

In other words, the example in FIG. 245 has the advantage that all comments are always displayed in the comment box during the comment selection presentation, allowing the player to see all selectable comments at once, whereas the example in FIG. 246 has the advantage that the player can adjust the number of comments displayed in the comment box by operating the up and down buttons, allowing the player to adjust the visibility of other presentations.

Figure 246 (D3) is an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of Figure 246 (C3). The image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment that was displayed at the top of the comment box in Figure 246 (B3) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a running comment.

In this way, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated when multiple comments are displayed in the comment box, the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a running comment. That is, a comment reflecting the result of operating the up button and the down button before operating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a running comment. When the display of the running comment starts, a sound corresponding to the selected running comment (for example, the sound of the running comment itself) may be output. This allows the player to enjoy operating the pressing operation unit 303 in the comment selection performance more. In addition, a sound corresponding to the running comment displayed at the top may be output each time the number of comments in the comment box increases or decreases by operating the up button and the down button. This allows the player to understand what comments are available by simply operating the up button and the down button, even if the player is concentrating on other changing performances and not looking at the comment box.

In addition, when a stream comment of a certain category is displayed, a sound in a manner corresponding to the stream comment is output, and when a stream comment of another category that can be selected by operating the left button or the right button is displayed, the display of the performance display device 1600 may be changed to a display manner corresponding to the stream comment. For example, if the other category includes the comments "Day!", "Evening!", and "Night!", when "Day!" is displayed as a stream comment, the background image in the performance display device 1600 is changed to a day background, when "Evening!" is displayed as a stream comment, the background image in the performance display device 1600 is changed to an evening background, and when "Night!" is displayed as a stream comment, the background image in the performance display device 1600 is changed to a night background. Note that multiple comment boxes may be displayed simultaneously, with comments of different categories displayed in each comment box (in this case, for example, a comment box can be selected by operating the left button or the right button).

In this way, the display of the performance display device 1600 is changed along with the display of the running comments, so that the player can enjoy the display of the running comments and the change in the background image at the same time. In addition, by operating the up button and down button, the display mode may change to the one corresponding to the running comment displayed at the top each time the number of comments in the other category in the comment box increases or decreases.

In addition, in Figure 246 (A), one comment in the category in the comment box is displayed first, but all comments in that category may be displayed initially (the number of comments displayed can be reduced by operating the down button). Also, in the comment selection presentation, all comments in that category may be displayed at all times, and operating the up and down buttons may move the cursor, allowing a comment to be selected by aligning the cursor. In this way, by being able to recognize all comments from the beginning, it is easier for the player to select from the beginning which comment to display as a flow comment.

In addition, in the comment selection performance, the comment selected by the player by operating the up button, down button, left button or right button, and the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed as a running comment on the performance display device 1600, so the content of the selected running comment or the number of running comments displayed does not indicate the expected probability of a big hit or small hit for the fluctuation being executed.

In addition, in the comment selection effect, when at least a portion of the display area of the comment box overlaps with another effect image so that the player can easily read the comment, it is desirable that the display priority of the comment effect display device 1600 is higher than the display priority of the other effect image. In other words, when at least a portion of the display area of the other effect image overlaps with the comment box, it is desirable that the comment box is visible in the overlapping display area, and the other effect image is not visible.

In addition, when an error display and a comment box are displayed at the same time, it is desirable that the display priority of the comment in the comment box on the performance display device 1600 is lower than that of the error display. Also, it goes without saying that when a movable body provided on the pachinko machine 1 moves onto the performance display device 1600 and covers at least a portion of the area of the comment box, that at least a portion of the area becomes invisible.

In this way, in the comment selection presentation, the comment selected by the player can be displayed as a flowing comment on the presentation display device 1600, allowing the player to enjoy the presentation he or she has selected. In addition, a comment box may be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, allowing the comment selection presentation to be executed at all times. This allows the player to enjoy the flowing comments at any time.

Figure 247 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection performance. Figure 247 (A) shows a state in which the variation of special chart 1 is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display encouraging repeated tapping of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the comment selection performance has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. Note that the display encouraging repeated tapping of the pressing operation unit 303 does not have to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 247 (B) shows the state in Figure 247 (A) where the press operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly. The number of flow comments equal to the number of times the press operation unit 303 is pressed is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, when a flow comment is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the press operation unit 303 is further operated, multiple flow comments can be displayed simultaneously on the performance display device 1600. For example, by repeatedly pressing the press operation unit 303 at high speed, a performance can be executed in which a large number of flow comments are displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 248 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the comment selection presentation. In the example of Figure 248, as in the example of Figure 246, the player can adjust the number of comments displayed in the comment box by operating the up button and down button. Figure 248 (A) shows the state where the change of special chart 1 has started. Figure 248 (B) shows the state following the change of special chart 1 in Figure 248 (A), where one comment is displayed in the comment box and the comment selection presentation has started. Note that the display of the comment box may start simultaneously with the start of the change, or the display of the comment box may start by operating a specified operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303) during the change.

In the example of FIG. 248, no image is displayed to prompt the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303. However, as in FIG. 246 etc., when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated while the comment box is displayed, the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed as a scrolling comment. The comment box may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the change, or the comment box may be displayed by operating the pressing operation unit 303 once during the change.

Figure 248(C) shows the state in Figure 248(B) where the up button has been operated and one comment has been added. Figure 248(D) shows the state in Figure 248(C) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated and the top comment in the comment box is displayed as a running comment. Figure 248(E) shows the state in Figure 248(D) where the up button has been operated and one comment has been added, and then before the running comment that began to be displayed in Figure 248(D) is deleted, the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated and the top comment in the comment box is also displayed as a running comment.

Figure 248 (F) shows the state when the changes made in Figures 248 (A) to (E) have ended. The comment box is cleared at the same time as the changes end, or when a predetermined time has passed since the change ended (e.g., 5 seconds later). When the comment box is not displayed, the flow comment will not be displayed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated.

Figure 248 (G) shows a state where the fluctuations remain stopped, and in Figure 248 (F) the comment box is erased and then a predetermined time (e.g. 10 seconds) has passed, after which the comment box is redisplayed. This allows the running comments to be displayed even when the fluctuations have stopped, and even if a player wants to concentrate on a presentation other than the running comments during the fluctuations, they can check the running comment presentation after the fluctuations have ended.

For example, if a player likes a certain comment, the comment box is deleted with the comment displayed at the top of the comment box in order to display the comment as a running comment. When the comment box is redisplayed after the fluctuation has ended, it is desirable that the comment in the comment box displayed in FIG. 248(G) (i.e., the comment that is redisplayed after the fluctuation has stopped) be the same as the comment in the comment box displayed in FIG. 248(E) (i.e., the comment at the end of the fluctuation or immediately before it is deleted after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the fluctuation) so that the comment that the player liked can be displayed immediately as a running comment when the comment box is redisplayed after the fluctuation has ended.

Figure 248 (H) shows the state in Figure 248 (G) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, and the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed as a running comment on the performance display device 1600. If the state in which the fluctuations are stopped is maintained, the comment box may continue to be displayed so that the player can enjoy the running comment at any time. If the state in which the fluctuations are stopped is maintained, a loop may be repeated in which the comment box is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed, and then redisplayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Even in this loop of erasing and redisplaying, it is desirable that the contents of the redisplayed comment box be the same as the contents of the comment box immediately before it was erased.

In FIG. 248(F), the comment box is temporarily cleared after the fluctuation stops, but since some players may want to enjoy the flow of comments immediately after the fluctuation stops, the comment box may remain displayed. In addition, after the comment box is temporarily cleared after the fluctuation stops, the comment box is automatically redisplayed after a predetermined time has passed, but since some players do not like the comment selection presentation, the comment box may be redisplayed after a predetermined time has passed and a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303) is operated.

The display size and display position of the comment box displayed during fluctuation and the comment box displayed during stopped fluctuation may be the same or different. The display size of the comment box displayed during stopped fluctuation may be the same or different. For example, since only the comment selection effect is executed during stopped fluctuation, and effects other than the comment selection effect are also executed during fluctuation, the comment box during stopped fluctuation should be displayed larger and closer to the center of the effect display device 1600 than the comment box during fluctuation.

As in the example of FIG. 248, by making it possible for the comment selection effect that can be executed during the fluctuation to be executed even after the fluctuation has stopped, the player can enjoy the effect even when, despite operating the handle 195 to play, the game ball B does not enter the start hole and the fluctuation does not start.

Figure 249 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a comment selection effect. In Figure 249 (A), in a low-probability non-time-saving play state, a SP reach effect (a reach effect with a higher probability of winning than a normal reach) is executed during a change in special chart 1, and a white character is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the SP reach of Figure 249, a white character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the probability of winning is indicated by whether or not text is then displayed on the character's face, and by the text itself.

Figure 249(B) shows the continuation of the SP reach presentation, with the word "meat" displayed on the character's face, suggesting the likelihood of a big win. Figure 249(C) shows the continuation of the SP reach presentation. The character with the word "meat" remains displayed, and multiple flow comments are displayed automatically without the player's input.

Flow comments that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach performance may suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, for example, depending on the number of flow comments displayed and the content of the comments. It is also desirable that flow comments that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach performance do not overlap with flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operation. If these flow comments overlap, the flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operation can be displayed even at times when the likelihood of a jackpot is not high, and if these flow comments are automatically displayed during the SP reach performance, this could reduce the player's sense of expectation.

On the other hand, since some players may want to check the flow comments displayed during the SP reach performance at a later time, the flow comments that can be displayed by the player's operation may include flow comments that can be displayed during the SP reach performance.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine as a gaming machine, but it is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5A Game board 5B Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Performance display device 2002 Gate 2002,
2004 First starting port 2004
2005 Second starting gate 2006 First major prize gate 2007 Second major prize gate 2402 Pseudo major prize gate 3000 Back unit (rear unit)
3010 Back box (holding body)
3010a Opening 3011 Functional surface portion (specific surface portion)
3012 Functional hole portion 3015 Predetermined member 3016 Intermediate member 3017 Intermediate member 3200 Back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 Back front peripheral decoration body (decoration body)

Claims (1)

A lottery means for conducting a lottery to determine whether a prize is awarded or not based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition;
a bonus awarding means for awarding one of a plurality of bonuses including at least a first bonus and a second bonus based on a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the lottery;
a performance display means for displaying the performance executed by the performance execution means;
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
The expected number of gaming profits that can be awarded to the player when the second privilege is awarded is configured to be smaller than that when the first privilege is awarded,
When the first special benefit is awarded, a congratulatory image is not displayed on the effect display means, and when the second special benefit is awarded, the congratulatory image can be displayed on the effect display means,
A sense of expectation effect can be executed as a precursor effect for the congratulatory image to be displayed, and the congratulatory image is always displayed when the sense of expectation effect is executed and a specific effect is achieved instead of a predetermined effect,
After the congratulatory image is displayed, a congratulatory continuation image different from the congratulatory image can be displayed, and when the second benefit is again granted, both the expectation production and the congratulatory image are not displayed at the same time;
In a situation where the congratulations continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the congratulations continuation image can be hidden during the progress of the performance based on the result of the lottery,
When a performance suggesting the granting of the first benefit is performed, the continuation blessing image may be displayed again even if the continuation blessing image is once hidden ,
In a situation where the congratulations continuation image is displayed, a prompting image for prompting an operation on the operation unit and a predetermined performance display that can be hidden based on an operation on the operation unit can be displayed,
In a situation where the congratulation continuation image is displayed, when a performance suggesting the granting of the first privilege is performed, the predetermined performance display is made non-displayed together with the prompt image during the progress of the performance based on the result of the lottery even if no operation is performed on the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images